Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Specification
Distribution Centre International 2014

Page 1 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

TABLE OF CONTENTS:
1

PRELIMINARY REMARKS...........................................................................5

1.1

Plot........................................................................................................................... 5

1.1.1
1.1.2
1.1.3
1.1.4

General...................................................................................................................... 5
Plot area.................................................................................................................... 5
Requirements of the building regulations...................................................................5
Development requirements........................................................................................6

1.2

Coordination with Construction Dept....................................................................6

1.3

Coordination with Logistics Dept...........................................................................7

1.4

Coordination with Procurement Dept....................................................................8

1.5

Coordination with IT Dept.......................................................................................8

1.6

Coordination with Administration Dept.................................................................9

REQUIREMENTS ON PLANNING DOCUMENTS........................................9

2.1

General..................................................................................................................... 9

2.2

Scope of services of general and/or specialist planner.......................................9

2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4

General...................................................................................................................... 9
Construction.............................................................................................................. 9
Mechanical & Electrical (M&E)................................................................................10
Technical drawings (Plans)......................................................................................11

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION.............................................................................15

3.1

General................................................................................................................... 15

3.2

Construction.......................................................................................................... 19

3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.5
3.2.6
3.2.7
3.2.8
3.2.9
3.2.10
3.2.11
3.2.12
3.2.13
3.2.14
3.2.15
3.2.16
3.2.17
3.2.18

General.................................................................................................................... 19
Earthworks.............................................................................................................. 19
Load-bearing and supporting structures..................................................................21
Walls (solid construction).........................................................................................22
Storey/Suspended ceilings (solid construction).......................................................23
Faade.................................................................................................................... 24
Roof......................................................................................................................... 27
Smoke and heat vent transom lights/Light domes...................................................28
Industrial floor.......................................................................................................... 30
Loading bridges.......................................................................................................38
Sectional doors........................................................................................................39
Dock shelters........................................................................................................... 40
External doors/External windows.............................................................................40
Inside doors/Inside windows....................................................................................42
Rapid roll doors.......................................................................................................43
Fire protection doors................................................................................................44
Cold room construction............................................................................................45
Steel construction....................................................................................................47

Page 2 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

3.2.19
3.2.20
3.2.21
3.2.22
3.2.23
3.2.24
3.2.25
3.2.26
3.2.27
3.2.28
3.2.29
3.2.30

Metalwork/Impact protection....................................................................................47
Walls/Ceilings (Lightweight construction).................................................................51
Tiles......................................................................................................................... 52
Floor coverings (carpet and PVC)...........................................................................52
Wallpapering and paintwork.....................................................................................53
Markings/Signage....................................................................................................53
Lift........................................................................................................................... 55
Locking system........................................................................................................55
Equipment Building..................................................................................................56
Drainage, external facilities......................................................................................56
Superstructure, external facilities.............................................................................57
Landscaping............................................................................................................ 57

3.3

Mechanical & Electrical.........................................................................................58

3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.3.5
3.3.6
3.3.7

General.................................................................................................................... 58
Heating system........................................................................................................58
Ventilation system....................................................................................................69
Sanitary system.......................................................................................................81
Sprinkler.................................................................................................................. 96
Electrical system....................................................................................................103
ICA........................................................................................................................ 137

MANUFACTURERS/SUPPLIERS/PRODUCTS........................................167

4.1

Construction........................................................................................................167

4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.1.4
4.1.5
4.1.6
4.1.7
4.1.8
4.1.9
4.1.10
4.1.11
4.1.12
4.1.13
4.1.14
4.1.15
4.1.16
4.1.17

Faade.................................................................................................................. 167
Roof....................................................................................................................... 168
Light domes/Smoke and heat vent transom lights.................................................168
Industrial floor........................................................................................................169
Loading bridges/Sectional doors/Dock shelter.......................................................170
Rapid roll doors.....................................................................................................171
Fire protection doors, Fire protection doors, Steel doors.......................................172
External doors/External windows from aluminium.................................................172
Door fittings........................................................................................................... 173
Cold room construction..........................................................................................173
Walls/Ceilings (Lightweight construction)...............................................................174
Floor coverings......................................................................................................174
Markings/Signages................................................................................................175
Lift......................................................................................................................... 175
Locking system......................................................................................................175
Equipment, building...............................................................................................175
Other..................................................................................................................... 176

Page 3 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

4.2

Mechanical & Electrical.......................................................................................177

4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.4
4.2.5
4.2.6

Heating system......................................................................................................177
Ventilation system..................................................................................................178
Sanitary system.....................................................................................................178
Sprinkler................................................................................................................ 179
Electrical system....................................................................................................179
ICA........................................................................................................................ 181

COMMISSIONING.....................................................................................181

ACCEPTANCE.......................................................................................... 182

MAINTENANCE/INSPECTION/SERVICE.................................................185

APPENDICES........................................................................................... 187

Page 4 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

PRELIMINARY REMARKS
The specification in its present form, including Appendices, forms the basis for the
planning and construction of Lidl Distribution Centres.
The performance limits and specifications have to be coordinated with all
construction and mechanical & electrical trades, as well as with the services
provided by the client.

1.1

Plot
1.1.1

General
Prior to purchasing the plot, it is necessary to examine the applicable structural
and technical requirements for access roads, utility services (gas, electricity,
water, and wastewater), earthquake zone, etc. In addition, the land register
extracts have to be examined in respect of entries (e.g. easements), and the
development (development plan) planned by Lidl has to be agreed and approved
with the building authority. It is essential to obtain a ground and foundation soil
survey report. The plot must also be examined for archaeological finds.
Any necessary special foundations and soil improvement measures due, to poor
subsoils, have to be agreed with Construction Department Int. In general, all
alternatives such as soil replacement, soil stabilisation, enlarging of foundations,
deep foundation, etc. have to be examined with regard to applicability and
economic viability.

1.1.2

Plot area

mainly rectangular plot geometry, planar

approx. 91,000 m (approx. 380 x 240 m) plus required areas for:

- optional extension of the warehouse


- green areas, embankments
- drainage pits
Please note: Applies to standard layout Distribution Centre Int. 2014
1.1.3

Requirements of the building regulations

Rating in accordance with development plan in industrial area

Admissibility of emission values, sound pressure level minimum daytime 65


dB(A), night time 55 dB(A)
Admissibility of gross volume, minimum 530,000 cubic metres, gross floor
space minimum 44.000 m, fascia height minimum 17.50 m above future site
Admissibility of 24 hour passenger car and HGV traffic (unrestricted)

Admissibility of 24 hour warehouse operation (unrestricted)

No requirements, which restrict the use of the site

If possible, no requirements in respect of roof and/or faade greening

If possible no known archaeological site

Page 5 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

1.1.4

Development requirements

1.2

28.02.2014

Development Traffic (Access roads):


- Width minimum 7.00 m
- Clearance height, greater/equal 4.50 m
- Road gradient maximum 6 %
- Road suitable for heavy loads
Development Utilities:
- Electricity: connected load ca. 1,500 kW (transformer output approx. 2,000
KW)
- Gas: connected load approx. 1,650 and/or 2,000 kW (without and/or with
reserve for optional Extension Warehouse)
- Potable water: connected load approx. 4.50 and/or 6.50 l/s (without and/or
with condenser refrigeration system exposed to water) plus connected
load for back feeding sprinkler tank after fire event in accordance with
regulation
- Extinguishing water: provision in accordance with National regulations
- Rain water: preferably refer topage or feeding into watercourses provided
savings in respect of sewer fees are possible and geologically feasible.
Alternatively, sewer connection in accordance with calculation, taking any
rain retention into account
Please note: The connected loads are only guidelines in respect of the
standard layout Distribution Centre Int. 2014 and the standard users as well
as the climate zone Central Europe.
The connection services may not be laid through other plots.

Coordination with Construction Dept.


Prior to starting the planning process, the relevant project-specific cost factors
have to be obtained from Lidl (e.g. Construction Dept. Land) as a basis for
decisions with regard to the respective system conceptions, and to be made
available to the general and/or specialist planner instructed with the planning.
These include:
Execution of the refrigeration system (industrial refrigeration for cold rooms)

Electricity price incl. grid costs (/kWh)

Water price - potable, waste and rain water (/m)

Gas price - natural gas (/m or /kWh)

Gas price - liquid gas, if required (/l or /kWh)

Oil price - heating oil, if required (/l or /kWh)

Heating price - district heating, if available (/l or /kWh)

Also required for the conception of the refrigeration system are:


Water hardness (dH) - Refer to water analysis

pH-Value water - Refer to water analysis

Existence of ground or well water


Please note: the utilisation of ground or well water requires obtaining and
submitting a chemical and micro-bacteriological water analysis.
Any possible, available funding and/or subsidies should be investigated
during the pre-planning phase and, where applicable, utilised for the
Distribution Centre and/or individual systems.
Optionally, a certification process can be carried out for so-called green
buildings.
Page 6 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Any necessary measures that deviate from the present specification must
be agreed beforehand with the Construction Dept. Int.
Prior to sending the tender, all project-specific deviations and
particularities in respect of the present Specification Distribution Centre Int.
including the reason for the deviations have to be submitted to and agreed
with Construction Dept. Int. (---> create Deviations list).
Please note: The filled-in questionnaire Design outputs Distribution Centre Int.
can be used as a basis when creating the Deviations list.
1.3

1 Coordination with Logistics Dept.


All current structural and technical requirements, which may be necessary from a
logistic or operational point of elevation, have to be punctually coordinated with
Logistics Dept. (if required with the support of Logistics Dept. Int.) (Refer to
Appendix Questionnaire Logistics, Procurement, IT, Administration)
These particularly include, but are not limited to the following:
Areas and clear opening heights, warehouse areas

Cold hall with reserve for extending the freezer


(Insulated floor slab with frost protection heating system)
Warehouse with reserve capacity for optional extension (e.g. block stacking
area)
Execution and/or requirement, cold room RS/Chocolate and GI/GO
RS/Chocolate
Execution and/or number of freezer cells

Execution and/or requirement, cold storage cell for write-offs (perished goods)

Execution and/or requirement, conveyor belt for Non-Food returns

Execution and position, lifting platform for forklift trucks in workshop

Execution shelving (e.g. type, position, number of shelves/shelf clearance)

Execution and position, tobacco store, Non-Food store, cold hall

Execution Gatehouse/Security concept

Execution of lane numbering and/or marking

Number of levels and rows, chain conveyor (Number of deep-freeze boxes)

Execution and/or requirement for induction loops for rapid rise doors

Quantities of, and position of, operating material for logistics (e.g. container,
compactors)
Execution of locking system (agreement of locking plan)

Storage of general and hazardous substances and/or substances requiring


approval (e.g. water polluting substances, flammable liquids, aerosols,
pyrotechnics):
- Type of the stored products (name with classification in accordance with
building regulations and/or regulations for sprinkler systems)
- Location of stored products and maximum storage height (inventory
structure)
- Number of and/or quantity of stored products
Please note: also applies to deep-freeze boxes and promotional goods!
These details have to be binding to prepare the application documents for the
building permit and/or change of use proceedings as well as for planning the
sprinkler system.

Page 7 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Special requirements for the storage of certain products may arise as a result
of the aforementioned point (e.g. creating separate areas and/or rooms for
hazardous substances, area demarcations, zoning, hazardous substance and
extinguishing water retention).
---> Refer to Appendix (Template Storage requirements).
Here, the suitable positioning of the rooms for hazardous substances
has to be determined in project-specific terms, taking into account the
flexibility for an optional extension of the cold rooms.
1.4

Coordination with Procurement Dept.


All current structural and technical requirements, as well as interfaces, have to be
punctually coordinated with Procurement (if required with support by Procurement
Dept. Int.) (Refer to Appendix Questionnaire Logistics, Procurement, IT,
Administration)
These particularly include, but are not limited to the following:
Execution of high racks (e.g. coordination shelf sprinkler) and loads for the
floor slab (load table)
Load table, high rack (details of possible suppliers), in particular:

1.5

- Compressive forces (area pressure)


- Tensile forces (longitudinal and lateral)
Please note: Considerations for special requirements (e.g. earthquake zones)
The earthquake coefficients (as a basis for building and shelf calculations)
have to be obtained in advance for specific factors (e.g. ground and
foundation soil surveys).
Execution of the chain conveyor and box washing bays

Execution of the battery recharger (e.g. for ventilation system requirements)

Execution of the intruder alarm system

Execution of the video system/security concept

Execution of the HGV display (e.g. required support structure)

Execution of the HGV GIighbridge

Execution of the freezer cell (e.g. shelf inside freezer cell)

Execution of the cold storage cell for write-offs (perished goods)

Execution of the conveyor belt in Non-Food return

Execution of the lifting platform for forklift trucks in workshop

Execution of the operating material for logistics (e.g. compactors)

Other consumers and/or connections (e.g. drying chambers)

Coordination with IT Dept.


All current structural and technical requirements, as well as interfaces, have to be
punctually coordinated with IT Dept. (if required with support by IT Dept. Int.)
(Refer to Appendix Questionnaire Logistics, Procurement, IT, Administration)
These particularly include, but are not limited to the following:
Execution of the locking system (agreement of locking plan)

Execution of the access control (Access Control)

Execution of the work time monitor (WTM)

Execution of the telephone system

Execution of the EDP system

Execution of the IT server room

Page 8 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Please note: A different room size (e.g. 5 window axes instead of 3 window
axes) may be required to integrate the back-up server from the country of the
Head of Operations into the IT server room.

Route planning (cable conduits)

Frequencies for operating the pager system

Remote access to control ICA technology and refrigeration system


1.6

Coordination with Administration Dept.


All current structural and technical requirements, as well as interfaces, have to be
punctually coordinated with Administration (if required with support by
Procurement Dept. Int.) (Refer to Appendix Questionnaire Logistics,
Procurement, IT, Administration)
These particularly include, but are not limited to the following:
Office areas

Administration with reserve capacity for optional extension (e.g. 2nd Floor)

Separation of archive (spatial division)

Execution of the locking system (agreement of locking plan)

REQUIREMENTS ON PLANNING DOCUMENTS

2.1

General
The following requirements serve the project-specific conceptualisation (variant
comparison), and the examination of all design outputs by the client (Construction
Dept.).
Please note: The filled-in questionnaire Planning basis for sprinkler system at
Distribution Centre Int. is to be used in particular when planning the sprinkler
system at the Distribution Centre.
All planning documentation (e.g. drawings, calculations, descriptions, expert reports) has to be submitted to the Contractor and to the client.
All planning documentation has to be named in accordance with a dedicated plan
and document code (Refer to Appendix Sample Plan and Document code)
If required, the project may be carried out via the Internet portal Conject.

2.2

Scope of services of general and/or specialist planner

2.2.1

General
To enable the client to check the planning documentation (e.g. drawings,
calculations, descriptions), these have to be punctually submitted to the client
(Construction Dept.) before submitting the planning application.
Please note: It is obligatory to prepare a project-specific concept for a fire
extinguishing system, as the basis for planning the sprinkler system.
The accepting expert and/or the authorising body will reelevation the planning and
monitor the sprinkler system (Acceptance).
Any possible, available funding and/or subsidies should be investigated during the
pre-planning phase and, where applicable, utilised for the Distribution Centre
and/or individual systems.
Optionally, a certification process can be carried out for so-called green
buildings.
Please note: Any necessary measures must be agreed between
Dept.Construction Land and Dept.Construction Int. and their implementation
defined for future planning.
If there are conceptual deviations, possibly due to financial factors, from the
present specification for the Distribution Centre Int., an economic efficiency

Page 9 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

calculation for the operating time of the Distribution Centre must be provided in
each case as evidence.

2.2.2
2.2.2.1

2.2.2.2

Construction
Initial data collection

Land register extract detailing the size of the plot and possible easements

Land register extract

Geodesy

Site plan with elevations and topography

Site plan with planned positioning of buildings and external facilities, as well
as connection to the public road network
Utility plans (electricity, gas, water, wastewater)

Possible structural restrictions by authorisation bodies (development plan)

Survey/Expert Opinion

Property surveying with elevations

Subgrade and foundation soil survey report with:


- Foundation recommendation
- Earthquake coefficients (as basis for building and shelf structural
calculations)
Fire protection certificate/fire protection concept/concept for a fire
extinguishing system
Certificate showing overall energy efficiency of the building (energy certificate)

Sound insulation certificate

Experts opinion for the storage of hazardous substances and, if required,


explosion protection (e.g. flammable liquids with propellant and/or aerosol)
If required: expert opinion for hazardous substance and extinguishing water
retention

2.2.2.3

Calculations

2.2.2.4

Structural calculations of the load-bearing structure, roof construction, faade,


floor slab
Settlement analyses

Road and external facilities construction with considerations for the suitability
for heavy loads
On-site drainage

Calculation for rain water drainage on the property (rainfall intensity)

Calculation for rain water retention (volumes for reservoirs), if applicable

Economic efficiency calculation (if there are conceptual deviations from the
present specification, due to financial factors)

Other

Asphalt surfacing works

Loading bridge construction (troughs or support wall)

Faade variant

Insulation thickness (roof and faade)


Page 10 of 215

3.1

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

2.2.3

28.02.2014

Mechanical & Electrical (M&E)

Heating system

2.2.3.2

Heating load calculation

(Annual) heating requirement

Pipe network calculation

Heat distribution network

Heating area design

Design data and/or calculation of all components (e.g. data sheets)

Economic efficiency calculation (if there are conceptual deviations from the
present specification, due to financial factors)

Ventilation system

Air volume calculation (air change rates)

Air duct network calculation (if central ventilation system exists)

Cooling load calculation (if air conditioning and/or partial air conditioning
system exists)
Design data and/or calculation of all components (e.g. data sheets)

2.2.3.3

2.2.3.4

Sanitary system

Calculation for the potable water requirement

Calculation for wastewater drainage

Calculation for rain water drainage, building (rainfall intensity)

Pipe network calculation for water distribution network

Design data and/or calculation of all components (e.g. data sheets)

Economic efficiency calculation (if there are conceptual deviations from the
present specification, due to financial factors)

Sprinkler system

Hydraulic calculation for the most unfavourable, hydraulically ineffective areas


(all groups) with isometry (incl. all fittings, pipe and lengths, detailing the
equivalent lengths for connectors)
Pump characteristic curve (of the extinguisher pump to be installed) with
indicated system point and operating point (intersection of group characteristic
curve with pump characteristic curve) of the respective group
Calculation for extinguishing water reservoir (volume)

Design data and/or calculation of all components (e.g. data sheets)

Economic efficiency calculation (if there are conceptual deviations from the
present specification, due to financial factors)

2.2.3.5

Economic efficiency calculation (if there are conceptual deviations from the
present specification, due to financial factors)

Electrical system

Lighting calculation
Page 11 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

2.2.3.6

2.2.4

28.02.2014

System output (design data for transformer, EPAS)

Design data and/or calculation of all components (e.g. data sheets)

Economic efficiency calculation (if there are conceptual deviations from the
present specification, due to financial factors)

ICA

Data point lists

ICA schematic

Description of regulation (with reference to ICA schematic)

Economic efficiency calculation (if there are conceptual deviations from the
present specification, due to financial factors)

Technical drawings (Plans)


All technical drawings (plans) must have a clear and distinctive header, which has
to meet the following requirements:
Technical drawing key-code in accordance with the agreement from the client
and the clients specification
Name of the project

Person who has created the technical drawing (e.g. technical planner)

Name and logo of the client (Lidl)

Type of plan (e.g. layout, detail, elevation)

Plan content (e.g. external areas, reinforcement, faade, mechanical &


electrical)
Name of the part of the building (e.g. Warehouse, Administration)

Floor (e.g. ground floor, first floor)

Details of the performance phase (e.g. draft, execution, revision planning)

Date of plan creation

List with index updates with date and details of the amendment
(e.g. - Index a DD:MM:YYYY Openings, Door, Freezer rooms revised )

The following technical drawings (plans) have to be submitted to the Contractor


(principal contractor) and to the client:
Plans, Architecture/Construction/Load-bearing structure planning
- Layout plans
- Sections (Longitudinal and lateral sections)
- Detail plans
- Elevations
- Precast elements/laying plans
- Geometry/Axis plan
- Position plans
- Route plans
- Survey plans
- Schematic
The details must comply with the requirements according to the installation
plans/sections

Page 12 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Installation plans/sections
The installation plans/sections have to include the following details:
- Information relating to geographical North (arrow for orientation)
- An illustration of the technical installations with dimensions
- An illustration of the components with connections
- An illustration of the utilities, services and/or pipe, cable routing
(horizontal, vertical if applicable)
- An illustration of the Shaft allocation (if required)
- Cross-sectional elevation of important intersection points
- Details relating to the reference dimensions for building and components
- Details relating to the (Text and/or drawing) insulation measures against
heat loss and/or heat gain and for fire protection
- Details relating to the materials and quality (additional quality requirement)
- Details relating to the coordinating contents with other trades building
regulations
- Details relating to the performance limits
- Details relating to the type of fixture (installation instructions)
- Details relating to the required openings (without producing wall slot und
opening plans)
- Details relating to the volume flows of air and pipe conduits
- dimensions of air and pipe conduits
- Details relating to the room conditions
(temperature and/or humidity in summer/winter, sound level, if required)
- Details relating to the room volume flows
- Details relating to the room heating requirement and/or cooling load
- Details relating to the special technical parameters
(Connection, load and sound details)
- Details relating to the planning production method/type
- General information ( e.g. heat insulation, applies to ...)
Please note: The installation plans/sections should also contain the following
information for the sprinkler system works:
Details relating to the building/warehouse areas
- Details relating to the dimensions of the building with roof/ceiling height
(upper edge of the finished floor to lower edge of the ceiling to solid
ceilings and to the upper edge of the trapezoidal sheet metal)
- Details relating to the cross section and aerial elevations of the building,
showing all construction elements (e.g. trusses, girders, all mechanical &
electrical works as well as smoke and heating vents and information about
their activation)
- An illustration of the roof construction with roof/ceiling gradient, insulation
and load-bearing, supporting structures (steel, etc.)
- An illustration of the layout and construction of internal and external walls
(if applicable, with fire resistance duration of walls and doors)
- An illustration of the layout and construction of smaller areas without
sprinkler protection, cavities (suspended ceilings, hollow cable floors etc.)
- Details relating to the usage of all areas including areas without sprinkler
protection (e.g. rack or block storage layout)

Page 13 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Shelf type (single or double rack), dimensions of individual shelf rows


(length x width x height + aisle width, open or closed shelves) as GIll as
diagonal and longitudinal shafts
Exact specification of the clear opening height between sprinkler spray
disk and upper edge of the highest, stored goods

Sprinkler systems
- Details relating to the sprinkler system
(Layout plan and sections, crash plan for all works)
- Details relating to the number of sprinkler groups
- Details relating to the design of sprinkler group
(Manufacturers/type of sprinkler; trigger temperature, nominal width, water
coverage and effective area)
- Details relating to the distance between sprinkler spray disk and ceiling
(upper edge in case of trapezoidal sheet metal roofs)
- Details relating to the brackets, sliding types, couplings, pipe and sprinkler
dimensioning, drain and rinsing pipes and test connections with test
sprinklers
- Details relating to the location of wall hydrants
- Component list with details relating to their approval (sliders, brackets,
pipes, couplings, wet alarm valve station, dry alarm valve station, low
indicator sprinkler pump, pressure maintenance pump, pump control
cabinet, pump drive, flow meter, etc.)
- Details relating to the estimated volume of pipelines (especially for dry
systems)
- Details relating to the material for pipelines (especially for dry systems)
Water supply
- Details relating to the underground pipes (e.g. distance to buildings and
installation depth, pipe , pipe material, size of abutments; connectors,
position of line valves and external hydrants)
Pump house
- Aerial elevation, side and sectional elevation with dimensions (pump
house and extinguishing water reservoir)
- Design (characteristics) and position of sprinkler pump, pump control
cabinet, pump drive, pressure maintenance pump and fuel supply.
- Details relating to the room heating system and ventilation system
Sprinkler tank (extinguishing water reservoir)
- Details relating to the construction, position, dimensions, volume and
usable volume of extinguishing water reservoir
- Details relating to the frost protection (e.g. type and thickness of insulation,
number and output of the heating rods)
- Details relating to the tank refilling pipework (e.g. pipe , number and size
of swimmer valves)

Page 14 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Schematic/function and block diagrams


The schematic serves to give a more detailed depiction of technical systems.
The schematic has to contain the following details:
- An illustration of the technical systems (functional)
- An illustration of the components with connections
- An illustration of the utilities and/or pipe, cable routings (functional)
- An illustration of the measuring, regulatory and control devices, stating
target values and limits
- Details relating to the (text and/or drawing) insulation measures against
heat loss and/or heat gain and for fire protection
- Details relating to the materials and quality (additional quality requirement)
- Details relating to the coordination contents with other trades, building
regulations
- Details relating to the performance limits
- Details relating to the main volume flows of air and pipelines
- Details relating to the main dimensions from air and pipelines
- Details relating to the room conditions
(Temperature and/or humidity in summer/winter, sound level, if applicable)
- Details relating to the room volume flows
- Details relating to the room heating requirement and/or cooling load
- Details relating to the technical parameters (speed, power input, etc.)
- Details relating to the system operating hours
- Details relating to the room allocation
- Details relating to the special technical parameters
(Installed capacity heat/refrigeration/power/water)
- Details relating to the planning production method/type
- Details relating to the marking/identification of the system connections to
other systems
- General information (e.g. heat insulation, is valid for ...)

Regulatory system features must be detailed in the ICA schematic.


If required and requested, function and block diagrams have to be prepared.
Electric switching and control plans and/or circuit diagrams (normally supplied
by the contractor responsible for the works)
Cable lists (normally supplied by the contractor responsible for the works)

Page 15 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

3.1

General

28.02.2014

The following information describes functions and quality and represents a minimum standard.
The brief is to design and construct complete, operable systems taking into
account, and implementing, all current laws, guidelines and standards of the
respective country and the European Union (EU) where applicable, the details
and
requirements of authorising bodies (e.g. authorities, fire services), as well as the
generally recognised rules of technology and manufacturer specifications hereinafter referred to as provisions.
The requirements of fire protection, sound insulation, personal and environmental
protection have to be implemented.
The master details for building trades as well as the sample project for
mechanical & electrical trades apply in addition to the specification (Refer to
Appendix).
However, these make no claim to completeness, and all illustrations, depictions
etc. of technical installations and their dimensions are only conceptual and refer to
a reference location.
If any deviations from the specifications and the standard layout for the
Distribution Centre International, with regard to another room layout or additional
technical requirements, have to be implemented, then the details from the
specification and the sample project have to be applied analogously and/or
conceptually.
Note: The coordination of all performances and interfaces during planning and
execution has to be guaranteed by the trades responsible for construction works
and technical services.
Please note: Refrigeration and cooling works are to be organised separately by
the client (Construction Dept.)
In particular, DIN EN 378 has to be taken into account for the coordination of all
services and interfaces during planning and implementation, and is to be
guaranteed by the trades responsible for construction works and technical
services.
If package or individual contract awards are planned for construction works and
technical services, then a project-specific interface list (Refer to Appendix Sample Interface list) has to be prepared for all interface-relevant services.
The Distribution Centre mainly consists of the following functional units:
Warehouse (refrigerated and non-refrigerated areas)

GI counter area with GI counter, GI offices and GI common areas

GO counter area with selection/picking counter, GO offices and GO common


areas
Administration

Gatehouse (incl. barrier system, HGV Weighbridge)

Sprinkler tank and pump house

External areas

Page 16 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

If required, shipping containers are provided in the external area.

The following general requirements apply to the installation of technical systems


for building construction and M&E
Colour white for all exposed components in office areas (Administration,
GI/GO counter areas, Gatehouse) such as e.g. vaporisers (internal units)
including cable or infrared operation, air vents, switches, sockets, wall and
ceiling ducts, sanitary ceramics
Fixing and securing components to the superstructure by utilising systemapproved materials
Please note: Take account of any earthquake zones and building joints
present (e.g. vibration decoupling) when installing, fixing and securing
components
All loads (e.g. pipework, cable conduits) may not be laid and/or positioned
directly on the panelled ceilings; suitable fixtures (e.g. consoles, threaded
rods, secondary steel profiles) have to be used for installing the respective
components.
Loads on the floor in the refrigeration machine room may not exceed
2,000 kg/m. If required, appropriate load distribution plates have to be
placed underneath the components.
Installation constructions (metalwork constructions) should be hot-dip
galvanised
Please note: All galvanised components should have screw and/or bolt
connections. It is not permitted to weld galvanised components onsite, or carry
out cold galansing.
Any installation constructions that pass through the panelled ceilings of
cold rooms (e.g. threaded rods for air coolers, panelled ceilings) must be
at least 0.50 m above the panelled ceilings, made of stainless steel
(V2A), and insulated so that they are vapour-tight.
Align and position in such a way that:
-

Access for warehouse operations must be ensured

Warehouse operations must not be affected (e.g. installation height


minimum 0.50 m above maximum top edge of stored goods)

Protection against damage (e.g. installation height in picking areas 2,20


m above top edge of the finished floor and/or impact protection) must be
guaranteed
Please note: Coordination of the impact protection with the building works
- Flexibility in room layout of administration is guaranteed and subsequent
wall constructions are not affected (e.g. position of air vents and air ducts
in one row of window axes with minimum 30 cm distance from the window
axes, positioning internal units, split air conditioners, lights and socket
combination in wall duct in regular intervals between window axes)
---> Refer to Sample project
- Sprinklers are not obstructed (e.g. clear distance to walls and supports
minimum 15 cm)
Please note: Coordination with the sprinkler system installer
- IT server room without external installations (e.g. utility pipes)
- Space is reserved (in ceiling cavities and shafts) for subsequent
installation of pipelines for precision air conditioning systems.
Protection against unauthorised access in generally accessible areas (e.g.
control password protected, switch cabinets closed, repair switch and fittings
secured and/or sealed)
-

Page 17 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Catchment tank and/or drip pans (e.g. for operating materials, condensation)
with drain valve under relevant components

Automatic restart of all independent systems (control) after power failure

Degrees of protection for all electric components minimum:

IP20 for general areas


IP54 for wet rooms (e.g. refrigerated warehouse areas, ceiling void)
IP65 for external areas and areas in direct contact with liquids
Ex-protection for explosion-risk areas

Cable entries with strain relief and sealing in accordance with the degree of
protection
Electrical connections with suitable sockets (observe type of protection)

Motors (e.g. for pumps, ventilators) with following protective measures:

- Motor circuit-breaker for 230 V motors


- Motor protection unit (thermistors) for 400 V motors
Note: protection switch with auxiliary contact (e.g. potential-free contact)

Potential equalisation on all metallic components and conduits


Please note: Coordination with the electrical contractor
Corrosion protection and weather protection (including UV-Protection)

- Non-corrosive materials (e.g. plastic, stainless steel)


- Protective coating and/or zinc coating
Please note: Corrosion protection and weather protection also applies to
installation equipment (e.g. consoles, threaded rods, secondary steel profiles).
UV-Protection also applies for wiring in external areas
Thermal stability for all relevant components (e.g. plastic for cables,
electronics) suitable for installation conditions:
- up to -35C in freezer rooms
- in accordance with minimum and/or maximum external temperatures
Fire protection measures in accordance with regulations and fire protection
concept
Insulation measures in accordance with regulations and/or technical
requirements
Sound and vibration decoupling including fixing and/or securing constructions
Locking and controlling options (e.g. throttle valves, volumetric flow controller,
ball valves) for media conduits in accessible areas
Interfaces to ICA technology (e.g. analogue and/or digital entries and/or exits)
at relevant components (e.g. independent control, motors) for:
- Issue of operational and error messages
- Entry for activation/deactivation signals
Please note: Coordination with the ICA contractor
Repair switch on site for all electrical, motor-driven and automatically
controlled consumers (e.g. ventilators).
Please note: monitoring position for the repair switch (e.g. creation of a
contact to the auxiliary contact repair switch)
Marking and/or identification of all technical rooms, master components,
media conduits, control sections and non-self-explanatory points of withdrawal

Page 18 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Please note: the quality and quantity of signs must enable the immediate
identification and arrangement for maintenance and cases of accidents and/or
incidents (e.g. failure, leakage) and should include the following details:
- Hazard warnings and/or warning labels
- System allocation (e.g. System 1)
- Utilities or fuel (e.g. type, filling quantity, anti-freeze ratio if applicable)
- Flow direction (directional arrows)
Display of function schIAStic and/or circuit diagrams in machine rooms and/or
switching cabinets

The following requirements apply especially for ceiling cavities (above panelled
ceilings in cold rooms):
Taking into account access and/or access possibilities (e .g. for maintenance
and service personnel)
Taking into account regulations in respect of accident prevention/safety at
work (e.g. fall protection) as well as escape and exit routes
The following specifications apply to the scope of works and services for refrigeration:
Service/Performance

Supply and installation of refrigeration system (industrial refrigeration for


cold rooms) incl. humidification system, gas alarm system and
ventilation system for the refrigeration machine room
Plant room for refrigeration (machine room)
Note: design of refrigeration plant room as specific, machine room in
accordance with DIN EN 378-3.
(except for the gas alarm system and ventilation system)
Preliminary work requirements by the refrigeration contractor
The construction of the plant room for refrigeration will not normally be
executed as solid-wall constructions
The refrigeration contractor will supply a catchment basin and/or tray
under the relevant components for the operating media
Cold rooms (Panel assembly)
Note: design of cold rooms in accordance with DIN EN 378-1
(Protection of people in deep freeze cold rooms)
Shelf inside freezing cell
Air baffles between air cooler and shelf in freezing cells as well as at the
freezing cell corners
(Refer to master detail, Freezing cell)
Mesh grid (mesh width approx. 40 x 40 mm) between shelf and
panelled walls and ceiling of the freezing cell (Refer to master detail)
Steel construction for condenser/heat exchanger on the roof (primary
steel construction with direct fixture on the support structure of the
building)
Note: preliminary work requirements by refrigeration contractor
Steel construction for air cooler (primary steel construction with direct
fixture at the support structure of the building)
Note: preliminary work requirements by refrigeration contractor
Steel construction for pipes in the refrigeration engine room (primary
steel construction with direct fixture at the support structure of the
building)
Note: Preliminary work requirements by refrigeration contractor
Steel construction as impact protection for air cooler
Note: preliminary work requirements by refrigeration contractor r
Steel construction for components of the refrigeration system (e.g.
container, heat exchanger) and stages and/or platforms in the
refrigeration machine room and all suspensions (e.g. threaded rods,
consoles) for tubes and air cooler
Optional: concrete foundations for compressor in refrigeration plant
room
Creating all openings in fire and/or reinforced concrete walls as walls as
well as in panelled walls and ceilings incl. closing (incl. fire protection)
after approval from the refrigeration contractor
Note: insulation in accordance with fire protection lies within the scope
of performance of the refrigeration contractor
Supply of roof duct
Sealing of roof duct
Emergency phones in deep freeze storage rooms on the inside of the

Scope of
performance
Building
construction and
mechanical &
electrical

Scope of
performance,
Refrigeration
contractor

Scope of
performance,
Client

X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X

(X)
X

X
X

Page 19 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

Service/Performance

deep freeze storage room doors


Lighting refrigeration plant room (incl. emergency as well as escape
lamps and emergency escape lighting)
Emergency shower and drain in the refrigeration plant room
(provided the refrigeration system is operating with ammonia)
Connection for potable water (refilling) and waste water (de-sludging)
for evaporative condenser
Connections for potable water, humidification system
(connection control devices)
Pressure booster and/or pressure reducer in water supply pipework (if
required)
Water treatment (softening) in water supply pipework (if required)
Water hygiene (Biocide system) and de-sludging (provided evaporative
condenser exists)
Condensation pipework up to the waste water pipework which is
already installed (1 m above top edge of finished floor)
Connection for waste water (condensation) air cooler up to 1m above
top edge of ground floor
(starting at underground pipes)
Connection for telephone (telephone socket) in refrigeration plant room
Connection for Ethernet (data outlet) in refrigeration plant room
Connection for Ethernet (data outlet) in workshop area
PC for access to refrigeration system control in workshop area
Interface cable (data cables) between ICA technology and refrigeration
system control
Connection - Power (Power supply) for refrigeration system switching
cabinet in refrigeration machine room
Connection - power (power supply) for temperature and alarm indicator
panels - refrigeration system in GI/Selecting counters
Equipotential busbar in the area of refrigeration machine room
Compensation refrigeration system (central in LVMD)

28.02.2014

Scope of
performance
Building
construction and
mechanical &
electrical

Scope of
performance,
Refrigeration
contractor

Scope of
performance,
Client

X
X
X
X
X
X

optional
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

Further and/or more detailed specifications for the scope of services are included
in the specification (respective works) and the Sample project, Refrigeration
(Refer to Appendix) as well as in the sample interface, Construction/Building
Technology/client.
3.2

Construction

3.2.1

General
The warehouse is fitted with a sprinkler system (refer to Sprinkler systems).
The applied guidelines for sprinkler systems may include requirements on the
materials to be used and on the dimensions of parts in the area of the sprinkler
(e.g. truss width).
All requirements have to be coordinated with the sprinkler system contractor and
implemented accordingly.
The fixtures and fittings installed, and the optical appearance, in the office areas
and recreation rooms are to be determined for each individual country by the
clients (Lidl country).
These include, for example:
Colour of interior walls (accentuated surfaces) for common rooms in the
administration offices
Colour of rear walls, washbasins in WCs (accentuated surfaces)
Colour and materials of floor coverings
Colour of privacy screens of urinals
Any relevant building shells must take into account EU directive requirements
regarding the overall efficiency of buildings. The required thermal transmission
coefficients (U-values) of the heat transfer of the building envelope result from the
project-specific calculation of the overall energy efficiency (energy certificate) for
the respective building and/or operating area of the Distribution Centre.

Page 20 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

The following maximum values apply for the thermal transfer coefficients (Uvalues) of the heat transfer of the building envelope:
Opaque external components (roof, faade): U = 0.35 W/(m2*K)
Transparent external components (window): U = 1.50 W/(m2*K)
Rooflights, skylights / light domes: U = 2.50 W/(m2*K)
External doors / external doors: U = 1.80 W/(m2*K)
Please note: The thickness of each component for the building envelope is to be
designed to a minimum which complies with the respective specification and
master detail and/or according to the structural calculations, regardless of the
required U-values. It is possible to adjust the U-values by amending the thermal
conductivity group of the insulating material, for example.
3.2.2

Earthworks

3.2.2.1

General
Prior to construction work, the topsoil has to be removed at different depths and
quantities and stored on-site for backfilling. Excess topsoil has to be removed and
disposed of in the appropriate manner.
If required, compressible, natural base material has to be installed in layers and
compressed for landfilling.
Excess, unusable ground material will be transported from site as required.
If required, additional surveys and expert opinions must be obtained (e.g. soil
contamination, soak aways and drainage inspections) and relevant measures
must be introduced.
The earthworks and/or excavation and backfillings (e.g. for utility pipes,
foundations) and the planum have to be in accordance with the relevant planned
height of the site.
The load-bearing capacity of the sub-soil and the subsidence coefficients have to
be determined in advanced by a foundation soil and structural survey and the
foundation has to be planned accordingly (subsidence is to be prevented). The
load assumptions for traffic areas, load-bearing and supporting structures and the
floor slab (Refer to Industrial flooring works) have to be taken into account.
The soil and backfilled materials are to be filled and compressed in layers. The
load-bearing capacity of the substructure, in accordance with the specification,
has to be proven by loading-plate, pressure testing ( load plate 300 mm) in
accordance with DIN 18134.
At least 3 loading-plate, pressure tests have to be carried out per 4000 m of
layered, backfilled area. The difference between the individual loading-plate,
pressure tests may not be more than 10 %.
The results of the loading-plate, pressure tests have to be recorded and submitted
to the client (Construction Department) without being request, on completion of
the planum and prior to starting work in the foundation base area of the
warehouse and external superstructure.
If required, soil stabilisation measures (e.g. concrete or lime stabilisation,
installing geotextiles, geogrids) have to be carried out to achieve the load-bearing
capacity of the substructure

3.2.2.2

Warehouse
The subsoil and/or backfilled soil under the industrial floor in the warehouse must
be able to bear the individual and area loads from the warehouse operation.

Page 21 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

The results of the survey and the foundation recommendations of the soil survey,
as well as the details relating to permissible subsidence have to be taken into
account.
The following regulations apply to the compressed subsoil underneath the loadbearing layer:
Deformation modulus EV2: minimum 80 MN/m

Compression ratio: EV2/EV1: 2.5

A mineral scalpings load-bearing layer has to be put on top of the compressed


subsoil:
Thickness: minimum 20 cm

Deformation modulus EV2: minimum 120 MN/m

Compression ratio EV2/EV1: 2.2

Finally, the fine planum under the floor slab has to be produced with a flatness
tolerance of 1 cm.
3.2.2.3

External area
The subsoil and/or backfilled soil under the superstructure of the external area
must be able to bear traffic loads.
The results of the survey from the soil surveyor as well as the specification for
permissible subsidence have to be taken into account.
Prior to installing the superstructures in traffic areas for HGV and passenger cars,
the planum has to be installed and compressed in accordance with the
predetermined lateral and longitudinal gradients.
The following requirements apply for the surface (under the frost protection and
load-bearing layer):
Deformation modulus EV2 minimum 45 MN/m
The additional build-up of the frost protection and scalpings, load-bearing layer is
governed by the country-specific, generally recognised and accepted rules of
technology and/or recommendations for road construction for HGV traffic.
The following requirements apply to the frost protection layer:
Ensuring a reliable drainage system for the filter layer

Thickness minimum 50 cm

Compression degree minimum DPr 103 percent

Compression ratio EV2/EV1 2.2


The following requirements apply to the scalpings, load-bearing layer:
Thickness minimum 30 cm

Compression degree minimum DPr 103 percent

Deformation modulus on top areas minimum EV2 = 120 MN/m

Deformation modulus EV2 / EV1 2.2

Prior to reinstating the topsoil for vegetation, the planum of the substructure has
to be installed and compressed in accordance with the predetermined lateral and
longitudinal gradients.

Page 22 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

3.2.3

Load-bearing and supporting structures

3.2.3.1

General
The following general requirements apply to the load-bearing and
structures:
Execution as skeleton construction with reinforced concrete or
combination of both.
Please note: The selection of the type of load-bearing and
structures will be made with consideration for the costs and the
country-specific fire protection regulations.
Dimensioning of parts in accordance with structural calculations

3.2.3.2

28.02.2014

supporting
steel or a
supporting
respective

Warehouse
When constructing the load-bearing and supporting structures with precast,
reinforced concrete elements, suitable and approved neoprene bearings have to
be used to reduce the edge pressure (e.g. purlin supports).
Alternatively, laminated timber, roof trusses are possible.
In case of necessary firewalls etc., the position of the column grids has to be
adjusted in such a way that racks can be fitted in the entire warehouse.
All freely accessible edges on reinforced concrete supports are to be fitted with a
galvanised, flush-fitting angle iron (minimum 60x60 mm x 6 mm) as impact
protection (installation height from UEFF [top edge finished floor] up to +2.50 m).
Mounting rails (retaining or equivalent) in trusses/purlins are to be specified in
accordance with the structural calculations for installing, securing and/or
suspending cold room ceilings, pipe and cable routes etc.
No transverse or torsion forces may be introduced into the load-bearing and
supporting structures. Suspensions, hangers etc. must always be vertical (never
slanting).
If a photovoltaic system is to be installed on the roof, then an additional area load
of 30 kg/m has to be considered in the structural calculation. This requirement
has to be agreed in advance with the client (Construction Department).

3.2.3.3

Administration
The drop beams have to have the maximum admissible number and size of
standard apertures in agreement with mechanical & electrical works.
The floor slab is also to be constructed of reinforced concrete and is to be laid on
a perimeter insulation, thickness of minimum 10 cm.
Please note: The floor slab for the IT server room on the ground floor is to be
designed with a load-bearing capacity for a traffic load of 10 kN/m.
The surface of the floor slab above the ground floor is to be power floated.
In areas with tiles and concrete slabs, the floor slab has to laid at a lower level to
allow for the higher floor finish level.

3.2.3.4

Gatehouse
The superstructure for the gatehouse can be constructed alternatively as a solid ,
masonry construction. In this case, the supporting external walls GOlls will be
constructed of reinforced concrete.

Page 23 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

The floor slab will be constructed of reinforced concrete (power floated) and laid
on perimeter insulation having a minimum thickness of 10 cm.
Pits and foundations have to be built in accordance with the HGV Weighbridge
(supplied by client).
3.2.3.5

Sprinkler tank and pump house


The same requirements apply for the pump house as for the gatehouse.
The sprinkler tank will be built as a solid construction in concrete. In case of an
above-ground sprinkler tank, a steel tank can be used as an alternative.

3.2.4

Walls (solid construction)

3.2.4.1

General
If precast concrete elements are used, the exposed concrete has to be created to
a high quality. Prior to execution, a sample has to be produced and approved by
the client.
The exposed areas of in-situ concrete have to be smoothed ready for painting and
decorating .

3.2.4.2

Warehouse
A possible, required separation of the warehouse into fire sections and the
construction of fire and/or fire protection walls is to be carried out in accordance
with country-specific requirements
All technical rooms, machine rooms etc will be constructed with walls (except
faade side) in solid construction (concrete or brickwork).
To simplify the sprinkler system, the freezer room and refrigeration room are to be
separated from the rest of the warehouse by F90 walls and/or, if required, fire
walls.
The fire-resistant enclosing walls of this freezer room have to be built in solid
construction (concrete or brickwork).
In order to prevent condensate or ice forming in small cavities (e.g. through
dimensional tolerances of solid walls) between insulating panels and fire walls, all
horizontal and vertical joints of solid walls have to be sealed to be vapour-proof.
This may be done after installing the fire walls on their inside, prior to installing the
insulating panels.
A F90 wall and/or, if required, a fire wall in solid construction, whose width
projects to a minimum of 5 m on both longitudinal sides of the administration area
and whose height extends to the fascia of the warehouse, will be used as a fire
protection separation for the administration area. This F90 wall and/or fire wall is
positioned between the concrete columns of the warehouse, so that the faade
panels in front of the wall can be installed without any offsets (Refer to master
detail).
If in accordance with regulations (e.g. Building and planning laws, sprinkler), a
separate storage area is required for flammable liquids (e.g. oils, cosmetic
articles, spirits) and aerosols (e.g. lighters, spray cans), then they have to be
stored separately in Rooms for hazardous substances.
The layout of the rooms for hazardous substances has to be agreed with the
client (Logistics Department). The size and divisions within the rooms for
hazardous substances must be in accordance with regulations and requirements.

Page 24 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

In accordance with planning law, the following requirements are, for example,
valid:
Enclosing walls, minimum fire-resistant (F90)

The arrangement of rooms for hazardous substances may not be below or


next to rooms which are constantly frequented by people.

The fire-resistant, enclosing walls of the rooms for hazardous substances have to
be built in solid construction (concrete or brickwork).
3.2.4.3

GI/GO counter areas


If the enclosing walls of the GI/GO counter areas are not planned in dry
construction, these can be built as solid walls (concrete or brickwork).

3.2.4.4

Administration
Preferably, all solid walls, especially those for the lift shaft and the enclosing walls
for the staircase have to be built in concrete or brickwork.

3.2.4.5

Sprinkler tank and pump house


Preferably, the solid walls should be built in concrete or brickwork.
If the external walls of the sprinkler tank are in solid construction, then these have
to be built as a water impermeable construction.

3.2.5

Storey/Suspended ceilings (solid construction)

3.2.5.1

Warehouse
An intermediate slab constructed from reinforced concrete (where required, with
fire protection requirement F-90), surface finished with power floating, with a Tbeam, panelled slab will be created for the execution of the plant room above the
area for GI/GO chiller room/meat and partially over the area for GI/GO freezer
area.
The structural dimensioning of the intermediate panelled slab is to be executed in
accordance with project-specific requirements; however, the minimum area load
must be 2,000 kg/m. A sufficiently high space has to remain for repairs and/or
overhaul work between the upper edge of the insulated, panelled slab and lower
edge of the girders necessary for the solid ceiling.
In order to house the archive room above the battery recharge area, an
intermediate slab made of reinforced concrete (meeting F-90 fire protection
requirements, if necessary) with a power finished, smoothed surface will be
installed as a T-beam, panelled slab.
The structural dimensioning for the intermediate slab is to be carried out in
accordance with project-specific requirements; however, the minimum area load
must be 2,000 kg/m.

3.2.5.2

GI/GO counter areas


To install the GI/GO offices, precast or semi-precast ceiling slabs will be installed.
The load-bearing capacity for these slabs must be suitable for traffic load of min
3.5 kN/m.
The load-bearing capacity of the ceiling slabs above the GI/GO offices must be
planned so as to take into account the installation of technical systems (e.g. hot
water tank, split air conditioning systems, compact-designed supply and exhaust
air system).

Page 25 of 215

6.1

6.2

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

3.2.5.3

28.02.2014

Administration
The ceiling slab above the ground floor rests on columns and/or drop beams.
Preferably, it should be constructed from hollow-core slabs. It will be finished with
a concreted top layer (power finished surface), on which the relevant floor
covering will be installed directly without screed and impact noise insulation. The
floor slab and/or the concrete top layer has to be lowered in accordance with the
higher floor structure for areas with tiles and concrete slabs.
The load-bearing capacity for these slabs must be suitable for a traffic load of
minimum 3.5 kN/m.
Please note: By positioning the IT server room on the first floor, the load-bearing
capacity for these slabs must be suitable for a traffic load of min 10 kN/m. Any
constructional connections which occur in the ceiling slabs (e.g. T-beam slabs)
must have the joints sealed, flush to the underside.

3.2.5.4

Gatehouse
The ceiling of the gatehouse will be built with precast or semi-precast reinforced
concrete slabs in accordance with the structural calculation.

3.2.5.5

Sprinkler tank and pump house


If the sprinkler tank and the pump house are planned as solid construction, then
the same requirements apply as for the gatehouse.
When constructing an underground sprinkler tanks covered by soil, this has to be
calculated to take the imposed, soil loads into account.

3.2.6

Faade

General
All exposed concrete areas have to be finished to a high quality.
Prior to building exposed concrete areas, a sample has to be produced and
approved by the client.
Warehouse
The plinth foundation element and/or the plinth foundation area (0.00 m to -1.30
m) in the non-refrigerated area is to be built as a solid precast reinforced concrete
wall with a thickness of minimum 25 cm. The exposed concrete edges of the
loading bridge passages are to be analogous with the reinforced concrete
columns, and are to be protected at the front with flush-finished, hot-dipped
galvanised steel angle irons.
In refrigerated areas, the plinth will be constructed as a reinforced concrete
sandwich wall as follows:
Internal skin of reinforced concrete, vibrated for a smooth finish with a

minimum thickness of 16 cm as a load-bearing internal skin


EPS Insulation, with a minimum thickness of 10 cm
External skin of reinforced concrete, with a thickness of 8 cm as a
weather-resistant, exposed concrete skin
(Optically analog to the plinth element in non-refrigerated areas)

The load-bearing skin is positioned between the columns so that the visible front
edge of the external skin is flush with the front edge of the plinth elements in the
non-refrigerated area. To absorb the transferred forces from the rubber buffers to
the plinth elements, the load-bearing skin (of 0.00 m to -0.50 m must be extended

Page 26 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

to come in contact with the front edge of the exposed concrete cladding (Refer to
master detail).
The exposed concrete edges of the loading bridge passages are to be analogous
with the reinforced concrete columns, and are to be protected at the front with
flush-finished, hot-dipped galvanised steel angle irons.
Loading bridges have to be installed as follows:
A continuous reinforced concrete supporting wall as a rear wall (with a
minimum of 6 cm thick, perimeter insulation in refrigerated areas)
Installation of precast slabs between the plinth element and rear wall to
receive the loading bridges.
Plinth with a recess in the area of the loading bridges (Refer to master detail)

Anchor eyelets to fix the frame of the loading bridge have to be in accordance
with the supplier of the loading bridges.

The bridges may be constructed as follows, for cost economics:


Creating troughs to take the loading bridges. The plinth has been recessed
accordingly in the area of the loading bridges.
Dock shelters in front of the building. The depth of the building must be
reduced by the appropriate size of the dock shelter.
The faade of the warehouse is to be created starting from the plinth element
and/or plinth area to the roof as a complete, horizontal enclosure in differentcoloured, insulation panels consisting of covering sheets, each made of
galvanised, plastic-coated steel sheeting with a minimum thickness of 0.60 mm,
and a PUR (polyurethane) or PIR (polyisocyanurate) hard foam core (no use of
polystyrene).
The internal side has a standard profile, colour RAL 9010.
The external side is micro-profiled and covered with a weather-resistant PVDF
coat, colour RAL 7035 (light grey) or RAL 7015 (slate grey) or RAL 7046 (tele grey
2), varying depending on the faade elevation (Refer to master detail).
The thickness of the insulation panels must be as follows:
non-refrigerated areas (including GI/GO RS/Chocolate): at least 150 mm
refrigerated areas: at least 200 mm
The space between the elements is to be filled with a plastic sealing compound
from butyl rubber; the gaps at the element joints are to be fully padded with
thermal insulation. Elements are to be fitted without visible screws using a cover
plate (cap profile) at the element joints. The colour of the cover plate depends on
the colour of the right-hand panel (Refer to master detail).
In each case, the appropriate steel sub-constructions have to be used for the
installation. This applies to replacements and/or cut outs in the door and door
areas, as well as for additions e.g. access ladders, canopies, dock shelters, but in
particular in cases where the grid pattern of the main columns is less than the
maximum span of the insulation panels. In this case, a secondary steel
construction has to be built in the area where the panels abutt which, due to the
required uniform faade appearance, may also be in the area of a door, whereby
it has to be formed around the door via a frame.
The following, alternative constructional method may be utilised for cost
economics:
Coffered wall (system wall in accordance with manufacturers specification):

Page 27 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

A coffered profile is fitted horizontally on the inside and fixed to the columns,
colour RAL 9010. A mineral fibre, thermal insulation is fitted on the sheet. On
the outside, the faade is covered with trapezoidal sheet metal, galvanised
and powder-coated, colour RAL 9006.
In each case, the appropriate steel sub-constructions have to be used for the
installation. This applies, among others, to replacements and/or cut outs in the
door and door areas, as well as for additions (e.g. access ladders, canopies,
dock shelters).
Reinforced concrete sandwich wall:
The requirements for the plinth are analogous for reinforced concrete
sandwich walls.
The reinforced concrete sandwich wall will be built up to a height of 4.80 m
above the hall floor (lower edge of the skylights). At the top, the faade will be
the same as the insulation panel or coffered wall faade as described above.

A continuous row of windows (skylight) will be installed above the sectional doors
in all non-refrigerated warehouse areas as well as the refrigerated GI/GO
RS/Chocolate area; the length depends on the group of doors below.
Nominal height: 2.40 m and/or depending on the height of the insulated
panels.
Lower ground floor windows: 4.80 m above hall floor.
The installation is to be executed as double-glazed with polycarbonate
Please note: Depending on the climate (normally for warehouse locations in
Northern or Central Europe), the skylights will be installed in the faade for the
refrigerated GI/GO RS/Chocolate areas.
All windows in GO facing South, East, West, South East and South West will be
fitted with sun protection systems having electrically powered, external, railguided blinds; colour RAL 9006 for blinds, colour RAL 7035 for blind cassettes
and guide rails.
These are controlled faade-by-faade depending on the internal and external
temperature, lightness as well as via a wind/rain monitor.
The roof construction on the longitudinal sides of the building has to be
constructed as follows:
Upper edge, fascia capping, 15 cm above the inlet height of the roof inlet

(Refer to master detail)


Anti-fall protection via railing (Refer to metalworks)

However, if the local authorities or building law requirements state that a parapet
is required, then an emergency overflow has to be integrated in the parapet
behind each roof inlet on the longitudinal sides of the building. If a parapet is
installed, then it has to be ensured that it complies with the requirements for fall
protection in accordance with national provisions.
A continuous parapet with a minimum height of 1.10 m above the roof skin has to
be installed on the lateral building side (gable end), (an exception is the parapet
for the container ramp canopy: the same construction method applies here as in
case of the longitudinal sides of the building).

Page 28 of 215

6.3

6.4

6.5

7.1

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Administration
The faade consists of an internal, solid load-bearing skin from reinforced
concrete (alternatively brickwork) with an external insulation layer as a thermal
insulation composite system (HICS), thickness minimum 10 cm, colour RAL 9010.
Appropriate empty conduits have to be installed in the external walls and/or
ceilings for the high and low voltage connections for the wall ducts on the first
floor starting from the ground floor.
Please note: In general, 1 set of empty conduits consisting of 2 empty conduits
(DN 50) for power cables and 2 empty conduits (DN 50) for data cables has to be
installed at intervals of every 3 to 4 windows. Empty conduits have to be
integrated in the areas of the wall duct, which are separated by a barrier strip.
Gatehouse
The faade is to be constructed as a reinforced concrete sandwich faade with an
internal, load-bearing skin constructed of reinforced concrete, a core insulation in
accordance with the thermal insulation calculation and an external cladding in
exposed concrete.
Alternatively the faade can be the same as that of the specification for
Administration.
Sprinkler tank and pump house
If the sprinkler tank and the pump house are above ground and solid, an external
thermal insulation composite system (HICS) and/or full thermal insulation system
with a minimum thickness of 10 cm must be provided.
3.2.7

Roof

Warehouse
The roof is to be constructed as a flat roof with a gradient of minimum 1.50 %
towards the longitudinal sides of the building (an exception is the container ramp
canopy: here the gradient is towards the lateral side of the building).
The roof covering is to be constructed with trapezoidal sheet metal (profile height
and sheet thickness in accordance with the structural calculation).
Appropriate steel sub-constructions (inserts and/or cut outs) have to be supplied
for the installation of large roof openings and smoke and heat outlet vents/light
domes.
The thermal insulation is made of mineral wool (no flammable insulation
materials) with a highly compressed, pressure-resistant surface. The thermal
insulation is installed on top of a vapour-proof barrier made from PE film, with a
thickness of at least 12 cm. and/or accordance. Alternatively, the thermal
insulation can also be formed from PIR (polyisocyanurate) rigid roam with the
same thickness to ensure the maximum U-value in accordance with an insulation
using mineral wood, provided this insulation is permitted for the intended use in
the respective country. Technically-related, fire protection requirements from the
permission, (e.g. maximum field sizes, fire protection strips) have to be taken into
account.
A 50 cm wide counter gradient wedge has to be installed on the longitudinal sides
of the building along the parapet. All parts have to be insulated and are to be
covered with steel sheeting. If, as an exception, cold room walls should come into
contact with the roof (RS/Chocolate), then the beads of the trapezoidal sheet
metal have to be closed, above and below the sheet, with insulation (bead filler)
due to the risk of condensate.

Page 29 of 215

7.2

7.3

7.4

8.1

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

The roof is to be sealed with a minimum of 1.5 mm thick, fibre-reinforced, PVCfree plastic sealing tape (Polyolefin roof sealing tape).
All roof openings must be sealed and also mechanically fixed and/or secured (e.g.
clamping rail).
The accessible, walk-on areas of the roof (e.g. for maintenance) are to be
protected by reinforced and profiled walkways, which are adhered to the roof
covering.
The roof drainage is executed via flat roof outlets as open channel drains, which
are fitted on the longitudinal sides of the building (Refer to Sanitary works). The
outlets are to be centrally arranged between the columns with a distance of 50 cm
to the parapet.
If the roof is to be built without a parapet, then the roof drainage will be executed
via a bracket-mounted gutter (galvanised) with downpipes on the external face of
the faade.
Administration
The roof is to be constructed as a flat roof with a gradient of approx. 2.5 %
towards the longitudinal sides of the building.
Reinforced concrete foundations with a separating and/or protective layer have to
be installed on the roof covering for externally-positioned units for the air
conditioning systems.
The roof drainage is to be executed via flat roof outlets as open channel drains,
which are fitted on the longitudinal sides of the building (Refer to Sanitary works).
In addition, attachment points are to be provided on the roof area.
Gatehouse
A vapour barrier made from aluminium-bitumen is to be adhered on top of the
solid ceiling.
The same requirements for thermal insulation and sealing apply as for the
warehouse.
The circumferential parapet is to be fitted with a sheet steel capping.
The roof drainage is executed via flat roof outlet(s) as open channel drain(s) with
direct connection to an external downpipe.
Sprinkler tank and pump house
If the sprinkler tank and pump house are built as a solid construction, then the
additional roof construction will be analog to the gatehouse.
3.2.8

Light domes/smoke and heat vent domes

Warehouse
In order to utilise natural light, light domes have to be installed in the roof of the
warehouse, RS/Chocolate as follows:
Light domes must be distributed evenly in all non-refrigerated areas in
accordance with the master detail (Refer to Appendix First floor layout plan,
warehouse)
Please note: Coordinate with the sprinkler contractor and, where applicable,
those responsible for the smoke and heat vent domes

Page 30 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

In areas with racking, the light domes must be arranged in the centre of all
fixed and optional racking aisles
The number and/or surface area of the light domes must be the equivalent to
a minimum of 2.5% of the respective area, depending on the area in which
they are arranged
Light domes consist of a transparent, triple-skinned concave polycarbonate
dome (outside opal, inside clear) with insulated upstand
The temperature resistance of the light domes must comply with the minimum
requirements of the sprinkler system
Fall protection as a grating below each light dome (also non-opening)
Please note: prevent falling e.g. when the roof is cleared of snow.

If the regulations or fire protection concept require it, a smoke and heat
venting system (SHVS) without additional ventilation system function, has to
be installed as follows:
Smoke and heat outlets as smoke and heat vent transom lights consisting of a
transparent triple domed polycarbonate dome (outside opal, inside clear) with
heat insulated curb.
Please note: refrigerated warehouse areas have to be fitted with opaque
(non-transparent) and insulated smoke and heat vent transom lights.
If permitted, the smoke extraction of the refrigerated warehouse areas should
preferably be installed directly in the ceiling cavity via separate SHVS
dampers in the panelled ceiling. The smoke in the ceiling cavities is to be
extracted via the smoke and heat vent transom lights in the roof.
Please note: The smoke and heat vent transom lights have to be fitted in
such a way that no loads are exerted on the panelled ceilings (e.g. mounting
on the load-bearing and/or supporting structure of the building or solid walls
and/or ceilings).
Alternatively, the smoke extraction from the refrigerated warehouse areas is to
be executed via smoke extraction shafts (from panelled ceiling to SHVS
dome) with fire resistant, insulated panels.
Positioning smoke and heat vent transom lights and/or dampers should be
preferably centrally arranged in fixed and optional aisles
Please note: Coordination with the trades responsible for the sprinkler system
and roof domes/lights
Temperature resistant smoke and heat vent roof lights and/or dampers
including triggering mechanism in accordance with the requirements for the
minimum, triggering temperature
Please note: in general, all solutions have to be coordinated and agreed with
the trades responsible for the sprinkler system.
Fall protection as a grating underneath each SHVS dome (in the roof)
Please note: provide fall prevention e.g. when roof is cleared of snow.
Replenishment air preferably via the sectional doors
(manual opening in case of fire, by local fire services, if required)
Please note: No electric, replenishment air openings are to be installed.
Activating smoke and heat vent transom lights and/or dampers manually, for
example:
- pneumatic triggering via pneumatic lifting cylinder and central triggering
station with CO2 bottle (in access area for fire services)

Page 31 of 215

8.2

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Please note: When positioning peripheral CO2 bottles (in SHVS dome),
these must have a temperature resistance in accordance with the required
triggering temperature.
- electric triggering via a servo-motor opening (24 V) and central control unit
with uninterruptible power supply (UPS)
Please note: due to installing a sprinkler system with a rapid-release
warehouse sprinkler system, areas with sprinkler protection will not be
fitted with automatic smoke and heat outlets. However, manually
operated smoke and heat outlets are acceptable.

However, if in accordance with the regulations, automatic smoke and


heat outlets should be necessary, the following minimum requirements
will apply:
- SHVSs with a licence to be used in connection with rapid-response
warehouse sprinklers in accordance with selected sprinkler guideline
(e.g. FM Approvals)
Please note: if using SHVSs with a thermal triggering mechanism, it
has to be ensured that the triggering temperature is higher than the
triggering temperature of the sprinklers (e.g. 182C in accordance
with FM Guideline). This also applies to the CO2 bottles inside the
SHVS dome.
In certain cases, additional sprinkler protection might be required as
an alternative directly underneath the smoke and heat outlets.
In general, the type and installation of automatic smoke and heat
extractors has to be agreed and coordinated with the trades responsible
for the sprinkler system!
Position SHVS central units in appropriate warehouse areas and/or fire
sections( e.g. GI/GO counter areas, installations room sprinkler alarm valve
station)

Administration
In order to use natural light as well as the ventilation system, light domes have to
be installed in the roof of the administration area as follows:
Light domes consisting of a transparent triple-skinned, concave polycarbonate
dome (outside opal, inside clear) with thermally insulated, plinth curb and
electric drive for manual operation
Arrange the light domes above open-plan offices, matching the ceiling grid
and illumination
Fall protection as a grating underneath each light dome (also non-opening)
Please note: provide fall prevention e.g. when roof is cleared of snow.
If the regulations or fire protection concept require it, a smoke and heat venting
system (SHVS) has to be installed as follows:
Position the SHVS dome in accordance with the regulations (e.g. staircase)

Fall protection as a grating underneath each light dome (also non-opening)


Please note: provide fall prevention e.g. when roof is cleared of snow.
Triggering smoke and heat vent transom lights and/or dampers in accordance
with regulation
Position SHVS central units and/or triggering mechanism in accordance with
regulations (e.g. staircase)

Page 32 of 215

9.1

9.2

9.3

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

3.2.9

28.02.2014

Industrial floor

General
An industrial floor (steel fibre concrete floor) must be provided in all warehouse
areas.
An underfloor heating system (Refer to Heating system specification), which is
fixed onto steel grid mats is to be installed in the lower area of the floor base in
the heated warehouse areas including RS/Chocolate and GI/GO RS/Chocolate.
All concrete work as well as work for the underfloor heating system requires a
special, technical coordination by the Contractor.
Prior to the construction each floor slab section, there must be an acceptance of
the pipework from the client. Hereby, the relevant pressure reports have to be
scheduled accordingly and submitted. In particular, the pressure of the industrial
underfloor heating system has to be maintained with compressed air (for
detecting leaks) during the construction of the concrete floors.
Prior to the concrete work, the warehouse and/or the relevant areas have to be
closed against weather and protected against draught.
Please note: if required, in cases of hazardous substances and/or extinguishing
water retention, the floor slab will be constructed with a gradient (Refer to point
Hazardous substance and extinguishing water retention).
The gradient formation must also be taken into account in respect of the substructure.
Load assumptions - warehouse operation
If the project-specific, structural calculations do not provide for any higher load
assumptions for the warehouse operation, then the calculation is based on the
following, minimum values:
Distributed load >/= 50 kN/m

Wheel load (point load) >/= 60 kN/Rad

Standard loading, shelving (point load) 100 kN/leg


Please note: the load assumptions for the wheel and standard load refer to
possible shelving (standard rack) with 5 levels (lowest, ground level+4).
In areas, where a roller shelf (pallet flow rack) with 4 levels (lowest, ground
level+3) is used, standard loads may be up to 220 kN.
The standard load of the racks as well as the dimensions of the floor slabs
have to be estimated in accordance with the project-specific load table from
the supplier. Special requirements (e.g. earthquake zones) have to be
considered separately. The earthquake coefficients as a result of the subgrade and foundation soil survey report have to be provided as the basis for
the shelf calculations.

Preparatory measures
Firstly, the entire area has to be covered with a double-layered PE foil (thickness
0.2 mm) as a vapour barrier and separating layer with overlapping joints >30 cm.
All horizontal structures (e.g. walls, columns) have to be fitted with 10 mm thick
protective strips (16 mm for supports) which extend above the floor slab (+ 5 cm)
and which are to be secured against flotation during concreting.
Protective GOll foils have to be installed against dirt.

Page 33 of 215

9.4

9.5

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Columns, corners and recesses have to be fitted with additional reinforcement


bars (e.g. Q 335 A at the top and diagonal steel bars 10mm at the bottom) to
minimise cracks. All complete area of the loading bridges will be fitted with
additional, steel matting reinforcement, Q 335 A (150 x 150 x 8).
Open profiles for anchor channels, and other similar openings, are to be protected
against concrete flow and must be left in a clean state upon completion of the
works.
Joint planning
The Contractor must punctually submit a joint plan to the client for inspection and
approval before commencing the works.
The joint plan must be agreed with the client (Purchasing) with regards to the high
rack system.
The following criteria has to be taken into account:
In general, the number of joints should be kept to a minimum.

The field sizes have to planned for a maximum of 1600 m, whereby the
ratio length/width must be <1.5. If possible, the fields should be square.

Lateral joints in the driving lanes should be kept to a minimum.

Longitudinal joints in the driving lanes are not permitted.

Longitudinal joints should be formed at the columns.

In refrigerated areas, the joints should be introduced underneath the insulating


panels.
The maximum joint width may not exceed 5 mm.

The horizontal axis should not have any blind joints.

The additionally, reinforced loading bridge area has to be separated from the
pure steel fibre floor area as a horizontal axis joint via joint profiles (Refer to
master details).
The field sizes must be coordinated with the heating circuits for the underfloor
heating.

Additionally, the joint plan must also contain the joint profile types as planned by
the Contractor; the relevant data sheets also have to be submitted.
Joint profiles
The horizontal axis fields are to be bordered by special, manufacturer-dependent,
heavy-duty steel profiles.
The manufacturer guidelines are binding in respect of the correct joint spacers.
Joint profiles have to be separated.
Sinus profiles have to be installed in all horizontal joints in the main driving lanes
(Axes E + B). This is a special, heavy-duty formwork profile where the joint is
formed as a sinus curve. It will minimise the impact of vehicles with any type of
tyre.

Page 34 of 215

9.6

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

1
3

2
4

28.02.2014

1. Sub- construction

2. Joint cover with joint structure


as sinus curve

3. Special bolt anchor


4. Lash clips for

formwork and moulded parts


5. Additional anchor, at the same time supporting
reinforcement mats

6
7

6. Guide sleeves for dowelling for

load transmission
7. Guide sleeves incl. height adjustable

support feet
8. Flow barrier

All other horizontal axis joints, which are not in driving lane areas, will be edged
with heavy-duty joint profiles, whereby the following parameters apply:
The joint profiles must be able to perform full shear stress transmission to
avoid differences in height between adjoining fields.
Joint profiles may not prevent the horizontal movement of the floor slab.

The upper edges of joint profiles and the floor slab floor slabmust be at the
same level.
Both strips of the joint profiles shall be a minimum of. 10 mm thick.

The first three parameters also apply analog to the sinus profile to be installed in
the driving lanes mentioned above.
Floor slabs
Warehouse (refrigerated and non-refrigerated areas)
The Warehouse floor will be constructed as follows:
Steel fibre concrete slab (non-refrigerated area including RS/Chocolate
20 cm thick (including approx. 2.0 cm for underfloor heating system)
Steel fibre concrete slab (refrigerated area):
18 cm thick (no underfloor heating system)
For an optional extension of the freezer storage area, the floor slab in the
cold hall (area between F axis and access to the cold hall) has to be the
equivalent of that of the freezer rooms (Refer to floor slab in freezer rooms).
With regard to insulation, the necessity of additional reinforcement mats in
accordance with load assumptions of warehouse operations (standard loads racks) has to be checked.
If a cold storage cell for write-offs (perished goods) is required, then it will be
installed flush to the floor. This requires a corresponding recess in the floor slab.
The exact position and the dimension of the cold storage cell are to be agreed
with the client (Logistics + Procurement Department).
Loading bridge areas
As mentioned above, the area of the loading bridges has to be separated from
other floor areas by a joint profile.

Page 35 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

A semi-precast ceiling has to be installed between joint profiles for loading


bridges. The concrete top layer is to be installed during the course of the
concreting works in the hall. Surface treatment equivalent to other steel fibre floor
slab.

Freezer rooms and cold hall


A multi-layered floor with insulation and frost protection heating system, to prevent
frost affecting the base, will be installed in freezer rooms, cold hall (cold hall with
reserve for extension to the freezer room):
Lower floor slab

18 cm reinforced concrete or steel fibre concrete (proportionately approx. 2.0


cm sub-base, frost protection heating system as a warm, glycol, floor heating
system).
Please note: If electric heating rods (system Oheim) are used for the frost
protection heating system in the freezer rooms, they are installed below the
loGIr floor slab (Refer to GeGIrk Elektro).
Vapour barrier
Bitumen sheeting (v60 S4 AL 0.1mm or equivalent) adhered to the whole
area, extended on the walls to upper edge of the hall floor
Please note: If electric heat mats are used for the frost protection heating
system in the freezer rooms, then they are to be installed between the vapour
barrier and insulation level. (Refer to Electrical works).
Insulation
3x minimum 8 cm (alternatively 2 x 12 cm), high-strength closed-cell foam
insulation material PUR/XPS with grooved and staggered joints, thermal
conductivity group (TCG) </= 0.035 W/mK, long-term modulus of elasticity
>/= 12.5 N/mm
The insulation layer has to be installed laterally in a bonded formation
Separating layer
PE foil
Page 36 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Upper floor slab


18 cm (steel fibre concrete)
Please note: In accordance with the structural calculations for the upper floor
slab additional reinforcement mats (top and bottom layer) minimum Q 424
and/or in accordance with the structural calculations, have to be installed,
taking the project-specific rack loads into account.

In the course of installing the floor slab, the lower floor slab of the freezer room
has to be constructed with a difference in the upper edge of 42 cm to the hall floor
(Refer to master detail).
In order to prevent the forming of ice in the door area, and the freezing of the
seals of the rapid roll door, a lane heating system will be installed (Refer to
Electrical works).
The hall floor, which has been fitted with lane heating in the door area, has to be
separated from the remaining concrete area with a steel profile
For reasons of warranty, the freezer rooms will be cooled gradually; this has to be
coordinated with the concrete floor manufacturer and the refrigeration system
installer (Refer to Specification Refrigeration system).
Cleaning room in recycling area
A gradient, and a floor drain, have to be installed in the floor of the cleaning room
in the recycling area. The drain is a gully with a sludge trap and an odour trap. A
vehicular, load-bearing drainage gully is to be installed in front of the cleaning
room (Refer to Sanitary works).
Cleaning machine area GO counter
A gradient and a floor drain in the form of a gully with a sludge and an odour trap
have to be installed where the cleaning machine is stored by the Selection/picking
counter.
A moveable, 3 sectional grating made from a U-profiled frame with a lower
positioned, drainage outlet is to be integrated for draining the cleaning machine
(Refer to master details).
Chain conveyor
The floor slab for the chain conveyor has to be 50 cm lower than the hall floor
(Refer to master detail).
Container ramp
The floor slab of the container ramp will be constructed as a reinforced concrete
floor slab with a floated, smoothed surface (anti-skidding).
HGV parking space and access ramp (inside cold hall)
The HGV parking space including ramp has to be constructed as a concrete slab.
The concrete areas will have a brushed surface and are to be formed as high frost
and de-icing salt resistant.
The surface of the access ramp to the cold hall is to be produced as a broom
finish (Refer to master detail).
The slope of the access ramp should be such that it can also be driven on with
order pickers (e.g. reduce slope to smaller or equal to 3%, at least at the lower
area of the access ramp).

Page 37 of 215

9.7

9.8

9.9

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Construction schedule
Punctually before work begins, the Contractor has to prepare a construction
(phase) plan, which shows the individual concreting fields and/or sections. This
plan has to be submitted to the client for approval.
The following criteria has to be taken into account:
Individual concreting sections in areas with underfloor heating have to be
determined in agreement with the installer of the underfloor heating.
Joint profiles must be installed, field-for-field, and parallel to the installation of
the underfloor heating, to ensure required access for the concrete lorries.
Curing the floor slab
In order to prevent the floor slab from drying out too fast, it has to be fully covered
with foil as a diffusion protection layer for several days. Additional heat insulation
mats have to be installed during seasons where night frost might occur.
Furthermore, the door of the warehouse must remain closed to prevent any
draughts.
Utilising sprayed, curing agents is not permitted.

Quality description
Evenness
Concreting works must generally be executed with a laser-levelling device. The
following, increased requirements for the evenness of the created hall floor, based
on DIN 18202, Table 3, line 4 apply:
Measuring distance between points
0.10 m
1m
4m
10 m
15 m
>15 m
Please note: Intermediate values are
millimetre

Actual dimension (as limit)


1 mm
3 mm
9 mm
12 mm
15 mm
15 mm
interpolated and rounded off to a full

The compliance with these evenness tolerances has to be proven by a floor


levelling survey for all areas, in particular at the joint profiles.
Surface area optics
The concretes surfaces must ensure:
Smooth and even surface structure

Even cement grey colour

Sufficient covering for the heating cables

Concrete quality
The concrete must have the following characteristics:
Page 38 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

Concrete type minimum C 30/37

Water-Cement ratio </= 0,50

Bending tensile strength 3.4 N/mm

Maximum particle size 16 mm

Cement ratio CEM 32.5 R minimum 340 kg/m

28.02.2014

The quality of the building materials and concrete is to be in accordance with EN


206.
In addition, the structural characteristics mentioned above have to be ensured
and documented by ongoing quality controls (freshly-delivered concrete tests,
cube samples, etc.).
Steel fibres
Steel fibres to be mixed in the concrete must have the following characteristics:
Steel fibre length, minimum 50 mm, depending on the manufacturer

Steel fibre ratio, minimum 30 kg/m concrete, in accordance to steel fibre


length
Use of steel fibres with cropped ends

Tensile strength of steel fibres, minimum 1000 N/mm

Bending tensile strength minimum 2.8 N/mm

Type, length, diameter and strength of steel fibres are to be in accordance with
the calculation of the Contractor, in respect of the basic position of object-specific,
structural calculations and the load assumptions in respect of the warehouse
operation, as outlined in this specification.
The values required have to be proven by technical data sheets of the steel fibre
type chosen by the Contractor.
Additional reinforcement
An additional reinforcement mat Q 424 (mat width) has to be installed in the lower
third, at the edge of the floor slab when there will be racking systems.
If the building is situated in an earthquake zone, then additional reinforcements in
the floor slab have to be supplied for anchoring the high racks. For buildings in
earthquake zones, the following additional minimum reinforcement has to be as
follows: additional reinforcement layer Q 335 A above the underfloor heating and
by increasing the steel fibre content to 35 kg / m and/or in accordance with the
structural calculation. Additional reinforcement must be provided for: recycling
area, cold hall, refrigeration, freezer room, selection/picking counter in freezer
room, high rack area incl. RS/Chocolate and block stacking area (optional high
rack extension).
Hard aggredoor dry shake application
The following parameters apply in respect of the hard aggregate dry shake
application on the concrete surface:
The 1st step is to add 3.0 - 3.5 kg/m via hand gritter fresh in fresh and will be
worked into the concrete surface with the power floater.
The 2nd step is a repeat of the 1st, applying a quantity of 1.0 - 1.5 kg/m.

Page 39 of 215

9.10

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

The protective layer is to be increased wear and tear in accordance with DIN
EN 13892 (maximal 5.5 cm / 50 cm).
Thickness of the hard aggregate, wearing course layer: 2-3 mm

The hard aggregate dry shake application gives the floor slab surface an even
cement grey colour and an even smooth Structure.
Crack width reduction
The maximal allowed crack width limit is 0.3 mm.

Hazardous substances and extinguishing water retention (if required)


If regulations (e.g. groundwater protection) require retention of groundwater
polluting substances (e.g. cleaning agents) in cases of leaks or fire extinguishing,
it has to be supplied.
Preferably, the hazardous substance and extinguishing water retention should be
located within the warehouse area; it can be installed as follows:
Creation of a bottom membrane (under the floor slab, warehouse) with:
- Plastic
sealing
membrane
(reference
product,
refer
to
Manufacturers/Suppliers/Products) with a minimum thickness of 3.0 mm
and a smooth surface on both sides as a sealant for the planned
catchment facilities (e.g. floor slab warehouse)
Please note: The general certificate of suitability and/or a license and the
certificate of resistance in respect of utilities (groundwater polluting
substances) have to be submitted for the membrane. These have to be
submitted to the client (Construction Department) with a minimum of 14
days before work commences.
- Install the membrane on the prepared base (planum) between 2
geotextiles (fleeces) as a separating and protective layer
Please note: The membranes must be welded together and fully cover
the base.
The geotextile has to be installed with the roll width overlapping by 10%;
however, with a minimum overlapping width of 0.5 m. The overlapping
width can be reduced to 0.20 if the overlapping geotextiles are thermally
stapled.
The geotextiles (fleeces) must have the following area weights:
* minimum 1200 g/m for geotextile between planum and membrane
* minimum 400 g/m for geotextile between membrane and floor slab
- Extending (protrusion) the membrane above upper edge of the floor slab
on enclosing walls and vertical structures (e.g. columns)
Page 40 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

(e.g. 2 cm for upstand + 10 cm for safety + 2 cm for mechanical fixings =


14 cm above floor slab)
Please note: In areas where the membrane cannot be extended (e.g.
doors, door, loading ramps) a liquid-type sealant has to be supplied
between the membrane and the building.
- Mechanical fixings, extended membrane
(e.g. in the area of the last 2 cm of the extended membrane)
- Protect the extended membrane against mechanical damage (e.g. impact
protection)
Extinguishing water retention volume with:
-

Gradient in floor slab, warehouse


Please note: the gradient of the floor slab must be between the insides of
the main lanes along the longitudinal (Axes B and E). The maximum
height difference of the base is to be in accordance with the calculation for
the required retention volume.
Extinguishing water barriers at all low points (e.g. escape and emergency
doors between axes B and E, manual bent board at doors in the area of
the container ramp)
Please note: The chain conveyor pit has a sump pit for the controlled
discharge of water at each end.

This work has to be supervised and accepted by a specialist.


3.2.10

Loading bridges
Stationary, fully hydraulic loading bridges with electric drive motors are to be
provided as follows:
Frame, platform, feeder, and other steel components and parts in galvanised
steel
Platform consisting of 1 piece sheet without joints and/or welded joints, antislip plate (tear-drop profile)
Lateral click-in tongues in feeder, each 12 cm wide

Control/regulating via control panel ( on the right next to the door reveal, when
viewed from inside) with:
- Automatic return to zero position
- Automatic retraction and emergency stop
Accessories:
-

Rubber buffers (W/H/D 250/500/140 mm) as impact protection on the


external area outside loading bridge

The following variants of loading bridges will be used:


Loading bridge Type A with:
Location: GI/GO high rack and block area, recycling area and GI/GO
RS/Chocolate (if the warehouse location is Northern and Central Europe)
- Nominal length: 2,500 mm
- Nominal width: 2,250 mm
- Feeder: 500 mm
Loading bridge Type B with:
-

Location: GI/GO cold rooms and GI/GO RS/Chocolate (if warehouse


location is Southern Europe)
Nominal length: 2,250 mm
Nominal width: 2,250 mm
Feeder: 840 to 1,000 mm

Page 41 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Other: Insulation panel (thickness minimum 80 mm) below loading bridge


to insulate against outside air
Loading bridge Type C (Jumbo Bridge) with:
-

- Location: Goods entrance (GI) 1 and 2 and cold hall (HGV space)
- Nominal length: 4,000 mm
- Nominal width: 2,250 mm
- Feeder: 500 mm
Loading bridge Type D (Jumbo Bridge) with:
- Location: Chiller buffer
- Nominal length: 3,500 mm
- Nominal width: 2,250 mm
- Feeder: 840 to 1000 mm
- Other: Insulation panel (thickness minimum 80 mm) under loading bridge
to insulate against outside air

In case of frequent deliveries with small HGVs (e.g. Sprinter), a lifting platform can be
installed at one door in Chiller Buffer.

Page 42 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

3.2.11

28.02.2014

Sectional doors
Manually operated, sectional doors are to be provided as follows:
1 door section with 3 viewing windows in non-refrigerated warehouse areas

1 door section with 1 viewing window in refrigerated warehouse areas

Guide rollers (top and bottom) and chain tensioner for chain drive

Latches to close the doors and simultaneously trigger the end switches for the
intruder alarm system (bolt contact)
Magnet contact at the end of the guide rail or light curtain (minimum 1 m
above upper edge floor) for activating the loading bridge only if sectional door
is open

Please note: It has to be ensured that the bolt contact is suitable for passive
movements of the doors (normally up to 4 cm), which are triggered by wind, for
example.
In agreement with local authorities, selected sectional doors can be used as
access for fire services. These doors have to be fitted with profile cylinders for
outside access and marked accordingly.
The following sectional door variants will be used:
Sectional door, non-refrigerated area (Type A):
- Location: GI/GO High rack and block area, recycling area and GI/GO
RS/Chocolate (if warehouse location is Northern and Central Europe)
- Panel thickness: 40 mm
- Clearing width: 2,800 mm
- Clearing height: 2,800 mm
Sectional door, refrigerated area (Type B):
- Location: GI/GO cold rooms and GI/GO RS/Chocolate (if warehouse
location is Southern Europe)
- Panel thickness: 40 mm
- Clearing width: 2,500 mm
- Clearing height: 2,600 mm
Please note: When the door leaf is opened, guide rail curves redirect it into
the horizontal position. During closing, the door extends from the loading
bridge to the level of the insulation panel.
The guide rails of the sectional doors (Type B) have to be fitted in such a way
that no loads are transferred onto the panelled ceilings (e.g. mounting on the
load-bearing structure of the building or solid walls and/or ceilings).

Page 43 of 215

13.1

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

3.2.12

28.02.2014

Dock shelters
Sectional doors (Type A) without side dock shelters with top and side curtains:
Material: reinforced polyurethane fabric, weight 1,200 g/cm

Nominal width: 3,500 mm

Nominal height: 3,200 mm

Front depth: 600 mm

Width side skirt: 700 mm

Height top skirt: 1,000 mm

Mounting height (upper edge seal): 4,500 mm above external area

Mounting height (lower edge seal): 1,300 mm above external area

Drain groove in cover awning for rainwater drainage

The sectional doors (Type B) have to be fitted on the outside with dock seals with
bevelled side and top pads including a run-off rebate for rainwater drainage.
To compensate for the outside gradient, the dock seals have to be trapezoidal
from top to bottom.
The optimal indentation depth must be ensured by rubber buffers as impact
protection (Refer to Loading bridges).
The size and mounting height of the dock shelters must, in agreement with the
client (Logistics Department), be adjusted to comply with the customary sizes for
national HGVs.
3.2.13

External doors/External windows

General
Door frames and leaves of external doors and external windows, which are made
of aluminium, must be supplied as colour RAL 7021; all profiles are to be
reinforced.
External windows are to be provided as aluminium tilt and turn windows with
incorrect, operation locking. To prevent damage from adjoining components, all
windows are to be fitted with opening limiters (opening 90, less in the area of the
columns).
In addition, an external window cill is to be provided in aluminium, colour RAL
9006, protruding at least 3 cm over the finished faade and anti-drumming
protection.
Glazing is to be provided as triple, insulated glazing.
All external doors are to be equipped with a magnet and bolt contact for closure
monitoring for the intruder alarm system and an E-opener (except external doors
on the technical floor) for access control as well as a bell and intercom system (24
V, direct current and/or switchable).
All windows are also to be equipped with a magnet and bolt contact for closure
monitoring for the intruder alarm system.
Please note: In general, the client (Procurement Department) prefers acoustic
glass breakage detectors to be installed for glass breakage detection

Page 44 of 215

13.2

13.3

13.4

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

If an air conditioning is installed, the relevant windows are also to be fitted with a
separate magnet contact to control (release/lock) the inside units of the air
conditioning system (Refer to Heating system and Ventilation system works).
Warehouse
External doors must be provided as single leaf, steel sheet doors, colour RAL
7035, with corner, closed or block frame, colour RAL 7021.
The doors must be supplied with a rain guard on the frame, inside overhead door
closer, the floor seal is to be formed with a brush-rail of aluminium under the door
leaf, an internally-fitted stainless steel kick plate (h=30 cm), adequate thermal
insulation for the door leaf and stainless steel handle set, inside lever, outside
knob, with panic lock. Two-leafed doors, when installed, will be additionally
equipped with sequence selector lock and inside panic bar.
Windows with polycarbonate glazing (Refer to Faade works).
GI/GO counter area
All windows in GI/GO offices are to be provided with rail-guided sun protection as
external blinds, colour RAL 9006 for blinds and RAL 7035 for blind cassettes,
colour RAL 7021 for guide rails, with an electric motor fitted on every second
window, which will control the window functions for each pair of windows. Control
is carried out on a room-by-room basis, divided according to the orientation of the
windows, and having a superordinated control with wind, rain and sun monitors.
To accept freight documents, the GI counter area of the warehouse will be fitted
with a service window made from thermally separated aluminium profiles, colour
RAL 7021 and fixed insulating glazing. Also fitted is a lockable interchangeable,
drawer to exchange papers. When open, the interchangeable drawer is flush with
the faade. The counter window is also fitted with an integrated microphone and
loudspeaker (Refer to Electrical works).
Administration
The entrance faade in the area of the staircase (Refer to master detail) is to be
constructed as an aluminium post and beam construction, colour RAL 7021. The
area of the stair landing is to be fitted with opaque DELOG-COLOR glazing. All
other glazing is to be executed analog to the windows. Areas with the risk of
falling will be fitted with VSG glazing (compound safety glass).
The entrance faade is to be fitted with an entrance door as a two-sided,
automatic emergency exit telescopic sliding door with two centre opening sliding
leaves and fixed side panels in a framed element in accordance with the following
specification:
Mains-free opening (battery pack), with redundant, self-controlled drive, with
self-regulating and monitoring for the door leafs movement
Safety software for structural and dynamic force limiter

With exchangeable guide rail

With two self-monitoring, infrared light curtains and two radar detectors,
whereby the detector in the escape direction is self-monitoring
Lateral closing edge monitoring (adjacent edge monitoring)

Programme switches, lockable with the following control programmes: off, exit,
permanently open, automatic, self-regulating partial opening.

Page 45 of 215

13.5

13.6

14.1

14.2

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

In addition, connections have to be supplied for on-site, card readers (access


control), the intruder alarm system (magnet contacts and locking units) and a key
switch
In one of the side panels, an insulation panel filling has to be supplied instead of
the glass filling, in which the intercom system, access control and letterbox are to
be integrated (Refer to master detail). The complete entrance is to be covered
with a glass canopy with a fall towards the faade.
All windows as well as the staircase faade from the top edge of the awning are to
be provided with rail-guided sun protection as external blinds, colour RAL 9006 for
blinds and blind cassettes, colour RAL 7021 for runner rails, with an electric motor
fitted on every second window, which will control the window functions for each
pair of windows. Control is carried out on a room-by-room basis, divided
according to the orientation of the windows, and having a superordinated control
with wind, rain and sun monitors.
The windows in the changing and WC areas will be fitted with frosted or
ornamental glass.
Gatehouse
The same requirements apply as for Administration.
The windows in the porters common room are to be sliding windows in
accordance with the master detail.
The WC window will be fitted with frosted or ornamental glass.
Pump house
The same requirements apply as for the steel doors in the warehouse.
3.2.14

Internal doors/Internal windows

General
Fire protection doors with the required fire resistance classifications are to be
supplied and fitted in accordance with the planning documents and/or regulations.
Additional specifications (e-opener, magnet and bolt contacts, locking units,
soundproofing requirements, hydraulic overhead door closer, etc.) are to be
included in the door sample list (Refer to Appendix).
All doors are to be fitted with high-quality, rosette fittings with concealed fixing;
WC internal doors with WC fittings. All doors are to be fitted with a floor-mounted,
door stop, preferably with a wall-mounted, door stop in wet rooms.
If required, doors have to be fitted with door grilles or cut-outs under the doors to
ensure air re-circulation in agreement with Ventilation system works.
Warehouse
In general, steel doors have to be installed throughout the warehouse.

Page 46 of 215

14.3

14.4

14.5

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

The cold room doors, especially connecting to the freezer rooms (freezer room
and Selection Counter, freezer room) must be insulated; the doors of the freezer
rooms incl. quadrilateral heating system (heated frame and threshold).
GI/GO counter areas
The GI/GO counter areas are to be fitted with wooden doors with a HPL surface
(Resopal). The colour of the doors of the GI/GO offices must be similar to RAL
9002 (reference colour: GetaLit HPL/Duropal W 400). The colour of the door
frames is to be RAL 7021.
GI/GO offices towards the warehouse are to be fitted with soundproof windows
(minimum Class 3) as fixed elements with a powder coated steel frame, colour
RAL 7021.
Please note: Sideboards, with a height of approx. 1.20 m, are to be installed on
the wall of the warehouse GI offices. Consequently, the height of the window cills
in the warehouse GI offices must be 1.30 m.
A sliding door must be provided at the Selection Counter for direct operation of
the printer that is positioned outside the area (viewed from the inside).
Administration
In general, the internal doors in the hallway are to be wooden doors, except for
separating doors, with a HPL surface (Resopal).
The colour of the wooden doors must be similar to RAL 9002 (reference colour:
GetaLit HPL/Duropal W 400). The colour of the door frames is RAL 7021.
The separating doors in the hallway are to be as steel or aluminium doors with a
viewing window, overhead door closer and magnet contacts for the intruder alarm
system. Doors are to be fitted with an E-opener (access control). The colour of the
door profile is RAL 7021.
The IT server room is to be fitted with a steel door in T90-RS, intruder resistant,
with overhead door closer, magnet and bolt contact and safety lock; preparation
for access control incl. E-opener (24 V direct current and/or switchable).
The common rooms (smokers and non-smokers) towards the hall are to be fitted
with inside windows as a fixed element with a powder coated steel frame, colour
RAL 7021.
The office and conference rooms towards the hallway are to be fitted with inside
windows (transom lights) as a fixed element with a powder coated steel frame,
colour RAL 7021. Positioning of inside windows is to be executed in accordance
with the grid pattern for the external windows (Refer to master detail).
Gatehouse
The gatehouse is to be fitted with wooden, internal doors with a HPL surface
(Resopal).
The colour of the wooden doors must be similar to RAL 9002 (reference colour:
GetaLit HPL / Duropal W 400). The colour of the door frames is to be RAL 7021.

Page 47 of 215

15.1

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

3.2.15

28.02.2014

Rapid roll doors

General
The following general requirements apply to all rapid roll doors (apart from those
for freezer rooms):
Blade door guides with side coil for vertically opening rapid roll doors

The surfaces of the steel parts are to be sendzimir galvanised

High frequency motor with frequency converter

Opening speed: minimum 2.5 m/s

Control with:
- manual emergency release
Accessories: pull switches on both sides with solid fastening, door-line, light
curtain with impact height of up to 2.50m (integrated in lateral frames),
infrared indicator/radar to interrupt closing process in case of open or closing
of rapid roll door; all on both sides.
Optional: induction loops on both sides
---> Agreement with clients (Logistics Dept.)

The following general requirements apply for rapid roll doors for freezer rooms:
Fully flexible door leaf

High frequency motor with frequency converter

Opening/closing speeds (open/closed): 1.6/0.4 m/s per door leaf

Control with:
- manual emergency release
Accessories: pull switches with solid fastening, all on both sides; if required
frame heating system to prevent open door leaf freezing on floor
Optional: induction loops on both sides
---> Agreement with clients (Logistics Dept.)

The following rapid roll door variants will be utilise:


Rapid roll sectional door, insulated - vertically opening (Type D)
Location: Recycling container ramp; recycling cold hall, cold hall
container ramp, HGV parking area and access ramp, cold hall, refrigeration
Fruit+Veg; Fruit+Veg, chain conveyor (entrance)
- Clear opening width/Height: in accordance with plan (master detail)
- Panel thickness: 40 mm
- Curtain: double-skinned, thermally separated and thermally insulated,
aluminium laminated, screwed with strap hinges, weatherproofed with
rubber seal and fitted with ribbon glazing
- Surface: 2-layers of lacquer in RAL 9006
- In addition: mechanical door lock (with magnet and bolt contact for intruder
alarm system for rapid roll doors for the recycling area container ramp,
cold hall container ramp, HGV parking area and access ramp cold hall)
Please note: The rapid roll doors for the HGV parking area and access
ramp for the cold hall are to be fitted with key switches, instead of
induction loops and pull ropes.

Page 48 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Rapid roll door, non-insulated - vertically opening (Type E)

Location: Meat, refrigeration, chain conveyor (exit), GI/GO Fruit+Veg


RS/Chocolate, (if separated), non-food return recycling area
- Clear opening width/Height: in accordance with plan (master detail)
- Curtain: PVC with ribbon glazing (height 900 mm)
- In addition: active crash system
Double-winged freezer room rapid roll door - horizontally opening (Type F)
Location: SEL Freezer GI/GO Freezer; SEL Freezer Chiller Buffer, SEL
Freezer Freezer
- Clearing width/Height: in accordance with plan (master detail)
- Additional equipment: active crash system
Please note: To ensure clearance for construction, when installing the chain
conveyor, the guide rails and door boxes of the rapid roll doors for the cold room
chain conveyor (entry and exit) must be installed outside the cold room.
If the cold room chain conveyor requires fire protection separation (e.g. vertical
fire protection door at the entrance to the chain conveyor), then the installation of
the guide rails and door boxes for the relevant rapid roll doors must be agreed
with the client (Procurement Dept.).
3.2.16 Fire protection doors
In accordance with the specifications in the planning documentation and/or in
accordance with regulations, fire protection doors as sliding door or hub door are
to be provided, when these are normally open, but only automatically close in
case of fire . If required, escape doors are to be integrated into the fire protection
doors.
The following general requirements apply for fire protection doors:
Fire resistance classes in accordance with the planning documents or
regulations
Control/regulating with:
- Independent smoke detector for activation
Please note: connection to the fire alarm system is to be supplied as an
option
- Magnetic retaining clamp to keep the door open
- Optional: Motor for opening including switches and/or operating control
panel (if manual opening is not ensured)
Please note: if the public electricity grid is not very stable and/or frequent
short power failures are to be expected, then the fire protection doors are to
be fitted with an uninterruptible power supply (UPS).
The following fire protection doors are to be utilised:
Freezer room - fire protection door - horizontally opening (Type J)

Location: Selection Counter, Freezer room Freezer


- Clear opening width/height: in accordance with the plan (master detail)
Fire protection door - vertically opening (Type H)
Location: Rooms for hazardous substances (if applicable)
-

Clear opening width/height: in accordance with the plan (master detail)

Additional equipment: integrated escape door

Please note: If fire protection doors are to be utilised in freezer rooms, the
relevant components (e.g. magnetic retaining clamp, guiding rail and rollers,
smoke detector) have to be suitable for room temperatures of down to -30C. The
Page 49 of 215

17.1

17.2

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

control system for the fire protection door has to be fitted outside the freezer
rooms.
3.2.17

Cold room construction

General
All walls and ceilings enclosing the cold rooms have to be constructed using
sandwich panels (Isopanels). The Isopanels consist of cover caps from
galvanised, plastic-coated steel, colour RAL 9010, and PUR (polyurethane) and/or
PIR (polyisocyanurate) hard foam core (no use of polystyrene).
The thickness of the Isopanels is as follows:
Normal and cold rooms: 120 mm

Freezer rooms: 170 mm

All parts (e.g. supports), which penetrate into the cold rooms, must be insulated to
a minimum of 1 m above the cold room ceiling with Isopanels (insulation thickness
= cold room wall and/or ceiling). In case of Isopanels, which are installed in front
of other parts (e.g. walls, columns); cavities between parts must be avoided due
to possible condensation.
Please note: When planning the room heights, it is important to take into account
the shelf heights of the racking (depending on the project-specific pallet height)
and the required minimum distances between the panelled ceiling and the top of
the stored goods:
At least 1.0 m when using a sprinkler system
At least 0.7 m for air circulation air coolers
Walls
Inspection and/or maintenance openings, 1.50 m x 1.50 m, have to be built into
the longitudinal partition wall (inside wall) of the cold room, chain conveyor and in
the area of the air cooler, chain conveyor.
---> Coordinate with the refrigeration contractor and/or client
To protect the vapour barrier on the lower floor slab of the freezer rooms, vapour
diffusion tight protective strips (e.g. vinyl rubber) are to be provided below the
panelled walls.
To create a sluice, the chain conveyor is fitted with a transparent, strip curtain
approx. 6 m behind the distribution area which is adjusted to the box dimensions.
A freezer cell with two 2 leaf doors is to be installed inside the freezer room,
Freezer (Refer to master detail and interface list). The transfer of the load of the
leaved doors is executed via the door hinges and via a roller under each door
leaf.
All panelled walls, which adjoin non-refrigerated areas, have to be installed to
extend to under the roof (fall protection, hygienic separation).

Page 50 of 215

17.3

17.4

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Ceilings
The cold room ceilings are to be constructed as suspended ceilings made of
Isopanels. The ceiling is to be suspended directly from the load-bearing structure
of the roof and/or trapezoidal sheet metal with threaded rods.
All panelled ceilings are to be fitted with an additional suspension at the side
(support point on the panelled wall). They have to be accessible for inspection
and maintenance purposes (100 kg/panel). No installation loads (e.g. refrigeration
system pipes, cable conduits, sprinkler pipes, suspending guide rails for sectional
doors Type B, smoke and heat vent transom lights) may be exerted on the
panelled ceiling (e.g. fixing on the load-bearing structure of the building or solid
walls and/or ceilings).
For warehouses located in Southern Europe, a cold room ceiling is to be installed
in RS/Chocolate and GI/GO RS.
When creating corners, attention must be paid to retain the vapour barrier
efficiency of the cool room walls and ceilings and, for this reason, additional
vapour diffusion sealing strips (e.g. vinyl rubber) are to be provided on the butt
joints in addition to the grooved and the fully bonded installation of all edged parts
in the putty layer (cold putty).
To avoid condensation and ice in small cavities (e.g. by dimensional tolerances of
the solid walls) between insulating panels and enclosing fire walls, a vapour proof
connection to the solid wall has to be ensured.
Please note: Suitable measures have to be provided to ensure that, when the
sprinkler system is activated in the ceiling cavity, the load-bearing capacity of the
panelled ceiling is not exceeded (e.g. emergency drainage).
Equipping freezer rooms
The freezer rooms are to be equipped in accordance with regulations or, to a
minimum, as follows:
Emergency call facility with an illuminated button at all emergency exit doors
freezer rooms (Freezer and Selection Counter, Freezer)
Please note: In order to transfer the signal Activation emergency call freezer
rooms to the intruder alarm (IAS), the ICA technology and the refrigeration
system, the Emergency call Freezer rooms has to be fitted with the
appropriate signal exits (e.g. potential-free contact) and wired to the relevant
systems (wiring by Electrical works and ICA technology).
A sufficient number of heated pressure compensation valves
Please note: The positioning is to be executed as in the refrigerated area
(normal cold rooms). If pressure compensation valves are to be positioned in
a fire wall, then they have to be fitted with a separate fire protection device
(e.g. fire protection door with electric magnet contact). Otherwise, the
pressure compensation valves may be installed in the area of the fire
protection door (if applicable) to ensure closure in case of fire via the fire
protection.
It is mandatory to agree the dimensions of the pressure compensation
valves with the planner of the refrigeration plant and/or refrigeration
plant constructor (consideration of project-specific cooling time during
general operation guide value: 5 min/K). The opening pressure of the
pressure compensation valves must not exceed 30 pascals.

Page 51 of 215

18.1

18.2

19.1

19.2

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

3.2.18

28.02.2014

Steel construction

General
All steel constructions as well as reinforcement, strengthening and substructures
are to be galvanised. Welded joints on galvanised parts are not permitted.
All joints on galvanised parts have to be bolted connections. Cold galvanising at
the building site is not permitted.
Warehouse
For some components of the refrigeration system (e.g. condenser/heat
exchanger, air coolers, pipelines), steel structures (galvanised) are also required
for the installation and/or suspension works, their installation and/or utilisation has
to be agreed with the supplier of the refrigeration system. All primary steel
structures have to be supplied and installed.
Additionally, reinforcement, strengthening and substructures for rapid roll doors,
canopies, truck display, etc. are to be provided
3.2.19

Metalwork/Impactprotection

General
All metalwork constructions are to be galvanised. Welded joints on galvanised
parts are not permitted.
All joints on galvanised parts have to be bolted connections. Cold galvanising at
the building site is not permitted.
Warehouse
Building components and/or elements which are at risk from collision, such as the
Isopanel walls (internal, faade, cold rooms), GI/SEL desks, fire protection doors
and/or doors, rapid roll doors and/or doors, fire escapes, free standing equipment
(e.g. wall hydrants, electrical subdistribution systems, underfloor heating
distributor, rainwater downpipes, drip water and/or condense pipes) have to be
protected by appropriate structures.
Various impact protection variants are to be installed:
Steel crash barriers, single and/or double
In areas where people could be on foot, a protective mineral fibre, wooden
panel (MDF board) with bevelled edges has to be installed. Crash barriers
both internally and externally.
Impact protection bollards
The bollards are to be approx. 50 cm above the ground, approx. 400 mm ,
The bollard wall thickness is to be 5-8 mm. The hollow casing is to be filled
with concrete and smoothed at the top (Refer to master detail) and is to be
marked with diagonal yellow/black stripes.
External bollards (container storage areas) must extend to approx. 1.30 m
above the upper edge of site.
Bent steel pipes ( e.g. for wall hydrants in warehouse areas)

Page 52 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Steel angle iron/square-cut timber beams (e.g. at loading bridges)


Steel L-angles, H x W = 200 mm x 100 mm x 10 mm or square-cut timber
beams H x W = 200 mm x 200 mm.
Please note: To ensure room for manoeuvring, the impact protection for the
dock levellers must be installed at a distance of 15 cm from the dock leveller
(Refer to master detail).
All racks in front of walls and grilles, (e.g. cigarette cage, racks at the loading
station) are to be fitted with an additional steel angle.
Steel angle irons, H x W = 200 mm x 100 mm x 10 mm are to be installed and
completely filled with concrete including foil, edge insulation strip etc. in front
of all Isopanel walls (in accordance with master detail). The surface to be
bevelled and smoothed. The edge joint to the panel is to be covered with a
metal angle, analog to the Isopanel.
Please note: The cover plate in the freezer area is only to be installed after
the cooling phase. The created joint between the concrete and panelled wall
must be subsequently, completely filled with mineral wool.
A filled, concreted crash barrier is also a possible alternative to a filled,
concreted steel angle iron.

The container ramp, cold hall ramp as well as the HGV parking area (inside the
cold hall) are to be fitted with a steel (tube) railing as fall protection, additionally
with a steel impact protection (except ramp cold hall). The sockets in the
container are also to be fitted with impact protection.
Caged, safety ladders must be installed for access to the following areas:
Roof levels of the warehouse on the external faade (starting from the steel
platforms for the plant rooms)
Roof of the administration building on the external faade of warehouse
(starting from the roof of the warehouse)
Ceiling slabs above the GI/GO offices
Ceiling slab levels above the cold rooms (starting from low-lying ceiling levels)
Please note: In consultation with authorising bodies and the fire services,
additional access points and access ladders with a dry line for the fire services
may be required.
An anti-fall protection measure must be provided as follows, when constructing
and/or working on any roof without the height protection of a parapet wall:
Anti-fall protection as a steel railing

Distancing the lateral and/or longitudinal railing bars in accordance with


regulations
Height railing in accordance with regulation (a minimum of 1.10 m above the
upper edge of the roof)
Installing a railing through the roof covering on purlins and/or edge beams (if
required, by enlarging the vertical frame profile in accordance with the
relevant, moulded parts of the roof sealing)
Please note: The dimensioning of the steel profiles and the connections to
reinforced concrete parts must be executed in accordance with the structural
calculations, which are to be based on the respective, national regulations.
The horizontal load at the upper edge of the anti-fall protection is to be set at a
value of at least 1 KN/m.

Page 53 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

If there are height differences on the panelled ceilings of the cold rooms, then
anti-fall protection must be provided in the form of a steel railing.
The battery chargers for the forklift trucks are to be fitted directly on the wall or at
the centre of the room on consoles or stands.
All other accesses to the warehouse or technical area as well as accesses to the
archive via the battery recharge area are to be fitted with open mesh stairs and
landings. All stairs and landings are to be fitted with a steel railing.
The open mesh stairs and landings for the main entrance to the archive above the
battery recharge area are to be opaque (e.g. steel sheet under the open mesh
stairs and landing).
A locking handrail must be provided as anti-fall protection at transfer points from
the landing for the main entrance to the archive above the battery recharge area
as well as at the partition between the archive above the battery recharge area
and the warehouse area.
Height restrictions are to be provided on both sides of all rapid roll doors as
follows:
Steel pipe ( 100 mm) suspended on chain

-Lower edge of steel pipe equal to clearance height of rapid roll door
Appropriate distance for the height restriction in relation to the rapid roll
door (e.g. 1.5 m)
The steel pipe is to be lacquered in signal colour yellow/black

Workshop and industrial truck workshop (in Non-Food return)


The workshop and industrial truck workshop are separated by mesh screens
(mesh width 40x40 mm, wire thickness >/= 3 mm) with an enclosing frame,
including impact ram protection on both sides. Depending on the aforementioned
construction, the workshop and industrial truck workshop are to be fitted with a
mesh door (W/H = 2.00x4.20 m), fixed hanging on a guide rail above the door
opening (Refer to master detail).
Workplace GI/GO Fruit+Veg
The workplace in GI/GO Fruit+Veg is to be fitted with an enclosure (approx. 3.20 x
2.15 m) (Refer to master detail).
The enclosure consists of a galvanised steel structure or system solution (e.g.
post and beam structure) with fixed, polycarbonate glazing for exposed walls and
ceilings.
Crash barriers (double height) are to be installed to protect the structure against
damage.
Bird control
The covered, outside areas (container ramp; ramp cold hall) are to be fitted with
spot-welded, stainless steel screens/nets (V2A) as bird protection. The net
consists of spot-welded, stainless steel wires 1 mm and a maximum mesh
width of 30mm x 30mm. All fixing materials are also to be of stainless steel (V2A).
The net will be put in position after all the technically-related installations have
been completed, and is to be installed below the reinforced concrete trusses in
agreement with the client. If required, all other areas, in particular roofs, parapets,
etc. have to be fitted with bird control and/or protection facilities.

Page 54 of 215

19.3

19.4

19.5

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Lane numbering of pallet spaces as signage


For the lane numbering of the pallet spaces as signage, round tubes ( 30 mm)
from trapezoidal sheet metal have to be suspended with chains from the
suspended ceiling (at a suspension height of 4.50 m above the upper edge of the
finished floor and above the relevant lanes of the refrigerated and non-refrigerated
warehouse areas).
Their exact position is to be agreed with the client (Logistics Department).
Please note: The free air flow for the air cooler in the refrigerated warehouse
areas must be guaranteed.
Other
The optional tobacco storage section has to be fenced in and fitted with a lockable
door, analog to the steel structure for the workshop (Refer to master detail).
GI/GO counter areas
Inside the warehouse, the GI/GO counter areas are to be fitted with steel stairs
(access to GI/GO offices) with open mesh steps. The steel stairs and/or open
mesh steps must be opaque (e.g. steel sheet under the open mesh steps).
The external landings at the access points to the GI/GO counter areas are to be
fitted with a simple canopy in the form of a steel construction with a
polycarbonate, fixed glazing.
Roof drainage will take the form of gravity drainage via a drainage channel with a
direct connection to an external down pipe.
Administration
The stair railing is to be fitted as a lacquered, steel structure with a stainless steel
handrail.
A glass canopy is to be provided over the entrance.
The areas of the entrance door unit as well as the connecting door from
Administration to warehouse are to be fitted with a flush-fitting entrance mat,
dimension: approx. 1.30 m x 2.00 m.
In Agreement with mechanical & electrical works, the external unit of the multi split
air conditioner is to be fitted with a vestibule, enclosing steel structure with a sheet
metal frame.
The steel structure is to be installed on the foundations for the technical systems.
The vestibule should be positioned in such a way so that that all the external units
in this area are protected (e.g. external units, precision air conditioning for the IT
server room).
External area
Guiding aids, HGVs
To enable HGVs to drive exactly to the dock shelters, all sectional doors of the
refrigerated areas and the HGV parking areas (inside cold hall) are to be fitted
with guiding aids.
Guiding aids are to be as follows:
Round tubes positioned in pairs

Please note: Round tubes protrude approx. 250 mm above the level of the
floor (concrete slab).
Round tube - length/ approx. 2,500/180 mm (in front of the sectional door)

Distance to faade approx. 3,800 mm (in front of the sectional door)

Please note: Position and dimension of guiding aids HGV ramp (inside cold hall)
in accordance with master detail.

Page 55 of 215

20.1

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Smoking shelters
Smoking shelters (2.50 x 2.50 m) are to be installed outside the front of the GI/GO
counters and Administration. The smoking shelters will consist of a galvanised
steel structure with trapezoidal sheet metal roof (colour accordance to clients
specification); lateral walls are to be constructed as full glass walls to protect
against draught, with at least 5 m distance to the buildings. They are to be
equipped with fixed ashtrays (2-3 per shelter). If the shelters are in an area at risk
of collision, then they have to be protected against damage with crash barriers.
Fence
The entire site is to be surrounded by a galvanised, twin bar fence (8/6 mm),
height approx. 2 m.
The entrance/exit at the gatehouse is to be fitted with an electric, turnstile door.
(Refer to Electrical works)
A turnstile with access control (Refer to Electrical works for the access control) is
to be installed between the staff car park and gatehouse.
Barrier system
A barrier system must be installed for each entrance/exit at the gatehouse (entry
and exit for HGVs and passenger cars).
Please note: The card readers for access control and the video intercoms are to
be integrated in the operating terminals for the HGV weighbridge and/or in a stand
construction. The operating terminals for the HGV weighbridge and/or the stand
construction are to be delivered by the supplier of the HGV weighbridge. The
Electrical contractor will provide the card readers (distribution boxes) for the
access control and the video intercoms to the supplier of the HGV weighbridge for
integration in the operating terminals and/or stand construction.
3.2.20

Walls/Ceilings (Lightweight construction)

General
The outside walls of the GI/GO desk areas of the warehouse area and the interior
partition walls of the GI/GO desk areas and the gatehouse are to be formed as
gypsum stud walls. For soundproofing reasons, the partition walls have to be
extended up to the unfinished ceiling and/or up to the roof ( trapezoidal sheet
metal to be filled with beads) and double-cladded on both sides.
If offices or sanitary rooms adjoin the external faade of the warehouse, then the
inside face of the panel faade has to be covered with plasterboard.
The stud construction of partition walls of the office and conference rooms with
full-height, fixed windows (transom lights) are to be designed in such a way so it is
possible to integrate doors below the transom lights (UA profiles) at a later stage.
Please note: In consultation with the client (Admin offices), the partition of the
archive above the battery recharge area can be formed using plasterboard stud
walls.
The suspended ceilings will be constructed as a mineral fibre ceiling with an
exposed supporting structure (OGO, S3, surface star or equivalent) as a laid-in
installation; lacquered metal cassettes with fine perforations are to be used in
rooms exposed to humidity (WC, changing rooms, showers, etc.). Black fleece
has to be put on top of the metal cassettes to achieve a privacy shield in the
ceiling cavity. The clear opening height has to be in accordance with national
provisions.
Partition walls for WCs and showers as plasterboard stud walls, analog to the
office partition walls, also with humidity-resistant, plasterboard.
Page 56 of 215

20.2

20.3

20.4

20.5

21.1

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Upper areas, which remain exposed, are to be smoothed ready for painting.
Warehouse
The partitions between the battery recharge area as well as the archive above the
battey recharge area and the non-refrigerated areas should blend in with the
enclosing cold rooms by using Isopanels of 120 mm in thickness. Essentially, the
panels are subject to the same requirements as the cold room construction.
The load bearing capacity of the ceilings above the office in the workshop must be
planned so as to take into account the installation of technical systems (e.g. split
air conditioning systems, compact supply and exhaust air system).
GI/GO counter areas
The floor of the GI/GO counters, which is 50 cm higher than the hall floor, consists
of 25 mm thick chipboard, and is to be installed on a timber structure.
If required by law (fire protection), GI/GO counters can also be built as solid
construction.
Administration
To ensure the highest possible flexibility, office partition walls have to be installed
on the screed and/or or the finished floor.
Apart from that, the following applies to the IT server room:
No windows

All walls/ceilings in fire resistance class F90, all openings closed with
insulation systems
walls as safety walls (steel sheeting inserted on both sides between the
plasterboard layers)
No suspended ceiling

Please note: Seal the joints with a constructional sealant joint where, due to
the construction, there are joints in the ceiling panels (e.g. T-beam panels)
Other utility pipes (water, heating system, energy supply cables, etc.) may not
be laid through the server room
Technical equipment, refer to M&E and/or Plant Room works
Please note: The cavity and/or hollow floor, including the staircase and mobile
ramp for the IT server room in Administration will be organised by the client (IT
Dept.).
The partition walls for the management offices and conference room are to be
triple cladded on both sides.
Doorhouse
The requirements apply analog as per the Administration building.

3.2.21

Tiles

General
Wall tiles in all WC and shower areas (up to ceiling) are to be provided as follows:
Page 57 of 215

22.1

22.2

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

Material: glazed stoneware

Colour: colour according to the clients specifications

28.02.2014

Please note: When mounting the mirrors above the washbasins, they must be set
into the wall (wall-flush installation).
---> Coordination with Sanitary works
In all kitchenettes, tiled backsplashes are to be installed above the working
surface.
Tiled backsplashes are to be installed at the GO counter in the area behind the
grate of the cleaning machine.
Floor tiles in WC and shower and other areas in Administration are to be provided
as follows:
Material: fine ceramics, glazed stoneware, anti-slip

Colour: colour according to the clients specifications

Please note: The shower rooms are not to be fitted with a shower tray. Instead, a
flush-floor drain is to be installed and the tiles are to be laid with a gradient and a
seal level.
3.2.22

Floor coverings (carpet and PVC)

GI/GO counter areas


A PVC floor covering, with the following properties, must be fitted in the
GIGI/Selection counter areas:
Colour: colour according to clients specifications

Thickness: 2.0 mm

Residual indentation (EN 433): 0.1 mm

Electrical behaviour (EN 14041): antistatic and electrostatically dissipative

Flow resistance (EN 1081): 10^8 Ohm

Wear test, thickness loss (EN 660-1): Group P

Slip resistance (DIN 51130) R9

A needle punch carpet, with the following properties, must be fitted in the GI/GO
offices:
Colour: colour according to clients specifications

Overall thickness: approx. 6.5 mm

Electrical behaviour (EN 14041): antistatic and electrostatically dissipative

Flow resistance (EN 1081): 10^8 Ohm

Suitable for castor chairs (EN 985): yes

The skirting board (height approx. 6 cm) has to be installed in a matching material
to the floor covering. It must be a hard-core base, colour according to clients
specifications.
Administration offices
Needle punch carpet must be laid in the admin offices.
The same requirements as those for all the GI/GOGO counter areas apply.
The floor covering on the staircase must be provided as follows:
Page 58 of 215

22.3

23.1

23.2

23.3

23.4

24.1

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

Material: Granite, alternatively cut stone

Colour: According to the clients specifications.

28.02.2014

The skirting board (height approx. 6 cm) has to be installed in a matching material
to the floor covering. It must be a hard-core base, colour according to clients
specifications.
The stairs are to be fitted with an anti-slip strip at the front edge.
Gatehouse
PVC floor covering in hall, common room and UV.
The requirements are to be analog with the GI/GO counter areas.
3.2.23

Wallpapering and paintwork

Warehouse
All walls in machine rooms are to be painted white; floors are to be treated with an
oil resistant and dust binding coat.
In accordance with regulations, rooms with oil-containing machines (e.g. EPAS,
sprinkler pumps, refrigeration machine room) are to be treated with an oil resistant
coat. All other machine rooms are to be treated with a dust binding floor coat.
GI/GO counter areas
All walls (except WC and shower areas) are to be wallpapered with glass-fibre
wallpaper, painted brilliant white (emulsion paint).
All walls oriented towards the warehouse are to be painted as follows:
GI counter areas: yellow(RAL 1021)

GO counter areas (except Selection counter): red (RAL 3020)

SEL Counter: blue (RAL 5010)

Administration
All walls (except WC and shower areas) are to be wallpapered with glass fibre
wallpaper, painted brilliant white (emulsion paint). Alternatively, individual wall
surfaces (accentuated surfaces) are to be provided in the common rooms, for
certain walls, with a coloured paint according to the clients specifications (Lidl
country).
Server room, plant rooms and cleaning facility rooms are only to be treated with
white paint.
The floor in the server room is to be treated with a dust binding, antistatic coat.
Gatehouse
All internal walls are to be wallpapered with glass fibre wallpaper, painted brilliant
white (emulsion paint).

3.2.24

Markings/Signage

Warehouse
Floor markings
In accordance with routings for the pallet, storage positions and escape routes,
lines for pallet spaces and escape routes have to be marked with epoxy resin, line
marking paint (with a primer coat and clear varnish as a protective coat/seal) and

Page 59 of 215

24.2

24.3

24.4

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

a line width of100 mm in accordance with the routing plan and emergency exit
route concept.
Optionally, in agreement with the client (Logistics Dept.), in addition to numbering
the lanes of the pallet spaces as signage (Refer to Metalwork works), lanes may
be numbered as floor marking, with a font height of 300 mm.
The colour for the floor marking for the lanes for the pallet spaces and, where
applicable, for the lane numbers is white. The colour for the floor markings for
escape routes and restricted areas is yellow.
To avoid prohibited storage by the door entries, a cross-hatched restriction zone
(across the door width and 2 m deep) has to be provided.
Workshop floor and industrial truck workshop is to be painted/marked with epoxy
resin, Colour RAL 3000.
Door markings
Doors to be marked internally and externally with door numbers on metal (colour
white), with letters (colour black) and a font of height of a minimum of 500 mm.
The metal signs are to be fixed, centred, above the doors.
Signage
The technical, M&E and plant rooms are to be fitted with respective
information/warning signs
---> Coordination with the M&E works
Information signs relating to the maximum loads for the panelled ceilings (100
kg/Panel) and are to be fitted at all access points to the ceiling cavities above the
cold rooms.
GI/GO Counter areas
Signage
All rooms are to be fitted with a signage, consisting of a base plate with concealed
fixing including a filigree aluminium frame with a distance to the wall and satined
glass for simple replacement of the name/information; size (W/H) 15/10 cm.
Administration
Signage
The requirements are to be analog to the signage for the GI/GO counter areas.
Floor indicators made from satin glass, without frame, distanced from the wall are
to be fitted in the staircases/stairwells and by the lift, size (W/H) 30/20 cm.

Gatehouse and external areas


Floor marking
Parking lines are to be painted on the finished traffic area in front of the sectional
doors and/or loading bridges (except GI/GO cold rooms):
Solid line, sprayed on, or thick film method (hot plastic)
Please note: Floor marking is only to be applied after cleaning an pre-treating
the sub-surface.

Page 60 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

Width of the floor marking: 15 cm

Colour: white RAL 9016

28.02.2014

Relevant parking lines are to be applied externally for the required parking and
restricted areas.
Please note: At least 5 parking spaces must be reserved for disabled persons
next to the administration building in the Non-Food returns area.
The requirements are to be analog to the parking guidelines in front of the
sectional doors and/or loading bridges.
Signage
In agreement with the client, information signs for passenger vehicles and HGV
traffic are to be provided at entries and exits as follows:
Material: sheet metal

Colour: white background with black writing

Font height: minimum 500 mm

Traffic areas are to be supplied with relevant traffic and information signs with
galvanised, tubular posts.
Smoking shelters have to be fitted with information signs saying Absolute
smoking ban outside smoking shelter.
3.2.25

Lift
A passenger lift is to be provided in Administration for approx. 13 persons (1000
kg) as follows:
Traction lift without machine room with 2 stops

Travelling speed of a minimum of 1.2 m/s

Cabin dimension: clear opening L/W/H approx. 1.10/2.10/2.30 m

Door dimension: clear opening W/H 0.90/2.10 m

Symmetric opening, telescopic sliding doors

Stainless steel portals with a structured surface enclosing the shaft doors and
integrated call button and floor indicators
The cabin is to be equipped as follows:

Interchangeable, pre-hung stainless steel panels with a structured surface,


mirror at the rear, controls integrated in the wall panels, control panel,
which in accordance with country-specific regulations can also be
operated by disabled people
Circumferential stainless steel handrail, approx. 40 mm
Floor covering as an epoxy coating, alternatively PVC
Cabin illumination, indirect by fluorescent lights, above a large opaque,
glass grid-framed ceiling

Page 61 of 215

27.1

27.2

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Stainless steel, impact protection board, (height approx. 20 cm) above the
floor
Call button with up/down indicator
Optional: priority drive function via key switches

Special attention is to be given to the sound decoupling of the lift machines,


switch cabinets and other building accessories.
3.2.26

Locking system
A central locking system is to be installed for the functional units of the Distribution
Centre.
The locking system, which is divided in groups (general Master Key - GMK,
Master Group Key - MGK, Group Key - GK), should orientate itself to the following
allocation, and be in accordance with the specifications/requirements of the
organisation responsible for the particular country (Refer to Appendix sample
locking plan):
GMK:
Fire services

3.2.27

MGK 1:

MD (Managing Director)

MGK 2:

IM, VT (Head of Property Dept., Sales Manager)

MGK 3:

OM (Operations Manager)

MGK 4:

AM (Administration Manager)

MGK 5:

DL (Head of Operations)

GK 1:

Sales Agent, Structural Engineer

GK 2:

GI-, Selection, GO Manager

GK 3:

EDP (IT Dept.)

GK 4:

M & E (Maintainance engineer)

Fixtures and fittings, building

Warehouse
The cold room Chiller Buffer is to be fitted with a high desk (writing height approx.
1.20 m) with lockable drawer.
The sanitary rooms in the recycling area are to be fitted with plastic-coated,
waterproof, chipboard screens (alternatively coloured glass) between the urinals.
The external windows of the office in the workshop are to be fitted on the inside
with window cills made of chipboard (pressed) with a plastic coating. The colour of
the window cills must be similar to RAL 9002 (reference colour: GetaLit
HPL/Duropal W 400).
GI/GO Counter areas
GI/SEL desks (inside) is to be fitted with shelves and counters with a 4 mm thick,
melamine coated chipboard.
A kitchenette, with the following equipment, is to be fitted in the kitchen area
(Refer to master detail):
Refrigerator without freezer compartment
Microwave (integrated into the tall cupboard or wall unit)
Dishwasher (integrated into the tall cupboard for a comfortable operating
height)

Page 62 of 215

27.3

27.4

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Base unit with a stainless steel sink, self-opening rubbish bin


2 base units with drawer, cutlery tray
Please note: Appliances with energy efficiency class A+
GI/GO common rooms are to be fitted with plastic-coated, waterproof, chipboard
screens (alternatively coloured glass) between the urinals.
The external windows of the GI/GO offices are to be fitted on the inside with
window cills made of chipboard (pressed) with a plastic coating. The colour of the
window cills must be similar to RAL 9002 (reference colour: GetaLit HPL / Duropal
W 400).
Administration
The kitchenette in the common room for non-smokers is to be equipped as follows
(Refer to master detail):
Refrigerator without freezer compartment

Microwave (integrated into the tall cupboard or wall unit)

Dishwasher (integrated into the tall cupboard for a comfortable operating


height)
Base unit with stainless steel sink, self-opening rubbish bin

2 base units with drawer, cutlery tray


Please note: Appliances with energy efficiency class A+
Sanitary rooms are to be fitted with plastic coated waterproof chipboard screens
(alternatively coloured glass) between the urinals.
The external windows of the office and common rooms are to be fitted on the
inside with window cills made of chipboard (pressed) with a plastic coating. The
colour of the window cills must be similar to RAL 9002 (reference colour: GetaLit
HPL/Duropal W 400).
Gatehouse
The kitchenette in the common room for non-smokers is to be equipped as
follows:
Refrigerator without freezer compartment

Microwave

Base unit with stainless steel sink, self-opening rubbish bin

1 base unit with drawer, cutlery tray


Please note: Appliances with energy efficiency class A+
The external windows of the gatehouse are to be fitted on the inside with window
cills made of chipboard (pressed) with a plastic coating. The colour of the window
cills must be similar to RAL 9002 (reference colour: GetaLit HPL/Duropal W 400).
3.2.28

Drainage system, external areas


The level of the external paved areas externally on the GI and GO side is -1.30 m
in respect of the hall floor. The drainage for the paved areas is executed with a
minimum gradient of 1.5 %, flow direction away from the building to drainage
water channels and/or court yard gullies, or directly to the non-paved external
areas (Refer to Sanitary works). The maximum gradient should not exceed 5 %.

Page 63 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

3.2.29

28.02.2014

External, permanent ways


Paved areas are to be asphalted to be suitable for heavy loads.
Size of lanes as follows:
The lane widths for HGVs are to be 10.00 - 15.00 m

The lane widths for private vehicles (passenger cars) are to be 7.00 m

Approx. 40 HGV and approx. 100 private vehicle, parking spaces are to be
provided.
Driving areas for HGVs and private vehicles and PKW and generally paved areas
which are adjacent to green areas are to be bordered by kerbstones or edging
stones and flush kerbstones. Shaped stones are to be used for corners. If
appropriate, alternating kerbstones and flush kerbstones are to be set for direct
drainage into troughs. Single row paving stones are to be installed in front of
adjoining kerbstones as a division to adjoining free zones.
The building access in the administration area is to be created with an 80 cm wide
and 10 cm high path made from concrete slabs, edged with kerbstones.
A 20 m wide concrete slab has to be installed in front of the loading doors (Finland
and Sweden 35 m) across the entire length of the building.
A concrete slab is to be installed for the container storage area by the container
ramp. Concrete areas are to be finished with a brushed surface and high frost and
de-icing salt resistance.
To avoid the concrete slab from being damaged by the container castors during
the loading and unloading process, steel plates (width approx. 50 cm) must be
set in concrete.
Flush kerbstones are to be provided to separate asphalt and concrete areas
(without gutters).
3.2.30

Landscaping
Necessary green areas are to be planted in sufficient numbers with easy to
maintain, ground covering plants and/or in accordance with provisions.
The planting areas are to be covered with a 10 cm mulch layer after planting has
been completed.
Free areas are to be prepared for grass seeding (e.g. by tilling) in accordance
with landscaping requirements.
If the ground conditions comply with the relevant soak away qualities (Refer to the
soil survey), then it would make sense to provide the required soak away facilities
to avoid having to pay fees for wastewater disposal and water treatment..
If the introduction of rainwater into the public sewer network is subject to a
introduction quantity limit for the connection of the rainwater drainage from the
site, then rainwater retention containers have to be supplied for rain retention.

Page 64 of 215

2.1

2.2

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

3.3

28.02.2014

M&E
3.3.1

General
The configuration of the M&E system has to be orientated towards
maximum functionality and safe operating at minimum installation, as well
as operating and consumption costs.

3.3.2

Heating system

General
The following general requirements apply for the design and dimensions:
Heating system dimensions are to be in accordance with the heating load
calculation:
- Room temperatures are to be in accordance with regulations and/or
technical requirements
Please note: if a heating system with a high radiation ratio is utilised
(underfloor heating), then the heating load calculation for higher rooms (in
general >5 m) may be based on an approx. 1 K lower room air
temperature.
Dimensioning of the refrigeration capacity based on the heat load
If the plot provides for an optional extension of the warehouse building,
then the dimensioning of the system (e.g. boiler, main pipeline) has to take
this into account and provide the required reserve capacity.
Please note: In Agreement with Lidl Int. (Construction Dept.), and in coordination
with the industrial refrigeration system, if the heat generation for the warehouse is
possibly 100 % above the industrial refrigeration system. In this case, there is no
need for connecting energy sources (e.g. gas) as well as for a boiler for the
warehouse heating system.
Connecting energy supplies
Preferably, the connections from the energy utility company for the Distribution
Centre is carried out by the public gas grid (natural gas) in accordance with the
provisions of the public utility company (PUC).
If the energy supply cannot be guaranteed by the public gas grid, an alternative
energy source (e.g. liquid gas) has to be supplied in agreement with the client
(Construction Dept.).
The energy supply for the Distribution Centre is to be as follows:
Energy supply via house connection and/or transmission station, preferably in
front of the heating system room
Separate main meter for the energy source (in addition to main meter for the
energy source for the PUCs) with M-BUS interface for remote meter reading
(automatic reading of consumption data)
Please note: An interface as a pulse output is error-prone and is only to be
used in justified, exceptional cases. Interface requirements are to be
discussed with ICA technology.
If using gas-type energy supplies, then the measured volume
consumption (e.g. m) is to be adjusted to the standard volume
consumption (e.g. Nm at 1013.25 mbar and 0C). It is recommended to
provide an evaluation unit which is appropriate to the gas meter.
Otherwise, the respective conversion factors (e.g. pressure stages
between measuring and consumption) will have to be taken into account
regarding the evaluation in der ICA technology.

Page 65 of 215

2.3

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Underground installation of the utility line from the energy supplier between
the property boundary and the M&E room for the heating system
The following applies if gas is used:
Design the gas connection and the respective pipework network with a large
as possible inlet pressure (e.g. 50-100 mbar)

Heating system, warehouse


Non-refrigerated warehouse areas
The heating system for the warehouse (non-refrigerated areas) is to be as follows:
Central heat generation via 1 fully adequate condensing boiler with:
- Integrated exhaust gas heat exchanger
- Modulating draught burner
- Condensate neutralisation system in accordance with the provision of the
local water management (integration in sewage water pipework and/or
floor drain)
Please note: All heat exchanger parts coming into contact with heating gas
and condensation water must be provided in stainless steel or non-corrosive
alloys.
If the heating load (heat demand) of the warehouse exceeds the possible size
of a fully adequate, condensing boiler, then a series-connected low
temperature boiler (as a peak load boiler) with two-stage draught burner in
has to be installed in addition to the condensing boiler (as large load burner).
The distribution ratio of the heat output from both boilers should then be
approx. 70/30 %.
The boiler has to be provided with safety components such as:
- Safety valve
- Safety temperature limiter
- Pressure limiter (minimum and maximum pressure limiter)
- Low-levels of water protection
- The following applies for multi-boiler system (boiler cascade):
Each boiler with its own separate expansion vessel
The components for heat generation are to be installed in the heating system
room
Exhaust gas from the boiler(s) via the roof

Re-introduction of combustion air via weather protected grilles in the faade or


door
Please note: Combustion air to be introduced via an air duct (with steam
diffusion-tight insulation) directly to the draught burners of the boilers (to
prevent the building services room from cooling down when the boiler is in
operation).
Heat distribution network with:
-

Exclusively 1 heating circuit (for all warehouse control areas)


Please note: The room temperature control for the warehouse control
areas is to be executed decentralised to the consumers (underfloor
heating distributor)
2x pump (100 % redundance) as glandless or glanded with electrical
speed control (required volume flow of 25-100 %) in heating system room
Automatic non-return valve per pump to prevent incorrect circulation
(perhaps integrated in pump)
Central filter (dirt filter) in heating system room

Page 66 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Central system for automatic pressure retention, air venting and gas
venting as well as re-introduction systems in the heating plant room,
comprising:
1. Control unit (hydraulic part and operating unit control)
* Pump
* Motorised ball valve for controlled extraction of system water
* Filter
* Expansion vessel
Please note: It must be possible to connect additional expansion vessels
(e.g. provision for optional expansion of warehouse and/or heating
system)
* Safety valve
* Shut-off valves (ball valves)
* Automatic control/regulation (operating unit control) with a collective
error-messaging function (e.g. pump, run time exceeded, re-introduction)
Please note: The system is to be integrated in the hot water, main
distribution line (in return pipework on the pump suction side)
2. Re-introduction and/or topping up (direct connection of the heating
system to the potable water supply)
* System separator (protection against re-introduction into the potable
water supply) with integrated filter (alternatively with separate filter)
* Compact water softener (ion exchange principle) with replaceable resin
cartridges and electronic meter backfeed water for checking the capacity
of the water softener
Please note: The compact water softener is only suitable for reintroduced water (topping up water) due to its limited capacity and flow
capacity.
* Magnetic valve for automatic re-introduction/topping up
Please note: The controlling for the magnetic valve is to be executed via
the controlling/regulating of the control unit (operating unit control)
Installation of hot water pipes (main distribution pipework) is to be
executed as a visible system under the roof and/or on the wall
Installation of hot water pipes (connecting pipes) is to be executed as a
visible system on the wall and/or columns to the consumer (underfloor
heating distributor system)
Integration of 1-2 heat exchangers for heat recovery from the refrigeration
system in the return heating circuit (as series connection in front of boiler)
with shut-off valves and additional lockable bypass above the heat
exchanger
Please note: The heat exchangers for heat recovery are to be supplied by
the Contractor for the refrigeration system. A maximum pressure loss
(heating water) will be approx. 500 mbar for a heating water volume flow
of 70 m/h
Heat volume meter for the heat exchanger for heat recovery with M-BUS
Interface for remote meter reading (automatic reading of consumption
data)
Please note: An interface as a pulse output is error-prone and is only to
be used in justified exceptional cases. Interface requirements to be
discussed with ICA technology.
Shut-off valves, regulating valves and control valves (OPEN/CLOSED) for
every consumer (underfloor heating distributor system)

Page 67 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

In principle, the following warehouse control areas have to be supplied:


- Recycling area
- Non-Food returns (incl. loading station)
- GI 1
- GI 2
- GO 1
- and, where applicable, GI/GO RS Chocolate
- GO 2
- Racking
- And, where applicable, RS/Chocolate
- Rooms for hazardous substances, if applicable
- Block stacking area (incl. Non-Food)

Please note: Optional extension areas for cold rooms (e.g. Non-Food return
between chain conveyor and refrigeration) should either be constructed
without underfloor heating or with a separate (switchable) underfloor heating
system. Underfloor heating must not be installed in any workshop areas (the
flexibility for assembling and/or bolting lifting platforms, industrial trucks must
be retained i.e. drilling depths for bolting and anchoring purposes).
If RS/Chocolate and GI/GO RS/Chocolate areas exist, then these must be
provided as separate control areas in cases where there is a productspecific set point requirement for the room temperature when in heating
mode.
In heating mode, the set point requirement for the room temperature for the
RS/Chocolate and GI/GO RS/Chocolate areas is normally the same as that of
other non-refrigerated and heated warehouse areas. In this case, the rapid roll
doors to the non-refrigerated and heated warehouse areas are to be
permanently open and the cooling function of the refrigeration plant for the
RS/Chocolate and GI/GO RS/Chocolate areas is to be locked.
An alternative set point value requirement is specially provided for heating the
individual floor slabs in the non-cooled and heated warehouse areas for a
room temperature of up to 21C. To avoid a critical room temperature for the
RS/Chocolate and GI/GO RS/Chocolate areas, the alternative set point value
requirement for the room temperature is not to be provided for these areas
(separate control zone).
Heating surface as an industrial underfloor heating system with:
- Arranging the heating circuits for the underfloor heating system in
accordance with the concreting sections sub-divisions in the floor slab.
Please note: The arrangement of the heating circuits must, depending on
the concreting procedure, be project-specifically coordinated with the
flooring contractors
Cladding sheaves (approx. 1m long) are to be utilised for crossing joint
profiles in the floor slab (coordination with Construction works is
necessary)
- Installation of heating circuits for the underfloor heating system with
variable installation gaps in accordance with the required heat output (heat
flux density)
Please note: Arranging the heating circuits for a uniform flow temperature
(as no admix-circuit for individual control areas is available) in accordance
with the required heat flux density.
- Installing the heating circuits preferably in a multiple, meandering pattern
Please note: In exceptional cases, the installation may be in single,
meandering pattern in certain areas (e.g. the requirement to execute the
steel fibre concrete as a laser-screed procedure).

Page 68 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Install the underfloor heating system on a separating foil (directly on the


load-bearing, base layer and/or planum) on steel grid matting.
Please note: The separating foil may not be destroyed or perforated
during the installation. Steel grid matting is to be supplied by Construction
works (delivered). The distance between the pipes for the industrial
underfloor heating may not exceed 1 m (prevent the pipes from floating
towards the surface when pouring in concrete).
If steel fibre concrete is to be utilised, then an alternative, industrial
underfloor heating system may be installed with mounting bars (glued on
separating foil). The installation depth must be in accordance with the
structural calculations (pipe crown at a minimum of 180 mm below upper
edge of the floor slab and/or in accordance with structural calculations).
The underfloor heating system is to be installed in sections, normally 1 day
prior to concreting the respective section.
Heat insulation underneath the floor slab is not normally required for an
industrial underfloor heating system.
In case of high groundwater levels (in general <3 m to UE FF), insulation
across the whole area of the underfloor heating system may be required.
- Position the distribution unit for the underfloor heating system close to the
respective control areas on solid walls and/or columns (outside the
storage areas)
- Distributor for the underfloor heating system with a shut-off and control
valve for each heating circuit for the underfloor heating incl. distribution
box (lockable)
Independent control/regulating for the boiler with:
-

Complete safety chain


Pre-flow temperature control (burner capacity) in accordance with external
requirement including pre-flow temperature sensor
- The following applies for utilising low temperature boilers in a boiler
cascade:
automatic return flow temperature increase incl. temperature sensor
- Emergency stop for the boiler at the entrance to the heating system room
(externally)
Please note: The controlling for the complete heating system in connection
with heat recovery from the refrigeration system is to be executed via ICA
technology, which determines boiler and pump output (speed control)
depending on:
- External temperature (e.g. for activating the heating mode, External
temperature-dependent flow temperature control)
- Room and floor temperature
- Heating circuit flow and return temperature
- Capacity of the heat from the refrigeration generation
The heating system is to be controlled in accordance with the available
condensation heat, depending on the external and room temperature (Refer to
ICA works).
Control settings (extract) - (Refer to ICA works)
- Activation of the proportional pressure control for the main pump heat
distribution network and setting the characteristic curve in accordance
with the calculation (difference pressure), if independent controlling (no
activation via ICA technology)
-

Page 69 of 215

2.4

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

The following requirements will apply for the design and dimensioning:
Heating load calculation for non-refrigerated warehouse areas with air change
by infiltration via the sectional doors (guidelines: 0.30-times the room air
change/hr)
Design of the boiler output without considering the heat recovery from the
refrigeration system (but: in operation, utilise the heat quantity from heat
recovery from the refrigeration system)
Design the heat distribution network and heating surface for as large as
possible expansion (Flow/Return) at the minimum return temperature
(guidelines: 50/30C, better 45/25C in design case)
Pressure loss in the heating circuit of the underfloor heating system (incl.
distributor) maximum 350 mbar
Technical and/or M&E rooms, warehouse
All technical and/or M&E rooms are to be heated/kept frost free (5C) via electric
radiators with independent temperature control (thermostat).
Please note: The constantly changing, interior heat gains (e.g. block heating
system Emergency Power Assist System, heat loss switchgear) as well as heat
loads via air change (e.g. combustion air supply, heating system warehouse) must
be taken into account.
WCs Recycling area
The WCs of the recycling areas are to be heated via electric radiators with
independent temperature control (thermostat).
Refrigerated warehouse areas
The refrigerated warehouse areas, in particular GI/GO Fruit+Veg, Chiller Buffer,
GI/GO Freezer are to be heated via the heating function of the refrigeration
system (Refer to Refrigeration contractor). The results of the heating load
calculation for the refrigerated warehouse areas have to be submitted to the
client, the specialist planner or the company in charge of the refrigeration system.
Ceiling cavity, warehouse
The ceiling cavities above the cold rooms are to be heated/kept frost free (5C) by
an air circulating system (Refer to Ventilation System works).
Frost protection heating in freezer rooms (preferred option)
The floor beneath the freezer rooms (freezer and SEL freezer) is to be heated to
avoid freezing by utilising a frost protection heating system.
The frost protection heating system is preferably to be as a warm glycol floor
heating system. In some justified exceptions, the frost protection heating system
can alternatively be provided using electrical heating rods or electrical heating
mats. In this case, the installation is carried out by the electrical contractor (Refer
to Electrical works).
Please note: The frost protection heating system must be coordinated with the
contractor for the construction works.
For optional expansion of the warehouse area for refrigeration, the floor
slab in the cold hall should be installed in the same way as the floor slab for
freezer rooms (Refer to Floor slab for freezer rooms).
Consequently, the frost protection heating system (laying of pipelines for
floor heating) must be prepared accordingly.

Page 70 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Preferably, the frost protection heating system is to be provided as follows:


Installation of the frost protection heating system as a floor heating system
with a food-safe, antifreeze agent as the heating medium (e.g. water with
propylene glycol)
Please note: The utilisation of Temper as an antifreeze agent is not
permitted due to negative practical experience (leaks and corrosion)!
Heat generated via the heat recovery from the refrigeration plant
Please note: Carry out coordination with the client and/or Refrigeration
contractor
Heat distribution network with:
- Only 1 heating circuit (for all control zones of the frost protection heating)
- 2x pumps (100% redundancy) with electronic speed regulation (required
volume flow of 25-100%) in heating or refrigeration plant room
- Automatic check valve for each pump to avoid circulation problems (possibly
integrated in the pump)
- Central filter (dirt filter) in the heating or refrigeration plant room
- Central expansion vessel in the heating or refrigeration plant room
- Laying of hot water pipes (distribution pipes) so that they are visible under the
roof and/or in the ceiling void and on the wall
- Integration of 1 heat exchanger for the heat recovery from the refrigeration
plant into the return flow from the heating circuit with shut-off valves and an
additional, closable bypass valve that can be shut off via the heat exchanger
Please note: The heat exchanger for the heat recovery is to be supplied by
the contractor for the refrigeration plant. The maximum loss of pressure (hot
water side) is approx. 250 mbar at a hot water volume flow of approx. 5 m/h
- Shut-off valves, regulation valves and control valves (OPEN/CLOSE) for every
consumer (floor heating distributor)
In principle, the following control zones should be provided for the frost
protection heating system:
- Freezer
- SEL freezer (possibly together with freezer)
- Optional expansion for the freezer rooms in the cold hall area
Heating surface in the form of an industrial floor heating system with:
- Laying the heating circuits in a multiple, meandering pattern
- Laying of the respective floor heating circuits with variable, installation
spacings
Please note: Arrange the layout of the heating circuits so that they ensure a
uniform flow temperature (there is not an admix switch for individual control
zones) according to the required heat flux density.
- Install the floor heating on a separating foil (directly on the load-bearing layer
and/or planum) on top of a steel grid mat below and/or within the lower floor
slab for the freezer rooms
Please note: During the installation works, the separating foil must not be
destroyed or penetrated. The steel grid mat is to be provided (delivered) by
the Construction contractor. The fasteners for the industrial floor heating
and/or the tying distance must not exceed 1 m (to prevent the pipes from
floating up towards the surface when the concrete is being poured).
- Arrange the distributor for the floor heating on the faade, solid walls and/or
columns near the respective control zones (e.g. recess in chain convey pit for
freezer and SEL freezer control zones, cold hall faade for control zone for
optional expansion for the freezer rooms in the cold hall area)
- Distributors for the floor heating are to be equipped with shut-off and
regulation valves for each floor heating circuit including (lockable) distributor
box

Page 71 of 215

2.5

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Control/regulation via ICA technology (Refer to ICA works) with:


ON/OFF switching and/or automatic activation/deactivation for the pump via
temperature sensor in at least one control zone (OR circuit)
OPEN/CLOSE switching of the control valve for the floor heating distributor
via a temperature sensor for the assigned, control zone
Control settings (excerpt) (Refer to ICA works):
- Activation of the proportional pressure regulation for the pumps in the heat
distribution network and setting of the characteristic line according to the
calculation (differential pressure), if there is an independent, automatic control
(no control using ICA technology)
- Automatic ON/OFF switching and/or activation/deactivation of the pump at a
ground temperature of 4 C switching hysteresis (e.g. 1 K) in at least one
control zone (OR circuit)
- OPEN/CLOSE switching of the control valve for the distributor for the floor
heating at a ground temperature of 4 C switching hysteresis (e.g. 1 K) in
the assigned control zone
The following requirements apply for the layout and dimensioning:
Heating capacity according to the specific calculation, however to a minimum of
approx. 10 W/m (taking into consideration the arrangement for an air
temperature in the freezer rooms of -28C)
Arranging the heat distribution network and heating surface in such a way as to
ensure an optimum distribution of the heat (Flow volume/Return volume) with a
minimum return temperature (e.g. 25/10C on a design basis)
Pressure loss in the heating circuit for the floor heating (including distributor),
maximum 300 mbar
Arranging the concentration of materials or antifreeze mixtures for the minimum,
expected temperatures, with consideration for the manufacturers
recommendations as well as guaranteeing the corrosion protection
Heating system, GI counter area
GI counter and GI offices
GI counter and GI offices are to be heated and cooled via a partial air conditioning
system with a cooling and heating function.
Please note: The hot water processing is executed as a decentralised, electric
system via a floor standing, hot water tank (Refer to Sanitary works).
The partial air conditioning system is to be provided as an electrical, motor-driven
flexi split air conditioning system for connecting up to 4 circuits for alternative
operation (two-pipe system). Alternatively, mono split air conditioners may be
provided for individual office areas.
Condensing unit (external unit) on the roof of the GI offices with:
-Refrigerant e.g. R410A
-Frequency controlled compressor
-Condensate and/or condensation catchment basins
Please note: The condensate and/or condensation water has to be
transferred from the roof (e.g. via condensate and condensation water
pipework)
Vaporisers (internal units) as a cassette model with a 4-sided air outlet
Please note: To increase the comfort levels (e.g. reducing sound level, better
air distribution through higher air flow), the dimensions for the vaporiser
(internal units) should preferably be approx. 840x840 mm instead of approx.
600x600 mm.

Page 72 of 215

2.6

2.7

2.8

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Cooling distribution network(s) with:


Installation of refrigerant pipework in the ceiling cavity up to a central point
(installation shaft) and up to the above of the ceiling, GI offices
Installation of condensation pipework in the ceiling cavity up to a central
point (installation shaft) and integration into the sewage pipe with an
odour trap (Refer to Sanitary works)
Independent control/regulating with:
Preferably, cable remote control (alternatively infrared remote control) for
individual room regulating next to the entrance door with the following
functions: ON/OFF, selecting the operating mode (heating/cooling), setting
the set point room temperature, setting the ventilator speed, setting the
airflow direction
ON/OFF for the split air conditioning system, automatically via an
integrated temperature sensor in the cable remote control and/or in
vaporisers (internal unit)
Please note: Connecting the split air conditioning system to the central
control point for all the split air conditioners (Refer to Heating system for
Administration)
The regulating settings are to be freely adjustable (by user)

The following requirements apply for the design and dimensioning:


Heating and cooling capacity in accordance with the heating and cooling load
calculation
Alternative: If the GI counter and GI offices do not require cooling, the offices will
be heated via electric radiators with an independent temperature control
(thermostat).
WCs/Showers
WCs and showers of GI common rooms will be heated via electric radiators with
an independent temperature control (thermostat).
Heating system, GO counter area
The requirements are to be analog with the heating system of the GI counter area
.
Heating system in the workshop office
The office in the workshop is to be heated and cooled via a partial air conditioning
system with a cooling and heat function.
The same requirements as those for the heating system of the GI desk area will
apply.
Heating system, Administration
Offices
All the Administration offices are to be heated/cooled via a partial air conditioning
system with a cooling and heating function in simultaneous and/or parallel
operation.
Please note: The hot water processing is executed as a decentralised, electric
system via a floor standing, hot water tank (Refer to Sanitary works).
The partial air conditioning system is to be provided as an electrical, motor-driven,
multi split air conditioner for simultaneous and/or parallel operation (3-pipe
system) as follows:
Condensing unit (external unit) as a modular construction on the roof of
Administration with:
Page 73 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

A minimum of 2 modules, each with an inverter function (speed control for


compressor) and heat recovery
Please note: Guaranteeing automatic controlled running sequence and
alternating defrosting (interruption-free heating mode)
Integrated heat store (for defrosting)
Heating function to a minimum external temperature (e.g. -20 C) with
proof from the manufacturer
Refrigerant e.g. R410A
Heatable condensate and/or condensation water, catchment basins
(activation when required)
Please note: The condensate and/or condensation water must be
transferred from the roof (e.g. via heated condensate and condensation
water pipework), to prevent ice from forming, especially on roof structures
made from trapezoidal sheet metal (structural requirements).
A vestibule and/or wind protection (when wind protection is not provided
on site)
Functionality for the automatic refrigerant filling and leakage test (if
supplyable by system supplier)
Vaporisers (internal units) as a cassette model with a 4-sided air outlet
-

Please note: To increase the comfort levels (e.g. reducing sound level, better
air distribution through higher air flow), the dimensions for the vaporiser
(internal units) should preferably be approx. 840x840 mm instead of approx.
600x600 mm.
Switches for the cooling and heating functions for each vaporiser (internal
units) including control board
Please note: To increase the comfort level (e.g. reducing switching noises),
the switching units should be installed in the ceiling cavity of the hallway or in
the adjacent rooms.
Cooling network(s) with:
Installing the refrigerant pipes in the ceiling cavity up to a central point
(installation shaft) and up to above the roof in Administration
Installing the condensate pipes in the ceiling cavity up to a central point
(installation shaft) and integration into the sewage pipe with an odour trap
(Refer to Sanitary works)
Independent control with:
-

A cable remote control for the individual room control next to the entrance
door with the following functions: ON/OFF, operation mode selection
(heating/cooling), setting the set point for the room temperature, setting
the ventilator speed, setting the airflow direction
ON/OFF switch for the split air conditioning system, automatically via an
integrated temperature sensor in the cable remote control and/or in
vaporisers (internal unit)
OFF switch and/or deactivating (locking) internal units when office
windows are opened
---> Connecting the magnetic contact on the office windows to the internal
unit
( magnetic contact to be supplied by Construction works)
Please note: A central control point (control system for the computer-aided
monitoring and control) is to be provided in the workshop area for all the split
air conditioners of the Distribution Centre.
Regulating settings for the central control point (control system) with:
Activation function for optimising the heating system (prevent overheating
of system)
-

Page 74 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

---> Setting and activation for the temperature sensor in the cable remote
control instead of in the vaporisers (internal unit)
---> Automatic OFF switch for the ventilators, if no heat dIASnd
Automatic setting for the flap angle as follows:
* Vertical air outlet in heating mode
* Horizontal air outlet in cooling mode
Limits for setting the room temperature On the cable remote control by
user as follows:
* Maximum room temperature, 25 C in heating mode
* Minimum room temperature, 20 C in cooling mode
Triggering (activation and/or connection) of the system as follows:
* Time in agreement with the client (operations manager)
* e.g. daily (Mon-Sun) 6-22 hrs, if not otherwise specified
Triggering the manual settings by the user on the cable remote control as
follows:
* ON/OFF switch, internal unit, split air conditioning system
* Switching to heating/cooling mode
* Set point for room temperature (between specified limits)
* Speed for ventilator, vaporisers (internal unit)
* Flap angle (between specified limits)

The following requirements apply for the design and dimensioning:


Dimensioning of the heating and cooling capacity in accordance with the
heating and cooling load calculation
Please note: The heating and cooling capacity of the internal and external
units is to be guaranteed despite the minimum and maximum external
temperature (taking into account the reduction of heat output at low external
temperatures).
A vestibule for the external unit is to be supplied in agreement with Construction
works (scope of delivery by Construction works).
The vestibule should be positioned in such a way that all external units in this
area are protected (e.g. external units, precision air conditioner in the IT server
room).
WCs/Showers/Adjacent rooms
WCs, showers and adjacent rooms of the Administration building are to be heated
by electric radiators with an independent temperature control (thermostat).
An alternative to the joint heating and cooling system of the Administration
building can be a heating and cooling system via 2 separate heating and
cooling systems.
In this case, all administration offices are also to be cooled via a partial air
conditioning system as an electric, multisplit air conditioner, but only with a cooling
function.
In principal, the requirements are to be applied analog with the aforementioned
multisplit air conditioning system, with cooling and heating function.
Offices and WCs/Showers/Adjacent rooms and water are to be heated by a hot
water heating system as follows:
Central heat generation via 1 condensing boiler with:
Integrated pump with an electric speed control
Integrated exhaust gas heat exchanger
Modulating draught burner
Condensate neutralisation system in accordance with the provisions of
the local water management (integration into the sewage pipe and/or floor
drain)
Page 75 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Installation of heat generation components in Workshop, Warehouse

Exhaust gas from the boiler via the roof

Re-introduction of the combustion air via a twin-pipe, exhaust gas system


(AEG - air/exhaust gas system) for room air independent combustion
Water heating via a floor standing hot water tank with an integrated, smooth
tube, heat exchanger (without additional heating cartridge)
Heat distribution network with:
Compact distributor for 2 heating circuits
(static heating surfaces, water heating)
1 glandless pump with an electric speed control for the heating circuit for
the static heating surfaces
1 glandless pump with a staged, speed control for the heating circuit for
water heating
Automatic non-return valve for each pump to prevent incorrect circulation
(integrated in the pump, if applicable)
Filter (dirt filter) for each heating circuit
Hydraulic separator for decoupling the condensing boiler and heating
circuits
Central expansion vessel
Installation of the hot water pipes (main distribution pipes) in the ceiling
cavity of the ground floor and connection to the central points from below
and/or above to the connecting pipes for the upper floor and/or basement
Installation of hot water pipes (connecting pipes) are to be visible in the
plinth area
Please note: The visible, connecting pipes are to be painted white
Heating surface as a profiled, valve-compact radiator with:
Thermostatic valve
A connection on one side with lockable and drainable threaded bolt with
pre-setting (lockable)
Radiators are to be installed centrally under each window (in offices)
Please note: A steel tubed, ventilating radiator is to be installed in the entry
lobby to the staircase.
The heat convection is to be ensured by providing sufficient distances to the
relevant building parts and/or by convection slits.
Control/regulating the boiler independently with:
Complete safety chain
Regulating 2 heating circuits (including water heating with priority and
legionella control)
Flow temperature regulating (burner capacity), in accordance with the set
heating curve including flow temperature sensor
Please note: The separated heating and cooling systems and/or heating and
cooling function for the relevant rooms is to be lockable (e.g. signal exchange)
Regulating settings

Flow temperature in accordance with the heating curve


Speed for the pump in accordance with the independent regulating
(proportional pressure regulating)

Please note: The gas supply for the gas-condensing boiler is to be executed
exclusively from the gas connection for the warehouse boiler.
The following requirements apply for the design and dimensioning:
Design the heat distribution network and heating zones for maximum
expansion (flow/return) at minimum return flow temperature (e.g. 50/30C)

Page 76 of 215

2.9

2.10

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

If the Administration offices do not require cooling (e.g. Northern Europe), then the
heating for the offices and WCs/Showers/Adjacent rooms and water heating are
to be provided analog with the aforementioned hot water, heating system.
Heating system, Gatehouse
Common room and kitchenette
The common room and kitchenette are to be heated/cooled via a partial air
conditioning system with cooling and heating function.
The requirements for the heating system for the GI counter are analog.; however,
as a monosplit air conditioning system with a condensing unit (external unit) on
the gatehouse roof.
WC
The gatehouse WC is to be heated by electric radiators with an independent
temperature control (thermostat).
Heat distribution network, general
The following general requirements apply for the heat distribution network of the
heating system:
Design the heat distribution network with flow speeds between 0.50 m/s
(connecting pipes) and 1.20 m/s (main pipes)
Please note: The valve authority (share pressure difference, valve to the
pressure difference, entire system) is to be approx. 50%.
Utilisation of circuit regulating valves or alternative connections to the
consumers in accordance with the Tichelmann System (same length for all
connecting pipes), in cases of large difference pressures and/or strongly
fluctuating volume flows in the heat distribution network
Material for hot water pipes:
Steel pipes, black (welded joint) for main pipes
Stainless steel pipes (welded or pressed connection)
Copper (soldered or pressed connection) for exceptions
e.g. small dimensions - up to DN 15)
Plastic (high pressure cross-linked Polyethylene - PE-X pipe) oxygen-tight
and/or diffusion-tight for the underfloor heating system
Please note: Pipelines for floor and/or frost protection heating
systems must be installed as continuous pipes, without joints (e.g.
extension, sub-distribution) within the floor slab.
Material insulation, heat distribution network:
The following applies for areas with fire protection requirements:
Fire rating class A (non-flammable) such as e.g. mineral wool, cellular
glass (foam glass)
The following applies for areas without fire protection requirements
(admissible):
Fire rating class B (flame retardant) such as e.g. vinyl rubber,
Polyurethane hard foam
The insulation is to be provided with the following jacket:
Without jacket in the case of closed cell foam
Aluminium foil for concealed installation (e.g. in ceiling cavity, in shaft)
Plastic jacket (PVC) or coarse aluminium grain for exposed distribution
pipes
Insulation tubes (tear proof) for plastered-in installations
Sheet-metal jacket (removable) for exposed installations (weather
protection) or for installation in areas prone to mechanical damage

Page 77 of 215

2.11

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Insulation thickness for the heat distribution network (hot water pipes including
fittings) in accordance with regulations and/or technical requirements
Please note: All heat distribution pipework and hot water pipes including
fittings, whose heat losses do not directly benefit areas to be heated (e.g.
installation under warehouse roof, ceiling cavities), are to be fitted with
insulation (minimum 50% of pipe )
Heat distribution network with a minimum of:
Safety fittings
Lock fittings
Regulating fittings
Drain-off fittings
Filling fittings
Thermometer for flow and return
Manometer for flow and return
Heat distribution network with a ventilation system (e.g. air chamber,
ventilation system valve, ventilation pipe with a ballcock).
Please note: The ventilation pipes are to be installed up to operating level.
Automatic ventilators are not to be used, due to risk of leaks.
Expansion compensation

Please note: If possible, The expansion compensation for pipework should be


executed, where possible, by introducing directional changes in the pipework
and installing expansion loops (fixed points near bends). Axial compensators
are only to be installed in exceptional cases. They have to be exactly
dimensioned, easily accessible and quickly replaceable.
Filling and topping up, heating water (type and quantity) are dependent on the
model of heat generator used and the system specification
Please note: The heat distribution networks must be flushed completely
before being commissioned. Treated or softened water must be used for the
initial filling - normally the total hardness should be a maximum of . 0.11dH
(alkaline earth ions: 0.02 mmol/l) for a heating capacity greater than 500kW).

Condensing units and cooling network, general


The following general requirements apply for condensing units and the cooling
network of air conditioning and partial air conditioning systems (split air
conditioners):
Material refrigerant pipes:

Copper (solder joint - hard)


Material condensation pipes:
Copper (soldered or pressed connection)
Stainless steel pipes (welded or pressed connection)
Plastic (push-fit or plastic, welded joint)
Material insulation, cooling distribution network:
-

The following applies for areas with fire protection requirements:


Fire rating class A (non-flammable) such as foam glass
The following applies for areas without fire protection requirements
(admissible):
Fire rating class B (flame retardant) such as vinyl rubber, Polyurethane
hard foam

The condensation pipes in the ceiling cavity of the Office areas


(Administration, GI/GO counter areas) have to be insulated.

Page 78 of 215

3.1

3.2

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Insulation to be fitted with the following jacket:


Without jacket in the case of closed cell foam
Aluminium foil for concealed installation (e.g. in ceiling cavity, in shaft)
Plastic jacket (PVC) or coarse aluminium grain for exposed distribution
pipes
Insulation tubes (tear proof) for plastered-in installations
Sheet-metal jacket (removable) for exposed installations (weather
protection) or for installation in areas prone to mechanical damage
Insulation thickness for cooling distribution network (refrigerant pipes
including fittings) in accordance with regulations and/or technical
requirements
3.3.3

Ventilation system

General
The Administration offices, GI/SEL desks, GI/GO offices and doorhouse are to be
cooled via partial air conditioning systems with a cooling and heating function.
Due to the heating function being the main function, the partial air conditioning
systems are described in Heating Systems works (Refer to Heating Systems
works).
The requirements for the automatic ventilation systems and the dimensioning of
the air volume are to be determined in accordance with the regulations and/or
technical requirements.
In general, the following automatic ventilation systems are necessary.
Ventilation system, ceiling cavity, warehouse
The ceiling cavity above the cold rooms is to be ventilated and vented by an air
circulating system for heating and frost prevention (5C) as well as for
dehumidification.
Please note: If the freezer rooms (freezer and SEL freezer) are constructed as
separate fire sections, then they have to be fitted with separate air circulating
systems.
In heating mode (winter), air recirculation takes place between the heated
warehouse areas. In this case, the warm room air from the air circulating system,
that has accumulated under the roof of the heated warehouse areas, is drawn in
and transferred to the ceiling cavity. Once the heat has dissipated from the
circulating air in the ceiling cavity, it then flows back freely into the heated
warehouse areas where it is indirectly heated by the warehouse heating system.
In dehumidification mode (mainly in summer), air recirculation only takes place via
the ceiling cavity, In this case, the moist room air is drawn in by the air circulating
system in the ceiling cavity, dehumidified, and then transferred directly back into
the ceiling cavity. The room air is dehumidified by cooling in a cooling coil in the
air circulating system.
Cold production for the cooling and/or dehumidification of room air as well as the
connection of the cooling coil is to be carried out by the Refrigeration contractor
(industrial refrigeration for cold rooms).

Page 79 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

The air circulating system is to be provided as follows:


Compact unit or combination of individual components consisting of:
Ventilator with motor for single-stage ventilator speed (constant output)
Filter element (to protect the cooling coil)
Cooling coil for coolant, including droplet separator and drainage of
condensate
Please note: The cooling coil is to be connected by the Refrigeration
contractor (industrial refrigeration for cold rooms).
---> Coordination with the Refrigeration contractor
The cooling coil should preferably be installed in the flow direction in front
of the ventilator so that, during the dehumidification mode, once the
circulating air has cooled, a proportional amount of circulating air can be
heated by the thermal equivalent of the ventilator.
A mixing chamber with duct connecting elements and motor-powered
shut-off flap and/or multileaf damper (circulating air from the heated
warehouse area as well as the circulating air from the ceiling cavity)
Compact units must be fitted with additional inspection and/or maintenance
openings (doors)
Air is drawn in as follows:
1. Heating mode
Air suction from adjoining heated warehouse area (e.g. racking or
RS/Chocolate) via an intake grille (mesh grid)
Please note: If required (e.g. F90 wall openings) fire protection dampers with
protection grids (mesh grid) and spring return drives and smoke detector
systems are to be installed
2. Dehumidification mode
Air suction from the ceiling cavity via an intake louvre (mesh grid)
Outflow of the supplied circulating air as follows:
1. Heating mode
Circulating air flows out freely (without ventilator) into the heated warehouse
area (e.g. Non-Food returns, loading station) via an overflow grille (mesh grid)
using motor-powered shut-off flaps and/or multileaf dampers
Please note: fire protection dampers with protection grids (mesh grid) and
spring return drives and smoke detector systems are to be installed
2. Dehumidification mode
No separate outflow into other areas (only circulating air within the ceiling
cavity)
Air distribution network with:
-

Installation of air pipework in the ceiling cavity


Silencer (suction side between the ventilator and intake louvre to heated
warehouse areas)
Supply air vents (e.g. jet nozzles, grille)
Please note: Air flow is to be ensured especially in critical areas (e.g. cold
corners, wall recesses).
If the heating of the ceiling cavity via tempered circulating air from the
warehouse area cannot be guaranteed, then a heating coil has to be supplied
additionally in the air distribution network or the compact unit.
-

Page 80 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Control/regulating via ICA technology (Refer to ICA works) as follows:


ON/OFF switch air circulating system (ventilator) automatically via
temperature and humidity sensors in the ceiling cavity of the warehouse
and wall recesses (in case of 2-skinned, cold room walls)
Automatic OPEN/CLOSE switching or changeover for the shutters for
circulating air in the heating mode or dehumidification mode via
temperature and moisture sensors in the ceiling cavity of the warehouse
and wall recesses (in case of 2-skinned cold room walls)
Automatic OPEN/CLOSE switching of the control valve for the cooling coil
via temperature and moisture sensors in the ceiling cavity of the
warehouse and wall recesses (in case of 2-skinned cold room walls)
Please note: It is not necessary to regulate the supply of air temperature
(only dehumidification)
Filter monitoring (monitoring of differential pressure)
Control settings (extract) - (Refer to ICA works) with:
ON/OFF switching of air circulating system (ventilator) if the respective
temperature of the ceiling cavity in the warehouse falls below the limit
value (5C) and/or if the respective surface temperature of the panelled
ceilings and/or panelled walls in the ceiling cavity of the warehouse falls
below the limit value (depending on current dew point temperature)
respective switching hysteresis (e.g. 1 K)
OPEN/CLOSE switching or changeover for the shutters for the circulating
air in heating mode, if the respective temperature of the ceiling cavity of
the warehouse falls below the limit value (5C) switching hysteresis (e.g.
1 K)
OPEN/CLOSE switching or changeover for the shutters for the circulating
air in dehumidification mode, if the respective surface temperature of the
panelled ceilings and/or panelled walls in the ceiling cavity of the
warehouse falls below the limit value (depending on current dew point
temperature) respective switching hysteresis (e.g. 1 K)
OPEN/CLOSE switching of control valve of the cooling coil if the
respective surface temperature of the panelled ceilings and/or panelled
walls in the ceiling cavity of the warehouse falls below the limit value
(depending on current dew point temperature) respective switching
hysteresis (e.g. 1 K)
Please note: The dew point temperature is to be calculated for each control
zone using the temperature and relative humidity recorded in these control
zones.
The following requirements apply for the design and dimensioning:
Dimensioning the air flow in accordance with the heating load for the ceiling
cavity and temperature for the circulating air, however at least 0.5 times the
room air change per hour)
Reference value for transmission power of the cooling coil is approx. 40 kW
when:
The room air temperature (primary side of heat exchanger) is 20C
The coolant has an inlet/outlet temperature (secondary side of heat
exchanger) of 4/8C
Please note: Propylene glycol (35%) is normally used as a coolant.
If two separate air circulating systems (ceiling cavity general, and ceiling
cavity freezer) are in use, then the transmission power is to be divided
accordingly (e.g. 1x 30 kW and 1x 10 kW).
Water-side pressure loss in the cooing coil of maximum 500 mbar when the
coolant total volume flow is approx. 10 m/h

Page 81 of 215

3.3

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Flow speed (circulating air) may not exceed 1.5 m/s at any sprinkler in
ceiling cavity

Ventilation system, WCs/Showers/Adjacent rooms, Administration (ground floor)


WCs/Showers/Adjacent rooms (smoking room, cleaning agent room, dry
chambers of changing rooms) on the ground floor of Administration (common
rooms) are to be ventilated for removing humidity and avoiding odour by a central
exhaust air system. Changing rooms are to be ventilated by natural air change
(windows).
Please note: The drying chambers in changing rooms (scope of services client)
are to be fitted with an integrated ventilator. Each drying cabinet generates a
circulating air flow of approx. 200 m/h. The exhaust air flows from the drying
chambers are to be limited to a sensible measure (e.g. 60 m/h).
Exhaust air system as follows:
Roof radial ventilator on the Administration roof with:
Motor for single-stage ventilator speed (constant output)
Ventilator base with an integrated silencer
Automatic check valve
Air distribution network with:
-

Installation of air pipes in the ceiling cavity up to a central point


(installation shaft) and above the roof
Exhaust air collection in the suspended ceiling via air vents with air
volume control (e.g. poppet valves)
Re-introduction of secondary air (small air flows) via cut-outs in the
bottom of the door section and/or in case of increased air flow (e.g. >100
m/h) via door grille
Please note: Re-introduction of secondary air (large air flows) via air
pipes from the adjoining warehouse area.
If required, a duct and/or pipe ventilator in connection with a filter on the
suction side may be installed for the secondary air back flow.
The secondary air is led via spinning, 4-sided air vents in the
suspended ceiling up to shower anterooms, smoking room.
Silencer (e.g. telephone silencer) between various usage areas (e.g.
mens and womens showers)

Please note: If required (e.g. F90 wall openings), fire protection dampers with
warehouse limit switches are to be installed.
Control via ICA technology (Refer to ICA works) with:
ON/OFF switch for the exhaust air system (ventilator), automatically via a
timer
Control settings (extract) - (Refer to ICA works) with:
Operating time for the exhaust air system (ventilator) in agreement with
operations (e.g. 6-22 hrs)
Please note: In case of a central exhaust air system, the operating time
should be a minimum of 12 h/d

The following guidelines apply for the design and dimensioning:


8-10-fold room air change per hour for wash and shower rooms

5-fold room air change per hour for WCs and smoking rooms

Air flow, 30-60 m/h for adjacent rooms

Page 82 of 215

3.4

3.5

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Ventilation system WCs/Kitchenettes Administration (ground and first floor)


WCs/Kitchenettes/Adjacent rooms on the ground and first floor of Administration
(office areas) are to be ventilated for removing humidity and avoiding odour by a
central exhaust air system.
The copying room on the ground floor of Administration is to be preferably also
ventilated by this central exhaust air system to remove dust.
Supply and exhaust air have to be supplied if, in accordance with regulations
and/or calculations, a large volume flow and/or a separate ventilation system
(removal of dust) should be required for the copying room. In this case, the
requirements are to be analog with the ventilation system for WE counter and WE
offices applies.
Exhaust air system is to be provided as follows:
Roof radial ventilator on the Administration roof with:

Motor for single-stage ventilator speed (constant output)


Ventilator base with an integrated silencer
Automatic check valve
Air distribution network with:
Installation air pipes in the ceiling cavity up to a central point (installation
shaft) and above the roof
Exhaust air collection in the suspended ceiling via poppet valves with air
volume control
Re-introduction, secondary air (small air flows) via cut-outs in the bottom
of the door section and/or in case of increased air flows (e.g. >100 m/h)
via a door grille
Silencer (e.g. telephone silencer) between various usage areas (e.g.
mens and womens WCs)
Please note: If required (e.g. F90 wall openings), fire protection dampers with
warehouse limit switches are to be installed
Control via ICA technology (Refer to ICA works) with:
ON/OFF switch exhaust air system (ventilator), automatically via a timer
Control settings (extract) - (Refer to ICA works) with:
Operating time for the exhaust air system (ventilator) in agreement with
operation (e.g. 6-22 hrs)
Please note: In case of a central exhaust air system, the operating time
should be a minimum of 12 h/d

The following guidelines apply for the design and dimensioning:


5-fold room air change per hour for WCs

Air flow, 30-60 m/h for adjacent rooms

Dimensioning air flow for copying room in accordance with regulation

Ventilation system WE counter and WE offices


To ensure the supply of fresh air, the WE counter and WE offices are to be
ventilated by a central exhaust air system.

Page 83 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Supply and exhaust air system as to be provided as follows:


Compact aggredoor consisting of:
Ventilators with:
* Motor for single-stage ventilator speed (constant output)
Please note: If a variable change of output is required, then a frequency
converter may be installed.
Filter elements (external and exhaust air)
Diagonal plate heat exchanger with a bypass and condensation
catchment basin
Electric heater with flow monitor
Please note: If required (e.g. cooling supply air) heating and cooling of
supply air alternatively via a separate monosplit air conditioning system
with vaporisers and condensation catchment basin and droplet separator.
Associated condensing unit as follows:
* Installation on the roof of WE offices
* Refrigerant e.g. R410A
* Frequency controlled compressor
* Condensate and/or condensation catchment basins
Please note: Condensation is to be transferred from the ceiling (e.g. via
condensate and drip water pipes)
Inspection openings (doors)
Sewer connection elements and power-operated shut-off damper and/or
mutli-leaf dampers (outside and exhaust air)
Installation of a compact aggredoor, preferably on the roof of the top floor, WE
office, alternatively in the ceiling cavity
Air suction and/or air outlet externally and/or exhaust air preferably via a
weather protection grille in the faade, alternatively via a roof hood
Air distribution network with:
-

Installation of the air pipes in the ceiling cavity


Silencer (between ventilators and air vents)
Air vents with air volume control (e.g. poppet valves) in suspended ceiling

Please note: If required (e.g. F90 wall openings), fire protection dampers with
warehouse limit switches
Control via ICA technology (Refer to ICA works) with:
- ON/OFF switch supply and exhaust air system (ventilators) and shut-off
flap and/or multileaf dampers, automatically via a timer
- Control supply air temperature is to be constant (separated in heating +
cooling)
- Optional: Filter monitor (monitoring differences of pressure)
Control settings (extract) - (Refer to ICA works) with:
-

Operating time supply and exhaust air system (ventilators), in agreement


with operation (e.g. 6-22 hrs)
Constant supply of air temperature, heating mode (winter) as a minimum
admissible room temperature (e.g. 20 C)
Constant supply of air temperature, cooling mode (summer) as a
maximum, admissible room temperature (e.g. 26 C)
Please note: The room temperature is to be controlled by separate
heating and cooling systems (e.g. radiator or split air conditioners).
Optional: differential pressure filter in accordance with filter class (e.g. 200
Pa)

The following guidelines apply for the design and dimensioning:

Page 84 of 215

3.6

3.7

3.8

3.9

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Dimensioning of the air flow in accordance with regulations (e.g. DIN EN


13779)

Ventilation system SEL desk and GO offices


To guarantee a fresh air supply, the SEL desk and WA offices have to be
ventilated by a central supply and exhaust air system.
The same requirements apply as those for the ventilation system in the GO desk
area and GO offices.
Ventilation system of workshop office
To guarantee a fresh air supply, the office in the workshop is to be ventilated and
vented by a supply and exhaust air system.
The same requirements apply as those for the ventilation system in the GO desk
area and GO offices.
Ventilation system, Gatehouse
To guarantee a fresh air supply, the common room and doorhouse WC have to be
ventilated by a supply and exhaust air system.
The requirements are to be analog to the ventilation system for the GI counter
and GO offices.
Ventilation system, Offices Administration (if required)
If in accordance with the regulations for guaranteeing a fresh air supply, an
automatic supply and exhaust ventilation system for the Administration offices is
required, then a central supply and exhaust air system has to be supplied.
The supply and exhaust air system is to be provided as follows:
A modular supply and exhaust central unit consisting of:
-free-running ventilator with:
* backward curved, guide blades (due to low module length)
* motor for variable ventilating speed (variable flow rate)
* frequency converter
-filter elements (external and exhaust air) in the form of a pocket filter
-diagonal plate, heat exchanger with a bypass valve and condensate tray
-heating and cooling coils as an evaporator for a separate split airconditioning system
Please note: If, alternatively, a gas boiler is being used, then 1 heating
coil for warm water and 1 cooling coil for direct evaporation are to be
provided.
The associated condensing unit is to be provided as follows:
* installation on the roof of the administration offices, next to the central
unit
* coolant, e.g. R410A
* frequency controlled compressor
* condensate and condensation catchment basins
Please note: The condensate and/or condensation is to be transferred
from the roof (e.g. via condensate and condensation pipework)
- droplet separator
- inspection openings (doors)
- duct connecting elements and motor-powered shut-off flaps and/or
shutters (outside and exhaust air)
installation of the central unit on the roof of the administration offices
air intake and/or air outlet for external and/or exhaust air via an intake and/or
outlet bends or hoods, via the roof in each case

Page 85 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

air distribution network with:


central silencers (fan noise level) for supply and exhaust air as well as, if
required, for external and exhaust air, preferably in the air ducts
- installation of main air ducts (supply and exhaust air) at central point
(installation shaft continuous) through to the ground floor
- installation of distribution air ducts for each floor in the ceiling cavity of the
corridors
- installation of connecting air ducts in the ceiling cavity, directly from the
corridor into the respective rooms
- volume flow controller (adjustable manually) for each air passage and/or
room
- volume flow controller (variable) with actuator for air passages in the large
conference room in the administration offices (first floor)
- silencer (between volume flow controller and air passages)
- air passages with an air volume regulation (e.g. disc valves) in the ceiling
cavity
Please note: Due to the larger air volume flow, the air passages for the large
conference room in the admin offices (first floor) are to be provided in the form
of swirl diffusers or 4-sided air passages for the supply air.
-

Please note: If required (e.g. F90 wall ducts), fire protection dampers with
limiting switches are to be provided (e.g. at shaft entrances and exits)
Control/regulation via ICA technology (Refer to ICA works) with:
- temperature sensor in supply, exhaust and external air
- flow monitor in supply and exhaust air
- pressure sensor for filter monitoring (external and exhaust air)
- automatic ON/OFF switching for supply and exhaust air system (fans) as well
as shut-off flaps and/or shutters via a timer
- automatic speed regulation for supply and exhaust air fans through constant
pressure regulation, dependent on manual request for ventilation in the large
conference room of the administration offices (first floor)
- automatic regulation of volume flow controller for supply and exhaust air
volume flow in the large conference room of the administration offices (first
floor) via a manual request for ventilation in the large conference room (first
floor)
- regulation of the constant supply, air temperature (separately, depending on
whether in heating or cooling mode)
Please note: Constant temperature regulation of the supply air is to be
provided separately, depending on whether in heating or cooling mode. The
separate heating and cooling systems are to be controlled/regulated
independently.
Control settings (excerpt) (Refer to ICA works) with:
operating time of supply and exhaust air system (fans) according to
agreement with Operations (e.g. 6 a.m. to 10 p.m.)
speed of supply and exhaust air fans, corresponding to request for ventilation
in the large conference room in the administration offices (first floor)
setting of volume flow controller for supply and exhaust air volume flow in the
larger conference room of the administration offices (first floor), corresponding
to the request for ventilation in the large conference room in the administration
offices (first floor)
constant supply of air temperature in the heating mode (winter) as a minimum
permissible room temperature (e.g. 20C)
constant supply of air temperature in the cooling mode (summer) as a
maximum permissible room temperature (e.g. 26C)

Page 86 of 215

3.10

3.11

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Please note: The room temperature is to be regulated by the separate


heating and cooling systems (e.g. split air-conditioning system for ventilation
system).
Optional: differential pressure filter according to filter class (e.g. 200 Pa)

The following reference values apply for the layout and dimensions:
Measurement of air volume flow according to regulations (e.g. DIN EN 13779)
Ventilation system WCs/Showers GI common rooms
To remove humidity and to avoid odour, the WCs/Showers of the GI common
rooms have to be ventilated by a central exhaust air system.
Exhaust air system is to be provided as follows:
Roof radial ventilator on the warehouse roof with:
- Motor for single-stage ventilator speed (constant output)
- Ventilator base with an integrated silencer
- Automatic check valve
Air distribution network with:
-

Installation of the air pipework in the ceiling cavity up to a central point


(installation shaft) and above roof
Exhaust air collection in the suspended ceiling via poppet valves with air

volume control
Re-introduction, secondary air (small air flows) via cut-outs in the bottom
of the door section and/or in case of increased air flows (e.g. > 100 m/h)
via a door grille
- Please note: re-introduction if possible from the tempered warehouse
area
(saving thermal energy for WCs/Showers in winter)
- Silencer (e.g. telephone silencer) between the various usage areas (e.g.
-

mens and womens WCs)

Please note: If required (e.g. F90 wall openings), fire protection dampers with
warehouse limiting switches are to be installed
Control via ICA technology (Refer to ICA works) with:
- ON/OFF switch for the exhaust air system (ventilator) automatic via timer
Control settings (extract) - (see ICA works) with:
-

Operating time exhaust air system (ventilator), in agreement with


operation (e.g. 6-22 hrs)
Please note: Operating time for central exhaust air system is to be a
minimum of 12 h/d

The following guidelines apply to design and dimensioning:


8-10-fold room air change per hour for wash and shower rooms

5-fold room air change per hour for WC rooms

Ventilation system, WCs/Showers GO-Common rooms


To remove humidity and avoid odour, the WCs/Showers of the GO common
rooms have to be ventilated by a central exhaust air system.
Requirements are to be analog with the ventilation system for the WCs/Showers
GI common rooms.

Page 87 of 215

3.12

3.13

3.14

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Ventilation system, WCs Recycling area


To remove humidity and avoid odour, the WCs of the recycling area have to be
ventilated by a central exhaust air system.
Requirements are to be analog with the ventilation system for the WCs/Showers
GI common rooms.
Ventilation system, Loading station (if required)
The parking spaces of the central battery recharging area are to be ventilated by
a central exhaust air system to prevent a high concentration of hazardous
substances.
If required (regulation), an exhaust air system is to be provided as follows:
Radial roof ventilator on the Warehouse roof with:

- Motor for single-stage ventilator speed (constant output)


- Ventilator base with an integrated silencer
- Automatic check valve
Air distribution network with:
- installation of air ducts so that they are visible on the walls and ceilings of
the battery recharge area
- exhaust air collection via an intake louvre (mesh grid) or via a round
and/or ducted grille with volume regulation at ground-level at the
respective parking spaces and/or chargers
- exhaust air collection via an intake louvre (mesh grid) or via round and/or
ducted grille with volume regulation under the ceiling and/or roof of the
battery recharge area
- Re-introduction, secondary air from the adjoining warehouse areas via
free cross sections (e.g. door openings)
Control via ICA technology (Refer to ICA works) with:
ON/OFF switch for the exhaust air system (ventilator), automatically via a
timer
Control settings (extract) - (Refer to ICA works) with:
-

Operating time for the exhaust air system (ventilator) in accordance with
regulations and/or connection for charging sockets or conductor rail

The following requirements apply for the design and dimensioning:


Dimensioning of the air flow according to type and number of batteries

Extraction at ground-level for acid batteries

Extraction under ceiling and/or roof for gel batteries

Ventilation system for battery recharge area in Chiller Buffer area


The parking spaces in the battery recharge area of the Chiller Buffer area are to
be ventilated by a central exhaust air system to avoid a high concentration of
hazardous substances.
The exhaust air system is to be provided as follows:
Radial roof ventilator on the roof of warehouse with:
- motor for single-stage ventilator speed (constant flow rate)
- ventilator base with an integrated silencer
- automatic check valve
Air distribution network with:
- installation of air ducts so that they are visible on the walls and ceiling of the
battery recharge area up to a central point (installation shaft) and up through
the roof

Page 88 of 215

3.15

3.16

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Please note: In the area around the ceiling cavity, the air duct is to be
insulated so that it is vapour-tight and condensate cannot form.
- exhaust air collection via intake louvre (mesh grid) or via round and/or ducted
grille with volume regulation at ground-level at the respective parking spaces
and/or chargers
- exhaust air collection via an intake louvre (mesh grid) or via round and/or
ducted grille with volume regulation under the panelled ceiling of the battery
recharge area
- re-introduction of secondary air in the air passages from the adjoining
warehouse areas via free cross-sections (e.g. door openings)
Control/regulation via ICA technology (Refer to ICA works) with:
- automatic ON/OFF switching of the exhaust air system (ventilator) via a timer
Control settings (excerpt) (Refer to ICA works) with:
- operating time of the exhaust air system (ventilator) according to regulations
and/or after connecting the charging socket or the conductor rail system
The following requirements apply for the layout and dimensions:
measurement of air volume flow according to type and number of batteries

extraction at ground-level for acid batteries

extraction under the ceiling and/or roof for gel batteries

Ventilation system, Container ramp/Container storage area


To prevent odour, the container ramp/container storage area are to be ventilated
by an exhaust air system.
Exhaust air system to be provided as follows:
2 Radial roof ventilators for parallel operation on the warehouse roof (via
container ramp) each with:
- Motor for a single-stage ventilator speed (constant output)
- Ventilator base with an integrated silencer
- Automatic check valve
Air distribution network with:

- Exhaust air collection via an intake grille (mesh grid) on the ventilator
- Re-introduction, secondary air via the open faade
Control/regulating via ICA technology (Refer to ICA works)
- ON/OFF switch for the exhaust air system (ventilators), manually via
switches (parallel connection)
- Triggering the exhaust air system (ventilators), automatically via a timer
Control settings (extract) - (Refer to ICA works) with:
- Triggering the exhaust air system (ventilators) in agreement with operation
(e.g. 8-20 hrs)

The following guidelines apply for the design and dimensioning:


2-fold room air change per hour
Ventilation system, installation room for the medium voltage, main distributor
To dissipate heat and/or restrict the room temperature, the installation room for
the medium voltage, main distributor (MVMD) is to be ventilated by an exhaust air
system.
Exhaust air system is to be provided as follows:
Radial roof ventilator on the warehouse roof with:

Page 89 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

- Motor for a single-stage ventilator speed (constant output)


- Ventilator base
- Automatic check valve
Air distribution network with:
- Exhaust air collection via an intake grille (mesh grid) on the ventilator
- Re-introduction, secondary air preferably via a weather protection grille in
the faade or door, alternatively via the roof hood, each with poweroperated shut-off flap (OPEN/CLOSED)
Please note: Re-introduction, secondary air floor in the ground area
Control/regulating via ICA technology (Refer to ICA works) with:
- ON/OFF switch for the exhaust air system (ventilator), automatically via a
temperature sensor in the installation room MVMD
- Opening/Closing the multileaf damper automatically with an ON/OFF
switch for the exhaust air system (ventilator)
Control settings (extract) - (Refer to ICA works) with:
-

ON/OFF switch for the exhaust air system (ventilator) in the installation
room MVND (in general 35 C) switching hysteresis (e.g. 1-2 K), if the
limiting temperature has been exceeded

The following requirements apply for the design and dimensioning:


Dimensioning the air flow in accordance with the heat load
If the dissipation of heat and/or limiting of the room temperature via the
ventilation system cannot be guaranteed (e.g. outdoor temperatures on a
long-term basis over 35C), a partial air conditioning system must be
installed instead of ventilation.
In this case, the partial air conditioning system is to be provided as an electric,
split air conditioning system as follows:
Condensing unit (external unit) on the warehouse roof with:

- Refrigerant e.g. R410A


- Frequency controlled compressor
Please note: It has to be ensured that a free suction is guaranteed in spite of
snow (lower edge of the heat exchanger external unit above the theoretical
snow limit). This can be achieved either via a raised heat exchanger or via a
steel sub-construction.
Vaporisers (internal units) as wall model with a 1-sided air outlet

Cooling network with:


Installation of the refrigerant pipes on the wall (surface-mounted) up to
roof
- Installation of the condensation pipes on the wall (surface-mounted) and
integration into the sewage pipe with an odour trap (Refer to Sanitary
works)
Independent control/regulating with:
-

preferably with a cable remote control (alternatively infrared remote


control) for the individual room control next to the entrance door with the
following functions: ON/OFF, operation selection (heating/cooling), setting
the set point for the room temperature, setting the ventilator speed, setting
the airflow direction
ON/OFF switch for the split-air conditioning system, automatically via an
integrated temperature sensor in the cable remote control and/or in the
vaporisers (internal unit)

Page 90 of 215

3.17

3.18

3.19

3.20

3.21

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Please note: Connecting the split-air conditioning system to a central control


point for all the split-air conditioners (Refer to Heating System works)
Regulating settings (extract) - (Refer to ICA works) with:
- ON/OFF switch for the split-air conditioning system for too high the limiting
temperature in the installation room MVMD (in general 35 C) switching
hysteresis (e.g. 1-2 K)
- Speed for the ventilator vaporisers, automatic
- Setting the air outlet flaps for the vaporisers, automatic

The following requirements apply for the design and dimensioning:


Dimensioning the refrigeration capacity in accordance with the heat load
Ventilation system, installation room for the low voltage main distribution (LVMD)
To dissipate heat and/or restrict the room temperature in the installation room for
the low voltage main distribution, it is to be ventilated by an exhaust air system.
Requirements are to be analog with the ventilation system for the installation
room MVMD.
Ventilation system, installation room for the transformer
To dissipate heat and/or restrict the room temperature in the installation room for
the transformer, it is to be ventilated by an exhaust air system.
Requirements are to be analog with the ventilation system for the installation
room MVMD.
Ventilation system, installation room for safety lighting/battery
To dissipate heat and/or restrict the room temperature and to prevent a high
concentration of hazardous substances, the installation room for safety
lighting/battery is to be ventilated by an exhaust air system.
Requirements are to be analog with the ventilation system for the installation
room MVMD.
In addition, the control/regulation for the exhaust air system is to be provided as
follows:
automatic ON/OFF switching for the exhaust air system (ventilator),
automatically via the signal charge batteries, safety lighting from the safety
lighting control/regulation
Ventilation system, refrigeration plant room
To dissipate heat and/or restrict the room temperature as well as degassing in
case of accident (e.g. ammonia leaks), the refrigeration plant room is to be
ventilated by an exhaust air system.
Exhaust air system, including the regulating system, is to be supplied by
Refrigeration works (scope of services, client).
Ventilation system, installation room for the Emergency Power Assist System (if required)
If in accordance with regulations, an automatic exhaust ventilation system is
required for the installation room for the Emergency Power Assist System
(installation room is the supply room for diesel storage), it has to be ventilated by
an exhaust air system to prevent a high concentration of hazardous substances.
If required (regulation), the exhaust air system is to be provided as follows:
Radial roof ventilator on the warehouse roof with:
- Motor for a single-stage ventilator speed (constant output)
- Ventilator base
- Automatic check valve
Page 91 of 215

3.22

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Air distribution network with:


- Exhaust air collection, preferably via an intake grille (mesh grid) on the
ventilator otherwise, (if required), in the floor area via a pipe and/or ducted
grille with an air volume control
In this case, the air pipes are to be surface-mounted on partition walls up
to ventilator
- Re-introduction, secondary air preferably via a weather protection grille in
the faade or door, alternatively via a roof hood
Control/regulating via ICA technology (Refer to ICA works) with:
- ON-OFF switch for the exhaust air system (ventilator), automatically via a
timer
Regulating settings (extract) - (Refer to ICA works) with:
- Operating time for the exhaust air system (ventilator) in accordance with
regulation

The following requirements apply for the design and dimensioning:


Dimensioning of the air flow in accordance with the regulations (e.g. 5-fold
room air change per hour)
Ventilation system, hazardous substance room (if required)
If the building regulations and/or provisions for sprinkler systems require a
separate hazardous substance room for storing flammable liquids and aerosols
(e.g. lighters, spray cans), then an exhaust air system may be required for
preventing a high concentration of hazardous substances in the atmosphere
(Refer to Construction works).
The following requirements apply for an exhaust air system for example:
Radial roof ventilator on the warehouse roof with:
- Motor for a single-stage ventilator speed (constant output)
- Ventilator base with an integrated silencer
- Automatic check valve
- If required: Ex-protection
Air distribution network with:
Exhaust air collection via an intake grille (mesh grid) and/or ducted grille
with an output control on the floor
- Re-introduction, secondary air from the adjoining warehouse areas via fire
protection dampers (with ventilation grilles on both sides)
Control/regulating via a gas alarm system:
- ON/OFF switch for the exhaust air system (ventilator), automatically via a
gas alarm system in the hazardous substance room
Regulating settings (extract) with:
- Switching on the exhaust air system (ventilator), when too high the upper
limiting value for gas concentration on the gas alarm system in the
hazardous substance room
(Refer to gas alarm system for hazardous substance room)
Please note: Closure of the fire protection doors of the hazardous
substance room if the upper gas concentration limit has been exceeded
-

The following requirements apply for the design and dimensioning:


Dimensioning of the air flow in accordance with the regulations (e.g. 2-fold
room air change per hour)

Page 92 of 215

3.23

3.24

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Air curtain system, SEL Freezer


Rapid roll doors between freezer rooms (SEL Freezer) and normal cold rooms
(e.g. GI/GO Freezer, GI/GO Refrigeration/Meat) are to be fitted with air curtains to
minimise the air exchange.
Air curtain system are to be provided as follows:
Air curtain system as cold air curtain (without Heater) with:
- Width and/or width air outlet minimum as a width door freezer room
(modular structure of air curtain)
- Vertical air outlet (vertical air flow)
- Horizontal air suction (horizontal air flow)
- Motor(s) for multi-staged ventilator speed (variable output)
- Air flow rectifiers on the air outlet
Installation of air curtain system is to be as follows:
- Positioning on the warm side (intake air for the normal cold room) below
panelled ceiling
- Outlet height (lower edge, air outlet) same height as the freezer room door
- Air outlet air curtain directly in front of the freezer room door (e.g. Deep
Freeze)
Please note: Consideration for fire protection doors (if applicable).
Larger gaps between the freezer room door and air outlet air curtain are to
be must be closed (e.g. by strip curtains).
Independent control with:
- Positioning the switching device on the warm side (normal cold room) next
to the freezer room door (SEL Freezer)
- Staging switches for fan levels (ventilator speed)
- Motor protection
- Door contact switches (installation on freezer room door)
- Time relay (time delay time of at least 15 minutes)
- Triggering the air curtain via ICA technology signal
- Automatic activation of the air curtain with 1st door opening via a set time
delay
Regulating settings with:
Triggering the air curtain on activation of the respective lighting zone
Automatic activation of the air curtain with the 1st door opening via a set
time delay (e.g. 15 min)
- Automatic deactivation of the air curtain on expiry of the time delay and/or
upon deactivation of respective lighting zone
Please note: Periodic activation and deactivation of the air curtain, each time
the door opens, is not suitable due to the delay period up to achieving the full
ventilator speed and/or air flows (approx. 5 seconds).
-

The following requirements apply for the design and dimensioning:


Dimensioning the air flow and/or fan level so that the air curtain connects
correctly to the floor surface (not too hard).
---> Proofing by a smoke test (fog machine) during commissioning
Precision air conditioning systems, IT server room Administration
The IT server room in Administration is to be cooled, humidified and de-humidified
by 2 precision air conditioning systems (100 % redundance).
The complete precision air conditioning systems is to be supplied by the client (IT
Dept.). The required installation areas and/or surfaces for the installation of the
condensers and/or heat exchangers and the cooling network must be provided
(e.g. in ceiling cavities, installation shaft, roof).
Page 93 of 215

3.25

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Ventilators and air distribution network, general


The following general requirements apply for the ventilators and air distribution
network of the ventilation systems:
Design operating points for the ventilators in accordance with the optimal
efficiency levels with consideration for the operating point at the maximum
annual operating hours.
Infinitely variable speed controls with frequency converters are to be used for
larger regulating areas (different air flows).
Design the air distribution network as a low speed system with approx. 5-7
m/s air speed based on the design volume flows
Please note: Valid for a utilisation life < 3000 operating hours per year
For higher operating hours, a design air speed with approx. 4-5 m/s will be
valid
Ventilators with direct drive (no belt drive)

Material for the air pipes:


- Steel sheet, galvanised
(Screw or plug connector - tightness class II)
Please note: Connecting pipes for air vents and/or air intakes are to be
made from flexible air pipe (e.g. aluminium) up to a maximum of 1.5 m
long
- Plastic (welded joint) if required (aggressive utilities)
Material insulation for the air distribution network: (for supply air pipes)
-

The following applies to areas with fire protection requirements:


Fire rating class A (non-flammable), such as mineral wool Promatect
Areas without fire protection requirements (admissible):
Fire rating class B (flame retardant) such as vinyl rubber

The insulation is to be fitted with the following jacket:


- Without jacket if closed cell foam is used
- Aluminium foil for concealed installation (e.g. in ceiling cavity, in shaft)
- Sheet jacket (removable) for external installation (weather protection) or
for installations in areas prone to mechanical damage
Insulation thickness for the air distribution network (air pipes incl. fittings) in
accordance with regulations and/or technical requirements
Cleaning and inspection openings in air pipes and components so that all the
pipes can be inspected and cleaned.
Adjusting the air distribution network by throttle valves, throttle dampers
and/or volume flow regulators at accessible places (applies in particular to
highly branched, air distribution networks)
If required (regulation): fire protection dampers with/without smoke detectors,
F90 jacket
Please note: For guarantee purposes, the fire protection dampers must be
cemented by Ventilation Systems contractor.
Page 94 of 215

4.1

4.2

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

3.3.4

28.02.2014

Sanitary system

General
The connected value (peak flow) for potable and/or wastewater results from the
number of facilities which are to be provided and the extinguishing water
requirements (Refer to Sprinkler works).
Installation and number of sanitary system areas (WCs, showers, etc.) in
accordance with national Labour Law provisions.
In addition to the discharge conditions for wastewater and rain water, the quality
and characteristics of the supplied, potable water as well as the expected duration
of a consistently, generated water composition has also to be considered with
regard to suitable installation materials (pipes, fittings) and must be coordinated
with water supplier.
Please note: In general, a chemical water analysis has to be obtained and/or a
chemical and micro-bacteriological water analysis for ground or well water.
Performance limits for Sanitary works are to be defined in agreement with the
Construction works contractors. As a rule, the scope of services for Sanitary
works includes all the installation works inside buildings from the upper edge of
the floor slab and potable water pipes underground (except earthworks).
Potable water supplies
General
Potable water supplies for the Distribution Centre are to be preferably via the
public potable water network in accordance with the provisions of the water
supply company.
If potable water supplies cannot be guaranteed via the public potable water
network, a well system for potable water with a minimum of 2 well pumps (100 %
redundance) is to be supplied in agreement with the client (Construction Dept.).
Please note: If in case of a well system, the dimensioning of the well only
enables the installation of 1 pump, then any repair or exchange works must be
guaranteed within only a few hours. In this case, a 2nd pump must be provided as
a reserve.
Otherwise, a second well with its own pump is to be provided
This requirement is mandatory in case of refrigeration systems with water
impinged condensers (Requirement for water for heat dissipation).
---> Coordination with the client (Construction Dept.).
In general, potable water supplies are to be as follows:
Potable water supplies via a house connection and/or transmission station
preferably in Pump house for the sprinkler system (next to sprinkler tank)
Separate main potable water meter (in addition to main potable water meter
from the utility company) with M-BUS interface for remote meter reading
(automatic consumption data reading)
Please note: An interface as a pulse output is error-prone and is only to be
used in justified exceptional cases. Interface requirements are to be discussed
with ICA technology.
Dirt filter for the potable water for manual backwashing

Installation of the potable water pipe between the plot border and house
connection (e.g. Pump house for the sprinkler) in the sub-soil
Page 95 of 215

4.3

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Installation of the potable water pipe between the house connection (e.g.
Pump house, sprinkler) and the warehouse in the sub-soil

Please note: The selected material for water distribution network as well as the
type and quality of water treatment must be executed in accordance with the
water analysis/analyses.
Increasing the water pressure
If the existing water pressure is unable to guarantee the minimum, required flow
pressure for the individual water facilities in Distribution Centre, a pressure
booster has to be supplied as follows:
Multi-pump system consisting of a minimum of 3 pumps (redundance)

Tank for water retention (in case of a well system)

Installation in Pump house, sprinkler, or in the heating system room

Controlled/regulated independently

Regulating settings (extract) with:


- Minimum flow pressure in accordance with the requirements for each
water facility

Please note: The minimum flow pressure of potable water at connections for air
humidifier (scope of delivery, Refrigeration works) is to be a minimum of 3 bar to a
maximum of 10 bar (installation of a possible pressure reducer).
The idling water pressure should not exceed 6 bar for general consumption
points.
Water treatment (in addition to dirt filter)
If the potable water analysis indicates a requirement for water treatment, then the
following water treatment system must be supplied:
Central or decentralised softening system (ion exchange principle) in
pendulum mode with 2 switchable exchange tanks (100 % redundance), if
water hardness exceeds requirements of withdrawal points
Central Disinfection system (e.g. UV), if water hygiene cannot be guaranteed

Central multi-stage filter with automatic backwashing, in case of heavy water


pollution (e.g. in case of a well system)
Installation in Pump house for the sprinkler or in the heating system room

Controlled/regulated independently

Regulating settings (extract) each with:


- Set points in accordance with withdrawal point (sanitary facilities)
requirements

Please note: The hardness level of the potable water at the connection points to
the humidification system and, where applicable, the evaporation condenser
connections (scope of delivery Refrigeration works) minimum 4dH (alkaline
mineral ions 0.713 mmol/l) up to maximum 8dH (1,426 mmol/l).
Connections for waste and rainwater
General
Waste and rainwater connections for the Distribution Centres via public sewer
network (separate or combined system) in accordance with the provisions of the
water supply company.

Page 96 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

If possible, and economically viable, rainwater is to seep underground. Open


rigole percolation ditches are to be supplied in agreement with Construction
works.

Page 97 of 215

4.4

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Connections for waste and rainwater for the Distribution Centre are to be provided
as follows:
Drainage for waste and rainwater as open channel drains (gravitation
drainage), if possible without pump stations
Installation of waste and rainwater pipes between plot border and connection
points (upper edge site/foundation base) underground with sufficient control
shafts
The drainage for the external areas is to be via the installation of channels as
concrete block channels.
Please note: Anti-flooding valves may only be used in justified, exceptional
cases.
Pump stations
If free drainage of the waste and rainwater is not possible (e.g. wastewater
quantity below the anti-flooding level), then pump stations are to be supplied as
follows:
2 pumps (100% redundance)

Controlling/regulating independently

Wastewater treatment
If public safety or the water quality is at risk, then the following wastewater
treatment plants have to be supplied in agreement with the water supply
company:
Separators (e.g. oil- and/or fuel separator) for rainwater on parking areas

Sewage plants, if the wastewater is to be seeped into the ground - no


connection of wastewater to the public sewer network
Independent control/regulating with:
-

automatic fill-level monitoring (error message)

Please note: The decomposing processes of perished and disposed food can
produce harmful substances. In this case, a wastewater treatment facility for
surface water by the container ramp may be required in agreement with the client
(Logistics Dept.).
Sanitary system, Warehouse
General
The following requirements apply for the installation:
Installation of a main distribution pipe (cold water) in the ceiling cavity of
refrigerated areas and/or under the roof up to individual areas (e.g.
Administration, GI/GO counter areas, other areas)
Installation of connecting pipes (cold, warm and wastewater) to be surfacemounted on walls and/or supports
Connection of wastewater at the withdrawal points directly into downpipes,
collection and underground pipes (wastewater)
Please note: The minimum number of possible underground pipes are to be
installed below the warehouse floor slab; no underground pipes are to be
installed in high rack areas (guaranteeing a pressure resistance for
underground installations).

Page 98 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Heating system room


The heating system room is to be provided with the following withdrawal points
and/or connections:
Cold water tap with hose connection (e.g. for filling heating system)

Cold water connection for automatic re-filling/topping up of the warehouse


heating system
Floor drain with an odour trap
Please note: If oil is to be utilised as an alternative energy source, then the
floor drain must be lockable.

Installations room, sprinkler (Alarm valve station)


The installations room, sprinkler (Alarm valve station) is to be provided with the
following withdrawal points and/or connections:
Cold water tap with hose connection

Floor drain with an odour trap

Wastewater connection for the collecting channel below the alarm valves

Please note: Similar requirements are to be applied accordingly for peripheral


alarm valve stations
Refrigeration plant room
The refrigeration plant room is to be provided with the following withdrawal points
and/or connections:
Cold water tap with hose connection
If requirements dIASnd it (e.g. ammonia above 1000 kg), then the following are
additionally valid:
Emergency shower with hot water (to prevent cold shock) in the anteroom to
the refrigeration plant room (next to exit), alternatively outside the refrigeration
plant room door
---> Connection of the cold and hot water with a mixing valve
Please note: Trace heating has to be supplied if the emergency shower
is positioned outside. The water for the emergency shower is to be heated by
an electrical, instantaneous water heater.
- Connected value (flow-volume value) minimum 50 l/min
- Water temperature approx. 25-30 C
Catchment tray with external drainage drain or floor drain with an odour trap (if
installed in the shower anteroom)
Splash guard (e.g. curtain) around the emergency shower (if installed in the
shower anteroom)
Please note: A floor drain will not be provided in areas with ammonia. Otherwise,
the floor drain has to be lockable.
The following will apply in addition, if evaporation condensers exist:
Cold water connection (lockable and drainable) for feed water condenser on
the roof, alternatively in the refrigeration plant machine room (if an internal
water tank is used)
Please note:
- Connected value (flow-volume value) for re-filling/topping up water approx.
2,00 l/s

Page 99 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Minimum flow pressure for re-filling/topping up water at the condenser,


minimum 1 bar
- Hardness level for re-filling/topping up water 4-8 dH
(Alkaline mineral ions 0.713-1.426 mmol/l)
The cold water connection is to be fitted with pipe and/or system separators.
Connection for the wastewater (DN 100) for the sludge water condenser is to
be on the roof above the refrigeration plant room, alternatively in the
refrigeration plant room (if an internal water tank is used)
Please note:
- Connected value (DU value) for sludge water approx. 1.00 l/s
- Supply of the automatic deioniser and biocide system and/or water
hygiene for condenser collecting vessel by Refrigeration works
-

Ceiling cavity, warehouse


The following connections are to be supplied for air humidifiers in the refrigerated
areas Fruit+Veg (scope of delivery Refrigeration works)
Cold water connection (lockable) with a filter for the air humidifier supply unit
(two substance nozzles) above the panelled ceiling in the Fruit+Veg area
Please note:
- Connected value (volume-flow value) for the feed water in the Fruit+Veg
area, approx. 0.014 l/s (0.05 m/h)
- inflow pressure for re-filling/topping up water on supply unit, minimum 3
bar
- Hardness level for the re-filling/topping up water, maximum 10dH
(alkaline mineral ions 1.783 mmol/l)
A separate wastewater connection (DN 50-70) for condensate drainage from
cooling coil, air circulating system, and ceiling cavity (in general areas and in
the freezer)
If a peripheral, wet-dry station of the sprinkler system (above the panelled ceiling
for the chain conveyor) is planned (Refer to Sprinkler works), then a wastewater
pipe has to be supplied for this area.
Refrigerated warehouse areas
Underground pipe connections (up to 1.00 m above the upper edge of the floor
slab) are to be supplied for drainage of the condensate from air coolers at key
locations (supply by Construction works)
Please note: Installation of condensate and drip water pipes by Refrigeration
works.
Underground pipe connections (DN 100) as to be as follows (see sample project):
Internal side of the entrance to the access to the chain conveyor (Axis B6)

Internal side of the access to the chain conveyor (Axis E6)

Internal side of the access to the charging station (Axis B10)

Internal side of the access to the RS/Chocolate (Axis B13)

Internal side of the Fruit+Veg (Axis C10)

Internal side of the exit from the chain conveyor (Axis DE7)

Internal side of the access to Meat (Axis DE8)

Internal faade of GI/GO Freezer (Axis F4)

Internal faade Chiller Buffer (Axis F6)

Internal faade Chiller Buffer (Axis F10)

Page 100 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Cold hall
The cold hall is to be fitted with the following withdrawal points and/or
connections:
Drainage channel with grid (suitable for heavy loads) and inlet at access to the
entry ramp (Axis 1)
Drainage channel with grid (suitable for heavy loads) inlet at access to the
HGV parking area (inside cold hall) (Axis 1)
Container ramp/Container storage area
The Container ramp/Container storage area is to be provided with the following
withdrawal points and/or connections:
Cold water tap (frost proof and lockable) with a hose connection, on the
partition wall to the recycling area (Axis AB3)
Cold water tap (frost proof and lockable) with a hose connection, on the
partition wall to the recycling area (Axis BC3)
Drainage channel with grid (suitable for heavy loads) and inlet(s) at access
point to the container storage area (Axis 1)
Drainage channel with grid (suitable for heavy loads) and an inlet under each
container storage space for disposing of Fruit+Veg (e.g. 2nd, 5th, 7th and 10th
container starting at Axis 1 in accordance with standard)
Dirt trap with inlet behind the container area in front of the container ramp
Recycling area (washing station and general)
The recycling area is to be fitted with the following withdrawal points and/or
connections:
Cold water tap (frost proof and lockable) with a hose connection at the access
to the recycling area (externally, near the sectional door)
Sink with cold, hot and wastewater pipe connections in washing station

Cold water tap with a hose connection in the washing station

Drainage channel with grid and inlet in front of the washing station access
area
Floor drain with an odour trap at the centre of washing station

Optional: Underground pipe (minimum DN 50 to 1.00 m above upper edge of


the floor slab) near the to cold storage cell for write-offs (if applicable)

Please note: The hot water supply for the sink is to be provided by an electric
instantaneous water heater.
WCs Recycling area
WCs in the recycling area are to be fitted with the following withdrawal points
and/or connections:
Sanitary fittings (e.g. wash basin, WCs, urinals) in accordance with regulations
(e.g. national Labour Law provisions) with connections for cold, hot and
wastewater
Please note: The hot water supply for the wash basin is to be heated via an
electric floor standing boiler (5l).
Workshop
The workshop is to be fitted with the following withdrawal points and/or
connections:

Page 101 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Sink with cold, hot and wastewater pipe connections

Please note: The hot water supply for the sink is supplied via the electric hot
water tank from Administration (Installation in workshop).
Workplace GI/GO Fruit+Veg
The workplace in GI/GO Fruit+Veg is to be fitted with the following withdrawal
points and/or connections:
Sink with cold, hot and wastewater pipe
Please note: The hot water supply for the sink is provided via an electric floor
standing boiler (5l).
Chain conveyor
The chain conveyor is to be fitted with the following withdrawal points and/or
connections:
Cold water connection(DN 32) for automatic wash system for boxes at the
front of the chain conveyor on the partition wall to the container ramp
Please note: When installing the cold water connection pipe inside the cold
room (room temperature usually below 4C), an electric trace heating with an
automatic control and heat insulation is to be provided.
The exact position of the water connection is to be agreed with the supplier of
the wash system for the boxes. If required, an additional potable water pipe
(DN 32) is to be supplied as a distance pipe with connection threads on the
pipe ends between the water connection and wash system for boxes.
The cold water connection is to be provided with a pipe separator and/or
system separator
Connection for the wastewater (DN 100) for the automatic wash system for
boxes is to be at the front of chain conveyor, on the partition wall to the
container ramp
Please note:
- Connected value (volume-flow value) for the re-filling/topping up water for
the automatic wash system for boxes is to be approx. 1.00 l/s over 15
Minutes (= approx. 900 l) cyclical 1x every 1-2 days
- Wastewater for the automatic wash system for boxes, approx. 900 l
cyclical 1x every 1-2 days
- Minimum flow pressure for re-filling/topping up water, minimum 3 bar
2x floor drain with an odour trap in the chain conveyor pit (equally distributed
over the pit length)
Please note: If hazardous substance and extinguishing water retention are
required and the floor slab in the warehouse is thicker, then no floor drains
may be installed.
In this case, the chain conveyor is to be fitted with the following connections:
- 2x sump pit (scope of services Construction works) for controlled
extraction of the collected water via a mobile pumping station
Battery charging station (if required or client requested)
Withdrawal points and/or connections for the battery recharging station are to be
supplied in accordance with regulations or client requested (Procurement Dept.):
e.g. emergency shower in front of the battery recharging station

Cold water connection(DN 15) for water treatment system for recharging wet
batteries (scope of delivery client) in front of the battery recharging station

Page 102 of 215

4.5

4.6

4.7

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Sanitary system, GI counter area


General
The following requirements apply for the installation:
Installation of the main distribution pipe (cold and hot water with circulation) in
the ceiling cavity, GI counter area
Installation of the connecting pipes (cold and hot water without circulation) in
false and/or partition walls up to sanitary fittings
Installation of the connecting pipes for wastewater in false and/or partition
walls and connection to the central points in downpipes or main pipe
(wastewater)
Please note: Downpipes or separate bypass pipes (wastewater) for the
downpipes or main pipes (wastewater) for the supply and exhaust ventilation
system are to be installed above the roof or above suitable points.
Reserve positions for connection points in downpipes, collection and main
pipes (wastewater) for the condensate drainage vaporisers (internal units) split
air conditioners for the offices
Please note: The water for the GI counter area is to be centrally heated by a floor
standing electric hot water tank under the stairs to the GI offices or on the top
floor slab over the GI offices.
The regulating of the hot water supply and, where necessary, the circulation pump
(internal time and temperature dependent pump regulating) is to be independent.
Sanitary areas
GI common rooms are to be fitted with the following withdrawal points and/or
connections:
Sanitary fittings (e.g. wash basin, showers, WCs, urinals) are to be in
accordance with regulations (e.g. national Labour Law provisions) with
suitable connections for cold, warm and wastewater
Cold water tap in the anteroom of the drivers WCs

Floor drain with an odour trap and lateral inlet (from wash basin) in the
anteroom of the drivers WCs

Please note: If possible, sanitary fittings are to be installed on installation walls).


Sanitary system GO Counter area
The requirements are to be analog to the sanitary system installation in the GI
counter area.
In addition, the area for the washing station for the SEL desk is to be fitted with
the following withdrawal points and/or connections:
Tap for cold and hot water
Gully with a sludge trap and an odour trap
Please note: Cold and hot water are to be supplied from the GO common area.
Sanitary system, Administration
General
The following requirements apply for the installation:
Installation of the main distribution pipe (cold and hot water with circulation) in
the ceiling cavity, Administration
Page 103 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Installation of the connecting pipes (cold and hot water without circulation) in
false walls and/or partition walls up to sanitary fittings
Installation of the connecting pipes for wastewater in false walls and/or
partition walls and connection to the central points in downpipes or main pipe
(wastewater)
Please note: The venting and air intake for downpipes or main pipes
(wastewater) will be executed for the downpipes or main pipes (wastewater)
by a separate supply and exhaust ventilation system via suitable points to
above the roof.
Reserving areas for connection points into the downpipes, collection and main
pipes (wastewater) for condensate drainage vaporisers (internal units) from
the split air conditioners, offices

Please note: The hot water supply for Administration is to be centrally heated via
a floor standing electric hot water tank in the workshop.
The water heating and circulation pump (internal time and temperaturedependent, pump regulating) is to be controlled independently.
Alternative: If the heating for Administration is planned via a condensing boiler,
then the water will also be heated via this condensing boiler (Refer to Heating
works).
Fire extinguishing connections are to be installed in accordance with the
respective provisions, regulations and requirements
In case of direct connections for withdrawal points for extinguishing water
(hydrants) to the potable water network (cold water), connecting pipes are to be
looped-through for hygienic reasons, and the main distribution pipe is to be
connected at the pipework end to the most frequently utilised withdrawal points. If
required, pressure reducers are to be fitted.
Sanitary areas
The sanitary areas of Administration are to be fitted with the following withdrawal
points and/or connections:
Sanitary fittings (e.g. wash basin, showers, WCs, urinals) in accordance with
regulations (e.g. Labour Law), with connections for cold, hot and wastewater
Please note: If possible, sanitary fittings are to be installed on ceiling-high walls
(installation walls).
Kitchenettes
The kitchenettes of Administration are to be fitted with the following withdrawal
points and/or connections:
Cold, hot and wastewater pipes for the kitchenette sink

A single lever mixer tap for the sink


(Matching the cold and hot water supply connections)
Please note: The kitchenettes, including the sink, are to be supplied by
Construction works.
Non-smoker room
The coffee machine in the non-smoker room of the administration building is to be
fitted with the following withdrawal points and/or connections:
Cold water connection

Page 104 of 215

4.8

4.9

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

IT server room
The IT server room of Administration is to be fitted with the following withdrawal
points and/or connections:
Cold water connection (DN 15) for the air humidifier Precision air conditioning
system in the cavity floor at the gable end (entry), IT server room
Please note: The cold water pipe is to be installed directly from the outside
into the cavity floor. An open installation of pipework within the IT server room
is not permitted.
The cold water pipe outside the IT server room is to be fitted with a
magnetic valve (activation by independent control of the anti-flood
monitoring for the cavity floor of the IT server room)
Wastewater pipe connection (main pipe size DN 50) for condensate from the
Precision air conditioning system in the cavity floor at the gable end (entry),
IT server room
Sanitary system Gatehouse
General
The requirements are to be analog with the sanitary installations for GI Counter
areas.
Sanitary areas
The sanitary areas in the Gatehouse are to be fitted with the following withdrawal
points and/or connections:
Sanitary fittings (e.g. wash basin, WCs, urinals) in accordance with the
regulations (e.g. national Labour Law provisions) with connections for cold,
hot and wastewater
Please note: The hot water supply for the wash basin is to be heated via an
electric floor standing boiler (5l).
Rainwater drainage, Warehouse
Rainwater drainage for the warehouse, including the roof surface, is to be
provided as follows:
Pressure-less, rainwater drainage system (gravitation and/or siphonic
drainage)
Please note: A fully-filled operated, rainwater drainage system (pressurised
drainage) is not planned
Position the roof outlets centrally, arranged between the columns on the
faade side of the warehouse
Please note: A heating system for the roof outlets is only to be installed if
required (e.g. building >400 m above sea level)
Install the downpipes on central points to the right (viewed from the inside)
next to the columns on the faade side and directly integrated into thIASin
pipes
Please note: If the chosen load-bearing structures could lead to a collision
between the downpipes and the area for the loading bridges, then the
downpipes may be installed on the front of the columns.
---> Coordination with Construction works (load-bearing structure and impact
protection)

Page 105 of 215

4.10

4.11

4.12

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Downpipes and/or connecting pipes for draining the top surface of the roof are
to be installed internally (up to a height level above the sub-roof) with a free
outlet onto the sub-roof
In case of a parapet (height > 10 cm): emergency overflows (scope of
services Construction works) must be provided behind each roof inlet in
accordance with the Lidl specification (Refer to master detail)

Rainwater drainage, Administration


Rainwater drainage for Administration is to be as follows:
Pressure-less, rainwater drainage system (gravitation and/or siphonic
drainage)
Please note: A fully-filled operated, rainwater drainage system (pressurised
drainage) is not planned
Positioning the roof outlets on the faade side
Please note: A heating system for roof outlets is only required in special cases
(e.g. building >400 m above sea level)
Installation of the downpipes on central points (e.g. installation shafts) and
directly integrated into the main pipes
In case of a parapet (height >10 cm): emergency overflows (scope of services
Construction works) must be provided behind each roof inlet in accordance
with the Lidl specification (Refer to master detail)
Rainwater drainage Gatehouse
The rainwater drainage for the gatehouse is to be installed externally (Refer to
Construction works).
Water distribution network, general
The following general requirements apply for the water distribution network of the
sanitary system:

Material for potable water pipes:


-

Stainless steel (press fit)


Plastic (press fit)
Metal multi-layer pipe as a plastic-aluminium-plastic pipe (press fit)

Please note: If possible, only a metal-based material should be used for the
water distribution pipes (risk of stress corrosion and/or electrical corrosion).
The combination with plastic pipes is possible.
Material for waste and rainwater pipes:
- Plastic (push-fit collars, adhesive or welded joint)
* Polyethylene (PE), colour black
* Polypropylene (PP), colour grey
* ABS, colour dark grey
* Polyvinylchloride (PVC), colour dark grey
* Polyvinylchloride (PVC), colour orange-brown for underground pipes
- Grey, cast iron (socket joint)
* e.g. SML, colour brown for general pipes
- Grey, cast iron, specially coated (socket joint)
* e.g. TML for underground pipes
- Grey, cast iron, enamelled (socket joint)
* e.g. MLetec for aggressive mediums
- Concrete (push-fit collars) for underground pipes with larger dimensions
Material for condensation pipes:

Page 106 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

Copper (Soldered or press fit)


Stainless steel pipes (welded or pressed connection)
Plastic (push-fit collars or adhesive joint)

Material for insulating the water distribution network:


-

28.02.2014

The following applies for all areas with fire protection requirements:
Fire rating Class A (non-flammable) such as mineral wool, foam glass
In areas without fire protection requirements (admissible):
Fire rating Class B (flame retardant) such as vinyl rubber, Polyurethane
hard foam

To avoid condensate and heat loss on all distribution and hot water pipes and
fittings, the pipes are to be fitted with insulation.
Rainwater pipes are to be insulated from the roof inlet to the downpipe joint.
Internal waste and rainwater pipes are to be insulated in the area of the roof
outlet/openings to a distance of a minimum of 2 m to avoid cold bridges. All
internal waste and rainwater downpipes in Administration and GI/GO Counter
areas are to be insulated to reduce sound vibration.
The insulation is to be fitted with the following jacket:
- Without jacket if using closed cell foam
- Aluminium foil for concealed installation (e.g. in ceiling cavity, in shaft)
- Plastic jacket (PVC) or coarse aluminium grain for exposed distribution
pipes
- Insulation tubes (tear proof) for concealed installation
- Sheet jacket (removable) for external installation (weather protection) or
for installation in areas prone to mechanical damage
Insulation thickness for the water distribution network (water pipes including
fittings) in accordance with regulations and/or technical requirements
Expansion compensation
Please note: If possible, an expansion compensation must be provided for
pipelines by directional change and expansion loops (fixed points near
junctions). Axial compensators are only permitted in exceptional cases. They
must be the exactly dimensioned, easily accessible and quickly replaceable.

Page 107 of 215

4.13

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Hot water supplies and potable water hygiene, in general


The following general requirements apply for hot water supplies:

Hot water systems are to be preferably installed as small installations with a


total water quantity </= 400 l and a water quantity </= 3 l in each pipe between
the exit point of the potable water heater and the tap
Please note: If hot water systems are large installations with a total water
quantity > 400 l and a water quantity > 3 l in each pipe between the exit point
of the potable water heater and the tap, then the following additional
requirements apply:
- Hot water system preferably with a circulation system, alternatively with a
self-regulating, pipe trace heating
Please note: These have to be designed and operated in such a way that
the hot water temperature will not differ by more than 5 K anywhere in the
system.
- Independent regulating of the hot water system with a thermal disinfection
function (Legionella control) for the entire hot water system by heating
the water, once a day, to over 60C (in general. 70C) and activating the
circulation pumps (if applicable) for e.g. 1-2 hours daily.
Please note: To guarantee the thermal disinfection of the circulation
system, the circulation regulating valves (if applicable) shall have 2 limits
(e.g. closing if hot water temperature = 55C, opening if temperature >
60C).
For safety reasons, thermal disinfection is to be carried out overnight
(scalding risk).

The hot water temperature at taps is to be restricted to a maximum of 45C


(scalding protection), for example by using mixer taps with hot water
restriction

The following measures are to be taken for guaranteeing hygiene in potable water
pipes and/or to prevent microorganisms (e.g. Legionella, Pseudomonas
aeruginosa, E. coli/Coliform, fungi):

Hot water temperature in hot water tank minimum 60 C


Please note: If the hot water system has been designed as a large
installation, the aforementioned requirements for thermal disinfection will also
apply

Prevention of stagnating water and/or non-circulation


Please note: Long connecting pipes for infrequently used withdrawal points
(e.g. external taps, taps in technichal and/or M&E areas) are to be loopedthrough and connected at their ends to frequently used withdrawal points.
Alternatively, it is possible to use cyclical opening, magnetic valves directly in
front of infrequently used withdrawal points.

Prevent back suction in cases of low pressure (e.g. by burst pipe) in


distribution pipes (potable water) by using a pipe and/or system separator
Please note: This applies in particular to the wash system for boxes, chain
conveyor and water tank (e.g. evaporation condenser)

If well water is to be utilised, additional disinfection measures (e.g. UV radiation),


based on the micro-bacteriological water analysis and after prior coordination with
the client (Construction Dept.), have to be taken.
Page 108 of 215

4.14

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Sanitary ware/Fittings/Accessories, in general


General
Only commercially available, standard issue sanitary ware and fittings of Group 1
(with test seal) are to be supplied in accordance with the technical standards.
Materials for the sanitary ware are to be supplied as sanitary ceramics or
enamelled steel (e.g. sink), colour white.
Fittings should be supplied and installed as smooth and easy to clean fittings.
All partition walls are to be supplied as flush mounted gypsum walls by
Construction works.
Toilet
Wash down WC, porcelain, wall-mounted

Mounting element with cistern (6-9 l), plastic,

Flush with stop button

WC seat with lid, plastic

Silicon joints between the sanitary ware and the wall

WC brush set, wall-mounted

WC toilet roll holder, wall-mounted

WC reserve toilet roll holder, wall-mounted

Coat hook on the inside of the WC door

Urinal
Urinal (self-flushing), porcelain, wall-mounted, inlet and outlet concealed

Mounting element with automatic (opto-electronic and/or infrared) flush with


power supply (no battery), wall-mounted
Silicon joints between the sanitary ware and the wall

Wash table/Wash basin


Wash table, porcelain, W/D approx. 60/50 cm, with overflow, wall-mounted

Mounting element

One-hole, electric mixer tap with mixer lever for setting water temperature and
power supply (no battery), manual waterstop for basin cleaning, chromed
Spray controller (Perlator), theft-proof

Drain valve lever arm with overflow, chromed

U-bend, anti-odour pipe, chromed

Angle valve(s) for inlet pipe(s)

Metal cover rosettes (for plastered-in installation)

Silicon joints between the sanitary ware and the wall

Glass mirror, W/H approx. 60/54 cm, for each washbasin and/or over the
entire wall width. Mirrors should be fitted into the wall (wall-flush installation)
---> Coordination with Construction works (tiling works)
Wire mesh waste bin, white

Soap dispenser (Supplied by client)

Hand blow-dryer

Page 109 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Sink
Steel sink (enamelled), W/D approx. 50/35 cm, with back wall, stainless steel
hinged drying rack, wall-mounted
Mounting element for drywall construction, otherwise directly on a solid wall

Single lever mixer tap, chromed, with swivel spout, wall-mounted

Spray controller (Perlator), theft-proof

Drain valves plastic, white

U-bend, anti-odour pipe, plastic, white

Angle valve(s) for inlet pipe(s)

Metal cover rosettes (for plastered-in installation)

Silicon joints between the sanitary ware and the wall

Shower
Self-closing mixer tap, wall-mounted

Shower head, adjustable, fixed (without hose)

Floor drain (shower tray supplied by client, tiled)

Coat hook

Cold and hot water taps


Drain valve with handwheel and hose connector

Lockable via a lockable, operating handle (only if installed externally)

Self-draining (only if installed externally)

Metal cover rosettes (for plastered-in installation)

Sink (Kitchenette)
Single lever mixer tap, chromed, with swivel spout, fitted to sink

Angle valve(s) for inlet pipe(s)

Combination angled valve for cold water (connection for a dishwasher)

U-bend, anti-odour pipe, plastic, white

Metal cover rosettes (for plastered-in installation)

Please note: The drivers WCs in the GI/GO common areas are to be fitted
with vandal and theft-proof sanitary ware/fittings/accessories (e.g. stainless
steel sanitary ware, steel mirror).

Page 110 of 215

5.1

5.2

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

3.3.5

28.02.2014

Sprinkler

General
The entire warehouse of the Distribution Centre is to be fitted with sprinklers. The
concept and/or parameters for the sprinklers are to be prepared by the planner
(see scope of services of general and/or specialist planner).
Sprinklers are to be installed in accordance with national guidelines.
Preferably a guideline is to be applied which enables maximum flexibility for
storing (e.g. avoiding shelf sprinkler, best use of room volume for storing,
with low structural and technical requirements)!
If recognised by authorising bodies, NFPA and FM guidelines may be
applied for example.
In general, all national regulations and the project-related fire protection
concept have to be implemented.
All deviations to regulations or the following requirements must be agreed
with the fire protection specialist and the accepting specialist in an
exception approval procedure. Deviations are only admissible, if they are
explicitly approved of by the accepting specialist and by the client (in
writing).
If the plot enables the optional extension of the warehouse building, then
the required area for the system components (e.g. alarm valves, main
pipeline) has to be taken into account and reserved.
Extinguishing water supply
The extinguishing water supply for sprinklers and, when necessary, for hydrants is
to be provided as follows:

Preferably, an above-ground insulated steel or reinforced concrete tank as the


water retention unit, alternatively as a semi or fully underground tank form in
reinforced concrete with:
Frost protection heating system (electric heating rods e.g. 2x 9 kW with
level switches)
- Automaticre-filling and/or topping up with a float valve
- Automatic fill-level monitoring
- Emergency overflow (free draining, so that the water loss from leaking
inlet valves is recognised)
- If required (e.g. regulations): manual re-filling and/or topping up following a
case of fire (e.g. within 36 hours according to VdS guidelines)
Please note: If the public water supply can guarantee the extinguishing water
quantity for the sprinkler system and the reliability is also ensured (e.g. the
variant for Switzerland is permitted), then the supply tank is not required.
A water retention tank in reinforced concrete must be provided as
impermeable reinforced concrete.
-

Pump(s) for the sprinkler system are to be preferably supplied as dieselpowered sprinkler pump(s)
Please note: The number and types of pumps are to be supplied in
accordance with the implemented guideline and the fire protection concept.
If 2 redundant sprinkler pumps are required, then preferably 2 diesel-powered
pumps, alternatively a combination of a diesel-powered and electric-powered
system may be supplied. Using 2 electric-powered pumps requires 2 separate
(independent) supplies and should therefore be avoided.

Page 111 of 215

5.3

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Jockey pump for the sprinkler system (pressure maintenance sprinkler


network)
Please note: The jockey pump must be dimensioned in such a way so that
the safety drill can be carried out without activating the sprinkler pumps (e.g. 4
kW pump, maximum pressure = 12 bar at zero flow).

If required: pump(s) for the hydrant system can be separate as dieselpowered or electric-powered hydrant pump(s)
Please note: The number and types of pumps are to be supplied in
accordance with the implemented guideline and the fire protection concept.
If the public water supply can guarantee the extinguishing water quantity as
well as the pressure for the hydrants, the hydrant pump(s) are not required.

Jockey pump for hydrants (pressure maintenance, hydrant network)

Installation pump(s) for the sprinkler system and, where necessary, hydrants
are to be in separate building (Pump house) next to the water retention tank
Please note: In accordance with regulations, a minimum distance (e.g. 15 m)
has to be maintained between the Pump house and the building to be
protected.
The following additional measures have to be taken in case of a semisubmersed or fully-submersed underground tank:
- Monitoring overflow to the central pump station
- Installing switch cabinets for pumps, sprinklers and hydrants at a
minimum of approx. 700 mm above the upper edge of the pump station
floor and/or above the 500-year flood mark

Installing a pump pressure pipe for extinguishing water for the sprinkler
system and/or hydrants between the Pump house and the Sprinkler
Installation Room (Alarm valve station) and/or external hydrants in the soil
levels

Pump pressure pipe for the extinguishing water (underground) as a ductile


(extendable and/or formable) grey cast iron, preferably with Tyton-Sit joints
Please note: Plastic (PE) in accordance with VdS CEA 4001 is also
admissible as an alternative material, if it is explicitly approved by the
accepting expert and by the client (in writing).
Depending on the installation of the ground connections, concrete abutments
are required.

Control/regulating for the sprinkler system (e.g. sprinkler pumps, alarm valve
station) and, where necessary, hydrants (e.g. hydrant pumps) is to be
independent (Refer to Monitoring/Alarm)

The following requirements apply for the design and dimensioning:

Extinguishing water supply (pump, tank) in accordance with:


-

Extinguishing water requirements, sprinkler protection


Extinguishing water requirements, internal hydrants
Extinguishing water requirements, external hydrants

A tank volume for the diesel reservoir tank for the pumps for a specified
duration for an extinguishing water supply, plus a reserve for cyclical test
operation
Please note: The volume of the diesel reservoir tank has to be designed in
such a way that, in spite of the cyclical test run, the minimum volume for the
extinguishing period and a refill is guaranteed.

Sprinkler protection
The following general requirements apply for the installation and design of the
sprinkler system:
Page 112 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Sprinkler protection as ceiling protection as follows:

Warehouse sprinkler (formerly ESFR sprinkler) in all warehouse areas


(including areas for optional storing)
Non-warehouse sprinkler (formerly CMSA and/or CMDA sprinkler) in all
other areas (e.g. structures with fire load)
Please note: In case of a refrigeration system with a refrigerant as
Ammonia (NH3) in accordance with DIN EN 378-3, the sprinklers may not
be installed in the refrigeration plant room ---> Coordination with client

Sprinkler protection as rack protection only if:


-

The sprinkler protection as ceiling protection is not sufficient/


admissible on its own (depending on the Directive on sprinkler
systems, room height, warehouse goods)

Number of alarm groups (alarm valves and/or flow switch) depending on the
sprinkler protection and the superordinated protection areas
Please note: Sprinklers for building protection are to be connected to the
relevant ceiling protection. Sprinklers for rack or platform protection are to be
fitted with their own, separate alarm valve station.
In case of installing alarm groups at a later date (e.g. optional extension of the
warehouse, retrofitting rack sprinklers), the distributor must be fitted with a
minimum of 2 spare nozzles (DN 200).
If admissible, the alarm valves have to be installed between 2 locking slides
(with position monitoring) to enable the major (annual) servicing of the alarm
valves without draining the sprinkler pipe network.

Positioning the distributor for the alarm valve and/or flow indicator in a
separate, sprinkler installations room (alarm valve station)
Please note: If a decentralised positioning of the alarm valve and/or flow
indicator is specified, then these can be installed on the faade in agreement
with the client (Logistics Dept.). In this case, the connection to the
extinguishing water supply will be executed directly via the underground ring
main for the external hydrants.
In this case, it must be normally possible to operate the isolation valve
externally.

Installation of the sprinkler pipes (main and distribution pipes) preferably on


the faade (arranged on top of each other with securing on the column),
alternatively under the roof (arranged next to each other, secured on the
trusses and purlins)

Arrange the sprinkler pipes (pipe strings) as ridge, ring or meshed pipe
networks depending on the areas to be supplied and the resulting pipe
dimensions

Arrange the sprinkler pipes (pipe strings) directly under the roof (preferably in
trapezoidal sheet metal with top widths, fitted to the trapezoidal sheet metal)
and/or above the panelled ceilings in the cold rooms
Please note: Sprinkler pipes above panelled ceilings are to be installed at
such a height that the accessibility to the ceiling cavities is guaranteed (pipe
axis of the sprinkler pipe approx. 25 cm above the panelled ceiling).
To avoid cold bridges, sprinkler pipes must be insulated up to a
minimum of 25 cm above panelled ceiling openings. The insulation is to
be fitted on the panelled ceiling (diffusion-proof).

Page 113 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Sprinkler pipes as black steel pipe (pipe width in accordance with regulations),
preferably with powder coated (RAL 3000), alternatively with a corrosion
protective coat and top coat (RAL 3000)

Sprinkler pipes and/or sprinkler with a metal cover rosette under suspended
ceilings and/or panelled ceilings

Flush and drain connections at the end of the main and distribution pipes and
sprinkler station
Please note: Flush and drain connections are to be installed up to 1.50 m (in
accordance with regulation) above the floor and secured with a plug.

Positioning a test sprinkler (shut-off valve fitting) for the sprinkler group at the
end of the pipe string of each sprinkler group
Please note: The test sprinkler must be operable without any auxillary aids
and the resulting water has to be drained away unaided.

The sprinkler protection is to be designed according to the fire-extinguishing


system concept.
Please note: To guarantee storage flexibility in all non-refrigerated
warehouse areas, the sprinkler protection is to be designed for stored
goods consisting of unpacked foamed plastics.
In all other warehouse areas, especially in the cold rooms, the sprinkler
protection is to be designed according to the determinations made by the
specialist planner and/or designer of the fire-extinguishing system concept.
Project-specific deviations concerning warehouse goods, building and/or room
height, upper edge of the warehouse goods must be agreed with the expert and
the client and explicitly confirmed (in writing).
Please note: The cold rooms Freezer, SEL Freezer, GI/GO Freezer,
Refrigeration, chain conveyor, Chiller Buffer, meat, Fruit+Veg are to be cooled at
room temperatures < 4 C.
Air outlet temperatures < 0 C by air cooler (mounted under panelled ceilings).
Cold hall and container ramp/space are to rIASin unheated.
At a minimum of 5 C, the ceiling cavity above the refrigerated areas must be
assumed to be frost-free.
Frost protection of the sprinkler system is to be provided as follows:
Variant Antifreeze

Sprinkler pipes with permitted antifreeze

Please note: Due to negative experiences (leakages and corrosion), the use of
the antifreeze agent Temper is not permitted!

Frost safety, minimum as follows:


-

-10 C in normal cold rooms


-30 C externally (e.g. container ramp, cold hall)
---> depending on the minimum ambient and/or external temperature
-40 C in freezer rooms

Page 114 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

System separator (water/antifreeze) in the sprinkler pipes is to be


provided as follows:
Fitting the system separator preferably directly after the alarm valve and/or
flow indicator in the sprinkler installations room (alarm valve station)
Please note: If using antifreeze based on glycol, then it has to be ensured
that the antifreeze quantity per extinguishing area is restricted (e.g. to 150
l in accordance with FM) and/or in accordance with the relevant
extinguishing period (e.g. 1 minute in accordance with VdS).
---> Decentralised position of the system separator (non-return valves)
water/frost protection
---> Sprinkler system in this area supplied as a dual chamber system
System separator via non-return valves, shut off and/or maintenance slide
valve and supply fittings in accordance with guidelines
Ventilation (e.g. air pot, venting valve, venting pipe with ball valve) at all
high areas of the pipeline
Please note: The venting pipes lines are to be installed up to the
operating level. Automatic vents are not to be used due to the risk of leaks.
Expansion vessel
Filling and draining fitting
Please note: Preferably, an automatic pressure maintenance with a
separate antifreeze reservoir and a jockey pump should be provided.
For economic reasons, a joint reservoir may be supplied for all systems
(also with different frost safety and/or antifreeze concentration). In this
case, the concentration of the frost protection agent in the reservoir must
meet the highest requirements.

Variant Dry sprinkler

Installation of suspended dry sprinklers (e.g. Vikin VK501)


Please note: The usage limits (e.g. room height) must be taken into account

Variant Drying system

Preferably, a decentralised tandem-drying systems (tail-end station) in respect


of a wet system with:
- Pressure maintenance
- Additional dry alarm valve fitting with a slide
Please note: The usage limits (e.g. warehouse goods, room height) must be
taken into account
Positioning the wet-dry station in case of peripheral alarm valve stations in the
reycling area, above the panelled ceiling chain conveyor with a central alarm
vave fitting
Please note: The wet-dry station must be accessible in case of fire!

Sprinkler pipes made from galvanised steel pipe

Drain-off connectors at the end of main and distribution pipes


Please note: The drain-off connectors are to be installed in galvanised pipe
up to 1.50 m above the floor level, fitted with 2 shut-off fittings to prevent the
alarm group being activated during drainage.

Variant electric trace heating system


In exceptional cases (e.g. connecting pipes for wall hydrants in refrigerated and
unheated areas, main pipe extinguishing water in an unheated installation shaft

Page 115 of 215

5.4

5.5

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

on the faade) an electric trace heating system with automatic regulating and heat
insulation may be provided if required.
Please note: In accordance with the fire protection concept, smoke and heat
extraction systems (SHVS) may be required.
Light shafts with large volumes will result especially in cold rooms with low
clearing heights.
In this case, there will be a preference for the provision of separate SHVS flaps in
the panelled ceiling to guarantee the sprinkler function (sprinkler activation),
alternatively upstands as a smoke curtain in the area of the light shafts, the
installation has to be in agreement with Construction works
Otherwise, additional sprinklers are to be fitted directly underneath the SHVS
dome.
Should, in accordance with regulations, there be a requirement for automatic
smoke and heat outlets, then, additional sprinklers are to be fitted directly
underneath the SHVS dome.
Wall hydrants
If wall hydrants are required in the warehouse, then these have to be provided as
follows:

Positioning and design of wall hydrants in accordance with the fire protection
concept (connecting and/or supplying areas, water quantity, extinguishing
period)

Wall hydrants with a hose reel and rubber-weaved hose

Wall hydrants are to be connected to a separate extinguishing water pipe with


alarm valve and/or flow indicator
Please note: A pressure reducer (e.g. 3-8 bar) is to be fitted in front of each
wall hydrant. Connecting pipes for wall hydrants near high racks are to be
installed in such a way that they do not restrict the installation of high racks.

Number of alarm groups (alarm valve and/or flow switch) as follows:


separate alarm group for wall hydrants in frost-free areas
separate alarm group for wall hydrants in normal and freezer rooms and
externally
Please note: To reduce alarm groups with antifreeze, the following cold rooms
and areas are to be supplied with a uniform frost protection:
- Frost protection for freezer rooms Freezer and SEL Freezer (-24 C) also
for normal cold rooms and external areas
-

Frost protection (system separator) for hydrants to be analog with the


sprinkler system

Connecting pipes made from black steel pipe, preferably with power coating
(RAL 3000), alternatively with a corrosion protective coat and top coat (RAL
3000)

External hydrants
If external hydrants are required, then these have to be provided as follows:

Positioning and design of external (above-ground and underground hydrants)


in accordance with the fire protection concept (connecting and/or supplying
areas, water quantity, extinguishing period), at least every 100 m
Please note: Underfloor hydrants are to be fitted with an indicating label.

Connection of the external hydrants to a separate underground, extinguishing


water ring main (starting from the Pump house)
Please note: If required, pressure reducers are to be fitted.

Page 116 of 215

5.6

5.7

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

If required: pump(s) for hydrant systems are to be separated as dieselpowered or electric-powered hydrant pump(s)
Please note: Number and type of pumps in accordance with the provisions of
the implemented Directive and fire protection concept.
If the public water supply can guarantee the extinguishing water quantity and
pressure for the hydrants, then hydrant pump(s) are not required.

Jockey pump for hydrant system (pressure maintenance for hydrant network)

Installation hydrant pump(s) in the separate building (Pump house) next to


tank

Installation pump pressure pipe for the extinguishing water hydrants between
the Pump house and the external, underground hydrants

The pump pressure pipe for the extinguishing water (underground) is to be


provided, preferably, in ductile (expandable and/or formable) grey cast iron
with Tyton-Sit joints
Please note: Plastic (PE) in accordance with VdS CEA 4001 is also
admissible, if it is explicitly approved by the accepting expert and by the client
(in writing).
Depending on the installation of the ground connections, concrete abutments
are required.

Control/regulating of the hydrants (e.g. hydrant pumps) is to be independent


(see Monitoring/Alerting)

Hand held fire extinguishers


Hand held fire extinguishers are to be provided as follows:

Number, type and location of hand the held fire extinguishers in accordance
with the fire protection concept

Hand held fire extinguishers with ABC powder (6 kg) for general areas (e.g.
plant and/or machine rooms, next to and/or in the wall hydrants)

Hand held fire extinguishers with CO2 (6 kg) for the IT server room
inAdministration

Monitoring and alerting


Monitoring and alerting of the sprinkler system is to be provided as follows:

Recording of all operational and error messages from the sprinkler systems
and, if necessary, the hydrants (e.g. slides, alarm locking slides, anti-flooding,
air temperature) is to be central via the control/regulating of the sprinkler
system with transmission to the fire alarm system (FAS)
Please note: The transmission of the operational and error messages via the
fire alarm system (FAS) and/or dialling device of the intruder alarm system is
to be executed as direct a error message chain to a constantly occupied point.
If only one sprinkler pump (e.g. in accordance with FM or NFPA) is used, then
the following additional operational and error messages of the sprinkler pump
have to be transmitted as a single message to the constantly occupied point:
- Sprinkler pump operation
- Automatic OFF for the sprinkler pump ( OFF for the sprinkler pump and
manual operation)
- Collective error function, sprinkler pump, (all errors at the switching
cabinet for the sprinkler pump and, if necessary, the monitoring level for
the diesel retention reservoir)
- Collective error function for the pump station (e.g. temperature monitoring,
fill level for the extinguishing water retention tank)
In addition, the operational and error messages for the sprinkler system are to
be connected to the superordinate ICA technology (Refer to ICA works).
Page 117 of 215

6.1

6.2

6.3

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Pressure switches at the alarm valve station (in rising main) for a direct signal
to fire alarm system (FAS)

Acoustic alarm by mechanical alarm bells at the alarm valve station


Please note: In agreement with the accepting expert, several alarm valves
may be connected to a joint alarm bell. In this case, a replacement clapper
has to be provided in the sprinkler installations room (alarm valve station).
Alternatively, the acoustic alarm may be executed via a siren with activation
from the fire alarm system. In this case, an additional pressure switch has to
be provided with a connection to the fire alarm system.

Optional: fire service operating unit (FSOU), fire service display panel (FSDP),
fire service key depot (FSKD) in accordance with coordination with the local
fire services

The fire alarm system is to be supplied by the Electrical works.


3.3.6

Electrical system

General
The electricity supply for the Distribution Centre is to be provided as medium
voltage.
The required connected load is based on the output calculation, taking into
account the realistic simultaneity factors plus approx. 20 % reserve (for future
increases in the output requirement).
Please note: The reserve for the refrigeration system is to be included in the
output requirement (refer to additional electric connections).
If the plot enables the optional extension of the warehouse building, then
the required reserve capacity has to be taken into account in respect of
sizing the system (e.g. transformer, EPAS, main cable conduits).
The required connected load is to be based on:

Output requirement, consumers in the Distribution Centre, plus 20 %

Output requirement, consumers in an optional extension (if possible), plus 20


%

Output requirement, Refrigeration system

Supplying and/or connecting energy


The energy supply and connections for the Distribution Centre is to be executed
in accordance with the provisions of the public utility company (PUC).
Energy for the Distribution Centre is to be provided as follows:

Connect the energy supply via a medium voltage, main distributor (MVMD) in
the installations room for medium voltage main distributor (MVMD)
Please note: If the provisions of the PUC require an external installation of
the MVMD, then the connections for the energy supply are to be in a separate
building at the periphery of the plot.
The installations room for MVMD is to be provided with pressure relief (e.g.
overpressure valve).

MVMD is to be introduced, preferably, via a ring cable feed (redundant


execution) instead of via a stub cuble

Installation of the utility line for the energy sources is to be between the plot
border and the installations room MVMD and/or an underground transformer

Transformer
The voltage transformation from medium to low voltage is to be executed via a
transformer system.
Page 118 of 215

6.4

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

The transformer system is to be provided as follows:

2x transformer (minimum 50 % redundance), preferably as a dry transformer


(e.g. Cast-resin transformer) or alternatively as an oil transformer for parallel
operation
Please note: If spare parts for the selected transformer type can be
guaranteed as immediately available, then it is possible to use only one
transformer.

Installation of transformers in transformer room


Please note: If the provisions of the PUC require an external installation for
the main medium voltage distribution (MVMD), then the arrangement for the
transformer is to be next to the MVMD in a separate building at the periphery
of the plot

Control/regulating is to be independent

The following requirements apply for the design and dimensioning:

Dimensioning the transformer output based on the output calculation (incl.


reserve for future increases in the output requirement)
Please note: To optimise the efficiency of the transformer levels, utilisation
during normal operation should be approx. 75 %.

Emergency Power Assist System (EPAS)


In case of power failure, the complete warehouse operation (100 %) must be
maintained by an Emergency Power Assist System (EPAS).
EPAS is to be provided as follows:

Diesel emergency generator (single unit) for 3-phase current with air cooling
Please note: The batteries for the electric starting device have to be provided
with sufficient capacity.

Installation of the EPAS in the technical room for Emergency Power Assist
System

Exhaust gas from the EPAS via the roof with:


-

Diesel reserve tank with:


-

Exhaust gas silencer


Volume for minimum 48 h EPAS with a maximum load, plus a reserve for
cyclical test run
Please note: The volume has to be a guaranteed minimum volume for 48
h EPAS with maximum load, as well as refilling, in spite of the cyclical test
run.
Double-skinned wall installation or a separate catchment basin
Tank exhaust ventilation system to the outside air
Filling pipe externally (faade), up to approx. 1.50 m above upper edge of
the plot (with the catchment basin for the surplus diesel positioned under
the supports for the refilling valves)
Fill level display (in addition to automatic fill-level monitoring)

Installation of the diesel reserve tank in the technical room for EPAS room (if
permitted)
Please note: If required, the diesel reserved tank is to be separated for
technical fire protection.

The input and output air flows for cooling and combustion air are to be,
preferably, via weather protection grilles in the faade, alternatively via inlet
and outlet bends via the roof, each with:
-

Fitted, motor-powered, shut-off valve (OPEN/CLOSED)


Silencer
Page 119 of 215

6.5

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

Independent control/regulating with at least the following functions:


-

28.02.2014

Pre-heating oil for the Emergency Power Assist System


Automatic start EPAS, in case of power failure
(voltage monitoring LVMD)
Automatic switching from grid to isolated operation in LVMD, in case of
failure (Power failure in the grid)
Automatic and synchronised switching from isolated to grid operation in
LVMD after reconnection
Please note: Coordination with PUC, if agreement is required!
Operating message (activation), EPAS to ICA technology
Error message, EPAS to ICA technology
Reporting low level in the diesel reserve tank EPAS
Optional: load shedding signals to ICA, for indirect load shedding
(overload protection EPAS)
Optional: load connection signals to ICA technology for indirect load
connection and/or consumers (e.g. lighting)
(Ensuring minimum load and/or minimum utilisation EPAS)
Automatic and synchronised switching from grid to isolated operation
without power failures im test run for EPAS (parallel operation)
Please note: Coordination with PUC, if agreement is required!

Regulating settings (extract) as follows:


-

Automatic switch-on in case of power failure:


* Switch-on delay after power failure (in general 2-3 seconds)
* Connecting isolated operation after approx. 5-10 seconds start-up EPAS
(nominal speed e.g. 1500 U/min)
Automatic switch-off after reconnection
* Checking measuring for the voltage (in general 1 minute), then
synchronised switching from isolated to grid operation, when necessary
* Delay for EPAS (approx. 5 minutes), after switching from isolated to grid
operation, then automatic switch-off for EPAS

The following requirements apply for the design and dimensioning:

Dimensioning the generator output in accordance with the output calculation


(including a reserve for future increases in output requirement)
Please note: Reactive power compensation is deactivated during generator
operation.

USB system, PC sockets (if required)


If the public grid is very unreliable and/or frequent short-term power failures are to
be expected, then an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) is to be provided for PC
sockets.
Please note: The uninterruptible power supply for server technology in the IT
server room will normally be provided by the client (IT Dept.).

Page 120 of 215

6.6

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

The following general requirements apply for the USB system for PC sockets:

Installation of the USB system either in the workshop or installations room in


Administration
---> Taking into account cooling

Separate electrical circuit for PC sockets (1 double socket for each socket
combination)

Marking the PC sockets (e.g. red cover)

Independent control/regulating

Low voltage distribution


General
Low voltage distribution is divided in low voltage main distribution (LVMD) and in
low voltage sub distribution (SD).
The following general requirements apply for the low voltage distribution (main
and sub distribution):

Distribution network as a TNS network (5-conductor system with separate


neutral and protective conductor) from transformer to consumers

Installation of the distribution cables on galvanised cable conduits (cable trays


and/or wide-span cable ladders) with:
System-related moulded parts for directional changes
Closure of the channel ends with blank-off plates
Covers for external areas (e.g. roof)
Cable ladders in inclined zones (with sheet covering up to 2 m above the
finished floor in the warehouse area and completely in the IT server room
in Administration)
- Sound and, where necessary, fire protection closure of wall openings
(including, among others, in offices)
Please note: The cables must be installed separately, divided into energy and
data cables (high and low voltage cables) as follows:
- Wall ducts with a barrier strip between the high and low voltage cables
(high voltage cables in the top chamber, low voltage cables in the bottom
chamber)
- Separate cable conduits for high voltage cables in all areas
- Separate cable conduits for low voltage cables in all areas
-

In agreement with the client (IT), it is possible to jointly install IT low-voltage


cables (e.g. IT system, ZUKO (Access Control), telephone) with general lowvoltage cables. In this case, the general low-voltage cables have to be
separated from the low-voltage IT cables using a barrier strip.
In general, approx. 200 mm (separate area for low-voltage IT cables or
separate cable route) is to be taken into account and reserved for the lowvoltage IT cables.
The routing plan for the cable conduits is to be agreed with the client (IT
Dept.).
The maximum width of the cable conduits in areas with sprinkler
protection, as ceiling protection through warehouse sprinklers
(previously ESFR sprinkler) and/or non-warehouse sprinkler (previously
CMSA and/or CMDA sprinkler), should not exceed 300 mm to avoid
spray obstruction.

Surface-mounted installation of the connecting pipes in plastic channels


and/or pipes (galvanised steel pipes up to 2 m above the finished floor in the
warehouse area)

Page 121 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Install the connecting pipes in cable loops for plastered-in installations (in
ceiling cavity)

Connections for consumers (Refer to Construction and M&E works and


additional consumers) via sockets and/or fixed connections
Please note: All electric radiators are to be fitted with a fixed connection.

Distribution cabinets are to be equipped with a minimum of the following:


-

Power switches/Contactor/Relay in accordance with the technical


requirements
Please note: Safety-related switching is to be fitted with certified switching
device components (PNOZ or equivalent).
Safety-related switching via control (SPS or ICA) is not permitted!
Safety devices (Refer to safety measures)
Please note: Coordination with M&E works, especially ICA technology

Safety measures, a minimum as follows:


-

Circuit breakers (automatic fuse)


Earth leakage circuit breakers (ELCB-switches)
Please note: ELCB-switches, minimum for plug-in connections (sockets)
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Overload protection (Refer to internal lightning protection)
Potential equalisation (Refer to external lightning protection)
Please note: Potential equalisation (main potential equalisation) with
integration of the earthing system for lightning protection, protective and
normal conductor (PE and N), metal pipes in building as well as metal
constructions)
Additional potential equalisation is required in the technology centre and
distributor rooms of Information and Communication Technology (ICT).
Reactive power compensation (inductive users to be compensated
individually or in groups)

Safety measures are to be adjusted for local conditions and, if applicable, for
additional legal and official operational requirements.
Please note: In accordance with national regulations, switching off and
protecting circuits of external conductors may also include neutral, and
possibly, protective conductors.
As a result the components for switching off circuits must have the respective
polarity (e.g. 2 instead of single pole for alternating current 230 V and 4
instead of 3-pole for 3-phase current 400 V).
Please note: Measures have to be taken when installing cables, so that the
insulation of the cables is not damaged. For example, all sharp edged openings
for cable wall openings must be deburred (e.g. openings and/or drill holes,
borings in the panels of cold-storage rooms).
The following requirements apply for the design and dimensioning:

Reserving space (approx. 20 %) for distribution cabinets and cable conduits

The low voltage main distribution (LVMD) is to be provided as follows:

Positioning and/or arranging the LVMD cabinets in the LVMD installations


room
Please note: LVMD cabinets are to be arranged in such a way as to provide
enough space for an optional photovoltaic system (switch cabinets for
photovoltaic - dimensions 2x approx. 800/800/2000 mm).

Page 122 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Distribution cabinets as steel sheet, floor standing distributor


Please note: Distribution cabinets with plan pocket, inside the distribution
cabinet door with a circuit diagram for distribution and a wiring diagram.

Power factor correction


Please note: The power factor correction has to be measured and agreed
with the public utility company (PUC) and centrally compensated.
All consumers (e.g. refrigeration system), which are supplied by the
client, are to be provided without compensation and, therefore, have to
be taken into account for the central compensation system.

Separate main electricity meter, complete system, (in addition to main


electricity meter from PUCs) with an M-BUS interface for remote meter
reading (automatic reading of consumption data)
Please note: An interface as pulse output is error-prone, and is only to be
used in justified exceptional cases. Interface requirements are to be discussed
with ICA technology.
The electricity meter and/or consumption value, complete system, is to include
the Emergency Power Assist System electricity (feeding in internal grid).
--->Selection of a suitable position for the separate main electricity meter,
complete system, overall, alternatively a separate meter for the
Emergency Power Assist System electricity and summarisation of both
meter and consumption values via ICA technology

Meter for the refrigeration system electricity with an M-BUS interface for
remote meter reading (automatic reading of consumption data)
Please note: An interface as pulse output is error-prone, and is only to be
used in justified exceptional cases. Interface requirements are to be discussed
with ICA technology.

The low voltage sub distribution (LVSD) is to be provided as follows:


Administration

Positioning and/or arranging sub distribution cabinets (LVSD) administrating in


the ELT room (1st floor)

Distribution cabinets as steel sheet, floor or wall-mounted distributor


Please note: Distribution cabinets with plan pocket inside the distribution
cabinet door with a circuit diagram for distribution and a wiring diagram

Connection of the LVSD cabinets starting from the warehouse via the ceiling
cavity on the 1st floor of Administration

Installation of the distribution cables on cable conduits in external wall areas in


the ceiling cavity (ground and first floor)
Please note: A separate cable tray (width approx. 200 mm) is to be reserved
for low-voltage IT cables. Routing is to be agreed project-specifically with the
client (IT Dept.).

Installation of the connecting cables (for e.g. switches, sockets) below the
suspended ceiling and in stud walls (plastered-in installation)

Connecting the internal workplaces via free-standing installation columns

Wall duct (dimensions: 213 x 100 mm) made from steel sheet, below windows
on the external wall, offices (ground and first floor)

Connecting wall ducts on the ground floor starting from the ceiling cavity via
vertical cable ducts (surface-mounted installation)

Page 123 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Connecting wall ducts on 1st first floor starting from ground floor via empty,
vertical conduits in the external and/or ceiling

Please note: 1 set of empty conduits consisting of 2 empty conduits (DN 50)
for power cables and 2 empty conduits (DN 50) for data cables is to be
installed at intervals of every 3 to 4 windows. Empty conduits are to be
integrated in the middle of the wall ducts, separated by a barrier strip.
The following supply cables are to be supplied for connections in wall ducts:
Data double socket:
2 supply cables (data cables) per connection
Double socket:
1 supply cable (power cable) for 2 double
sockets (looped)
Please note: To guarantee the supply of office workplaces, independent from
room layout, a complete set with power and data double socket should be
installed in the wall below every second window (Refer to Additional power
consumers/Sockets).
To avoid sound transmission, the wall ducts in partition walls have to be filled (e.g.
mineral wool) and, if required, to be decoupled and/or cut.
Warehouse

Positioning and/or arranging sub-distribution (LVSD) cabinets in the main


consumption areas in the warehouse (e.g. GI/GO Counter area), partition wall
between the refrigerated and non-refrigerated warehouse area)
Please note: It is not permitted to install and/or arrange sub-distribution
(LVSD) cabinets in the ceiling cavity (fire load and emergency exit
situation)
Automation devices for ICA technology are to be located, preferably, in electric
sub-distribution cabinets (coordination with ICA works).
Automation devices are to be fitted directly onto the mounting plate of wall or
floor mounted switch cabinets as well as in the field for wall-mounted systems.
All system components are to be easily accessible.
All operating elements such as controller, manual operation of entry and exit
modules etc. are to be located inside the switch cabinets in order to prevent
any inappropriate handling when physically possible.
Switch cabinets with joint ICA and power units must be clearly separated for
the power assemblies and automation devices. Joint use of wiring channels is
not permitted.

Installation of the distribution cables on cable conduits in external wall areas


above and below the warehouse windows as follows:
- Cable conduits for high voltage cables, below windows
- Cable conduits for low voltage, above windows
Please note: In cold rooms, distribution cables are to be installed in cable
conduits, preferably in the ceiling cavity above the panelled ceiling (however
not between the floor slab for the technical/M&E room and the panelled
ceiling), alternatively, below the panelled ceiling.
Sockets are to be installed at intervals on the cable conduits for maintenance
in ceiling cavity.
A separate cable tray (width approx. 150 mm) is to be supplied for the wiring
(low voltage) from access points over the centre of the high rack and Block
stacking area which will be executed by the client (IT Dept.).

Page 124 of 215

6.7

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Installing connecting cables (for e.g. sockets, fixed connections) on external


and partition walls and/or columns (surface-mounted installation)

Electricity meter for the haulage container (if applicable), for manual reading

GI/GO Counter areas

Installation of the distribution cables on cable conduits in the ceiling cavity


(ground and first floor)

Installation of the connecting cables (for e.g. switches, sockets) below the
suspended ceiling in the stud walls (plastered-in installation)

Wall duct (213 x 100 mm) in steel sheet under the windows on office walls
(ground and 1st floor) as well as circumferentially under storage units and/or
desks in the GI/GO Counters

Connections for the wall ducts in ground and 1st floor starting from the ceiling
cavity via vertical cable ducts (surface-mounted installation)

Please note: To guarantee the supply for office workplaces, independently from
the room layout, a complete set with power and data double socket should be
installed in the wall below every second window (Refer to Additional power
consumers/Sockets).
To avoid sound transmission, wall ducts in partition walls have to be filled (e.g.
mineral wool) and, if required, to be decoupled and/or cut.
Site plans

Install the distribution and connecting cables (e.g. for door units, light masts,
haulage container, Gatehouse) in empty conduits underground

Provide a minimum number of empty conduits in the ground for the following:
4 empty conduits (DN 150) between the warehouse (e.g. GI desk area)
and the Gatehouse as a reserve
- 2 empty conduits (DN 150) between the Gatehouse and the IT server
room of the administration offices for IT low-voltage cables
- 1 empty conduit (DN 100) between the Gatehouse and Gatehouse
turnstile
- 1 empty conduit (DN 100) between the Gatehouse and HGV
Weighbridges
- 1 empty conduit (DN 100) between the Gatehouse and cameras for the
HGV Weighbridge (to detect both the front and rear licence plate)
- 1 empty conduit (DN 100) between the Gatehouse and photoelectric cell
(position control) for the HGV Weighbridge
- 1 empty conduit (DN 100) between the Gatehouse and traffic lights for the
barriers
- 1 empty conduit (DN 100) between the Gatehouse and operating terminals
for the HGV Weighbridge and/or AC, GSA
- 1 empty conduit (DN 100) between the operating terminal and the barriers
Please note: The installation and positioning of the HGV Weighbridge,
including its components (e.g. operating terminal, cameras, position controls,
barriers, traffic lights), and their interconnection are to be agreed on a projectby-project basis with the client (Construction, Logistics, Purchasing) and the
supplier of the HGV Weighbridge.
-

Maximum monitoring
Maximum monitoring (control of electric power input) is to be guaranteed by ICA
technology.
Page 125 of 215

6.8

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Maximum output and measuring intervals (e.g. 15-minute value as power


consumption) is to be determined in Agreement with the client and PUC.
Consumers are to be connected decentralised via an automation station from ICA
technology. Load shedding stages are to be divided in accordance with the
following priority stages:
Stage 1: Press container (e.g. 50%)

Stage 2: Recharging devices in stages (e.g. 50%)

Stage 3: Lighting, warehouse and external area (e.g. 50%)


(if permitted, in accordance with regulations, especially workplace regulations)

In addition, a load shedding signal is to be provided for the refrigeration system.


The regulating for the refrigeration system guarantees an adjustable load
shedding and/or power limitation for the refrigeration system (e.g. 50 or 100%).
Wiring including the required power switches, contactor and relay is to be
provided in accordance with the function and allocation by Electrical works.
Lightning protection
Lightning protection is to be provided for internal and external lightning protection
in accordance with regulations.
The following, general requirements apply for the installation and design of
lightning protection:
External lightning protection:

Interceptor with:
-

Lightning conductor:
-

Mesh netting on the roof (incl. parapet) in accordance with regulations


Please note: integration of the metal, building envelope in the lightning
protection system
Lightning rods in accordance with the protective angle and/or rolling
lightning method for technical installations on the roof (e.g. roof ventilators,
external units for split air conditioners, condenser refrigeration system)
Preferably installed in concrete supports
Please note: Scope of services Construction works

Earth termination system with:


-

Foundation earthing as a closed ring, earth electrode and/or metal


reinforcement from a concreted-in point in the ground
Please note: The total earth resistance (guidelines: <2 Ohm) is to be
proven.

Please note: Exterior lightning protection is to be combined with earthing and


potential equalisation (interior lightning protection).
The design and installation for the lightning protection system (e.g. mesh width,
protective angle, rod distance) is to be in accordance with the lightning protection
class. Lightning protection Class 3 (recommendation in accordance with VdS
2010) applies as a guideline.

Page 126 of 215

6.9

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Internal lightning protection:

Overload/surge protection switches:


Course protection in the main distribution feed
Medium protection in the sub-distribution feed
Fine protection in the EDP technology feed and/or in accordance to
requirement
Please note: All cables with metallic components, that are routed from
internally to externally, are to be provided with surge protection (also fibre
optic cables, if they have a metallic shield).
-

Potential equalisation with conduction, via earthing system


Please note: Potential equalisation (main potential equalisation) with
integration of the earthing system for lightning protection, protective and
normal conductor (PE and N), metal pipes in building and metal
constructions).
Additional potential equalisation is required for plant, machine and distributor
rooms of Information and Communication Technology (ICT).

Integrate racks (e.g. high rack warehouse), and other metal structures (e.g.
chain conveyor, cigarette cage) in the lightning protection system e.g. in the
area of columns, by positioned by terminal lugs

Separation spacing (minimum distance of the lightning conductor to


electrically conductive materials

Marking the connection points and separating points on site

Protection of the connection points and separating points with an approved


position or impact protection
Please note: Coordination of the impact protection with Construction works

Frost protection heating system, freezer rooms (alternative variant)


To avoid freezing and/or freeze swelling, the floor underneath the freezer rooms
(Freezer and SEL Freezer) is to be heated via a Frost protection heating
system.
The frost protection heating system is preferably to be warm glycol floor heating
(Refer to Heating works).
In some justified exceptions, the frost protection heating system can alternatively
be provided using electrical heating rods or electrical heating mats. In this case,
the installation is to be executed by Electrical works.
Please note: The Frost protection heating system is to be agreed with
Construction works.
For an optional extension of the warehouse area for freezers, the floor slab
in the cold hall is to be provided as analog to the floor slab for freezer
rooms (Refer to floor slab, Freezer rooms). Hence, the frost protection
heating system is to be prepared accordingly.
In exceptional cases, the frost protection heating system is, in general, to be
provided as follows:
Variant 1 (electric heating rods) refer to sample project (principle detail)

Frost protection heating system with replaceable electric, heating rods in


protective pipes (refer to sample project - principle detail)
Please note: Due to the replaceability of heating rods, redundance is not
required.

Installation of the heating rods and protective pipe below the lower floor slab
with a connection side (1 pipe end) approx. 1 m above the upper edge of the
upper floor slab
Please note: Number, position and minimum heat output of the heating rods
is to be determined product-specifically in accordance with the field
temperature calculation.
Page 127 of 215

6.10

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Planning by manufacturer and/or supplier Messrs. Oheim (Refer to


Manufacturer list)

Protective pipes for heating rods and temperature sensor as galvanised steel
pipe ( 11/2)

Independent control/regulating with:


-

Switch cabinet outside the freezer rooms


2 temperature sensors (100 % Redundance)
Voltage monitoring and error messaging in case of power failure

Regulating settings (extract) as follows:

Automatic ON/OFF switch for the heating rods at a floor temperature of


+4C switching hysteresis (e.g. 1 K)
Please note: Prior to concreting the lower floor slab, the protective pipes are to
be subjected to a pressure test.
To punctually recognise any contamination (blockages) in protective pipes, an
additional test (e.g. via an extendable, rolling glass fibre rod, 11 mm) has to be
carried out following the concreting-in of the protective pipes and the installation
of the lower and upper floor slabs.
Technical support for Variant 1 is to be guaranteed by the manufacturers/
suppliers(Refer to Manufacturers/Suppliers/Products).
-

If, in exceptional cases, implementing Variant 1 (electric heating rods) is not


possible, alternatively the Frost protection heating system may be supplied as
follows, after mandatory coordination with the client (Lidl Int.):
Variant 2 (electric heat mats)

Frost protection heating system as electric heat mat

2 heating circuits (100 % redundance)


Please note: Heat output is to be in accordance with a special calculation,
however to a minimum of approx. 10 W/m per heating circuit

Installation of the heat mats across the whole area above the lower floor slab,
between the vapour barrier and thermal insulation

Independent control/regulating with:


-

Switch cabinet outside the freezer rooms


2 temperature sensors (100 % redundance)

Regulating settings as follows:

Automatic ON/OFF switching for the heat mats at a floor temperature of


+4C switching hysteresis (e.g. 1 K)
Please note: Prior to concreting the upper floor slab, a function test of the frost
protection heating system has to be carried out.
Lane heating system, Freezer rooms
-

To prevent the formation of ice as well as the door seals freezing, the floor by the
door of the freezer rooms is to be heated via a lane heating system (Freezer and
SEL Freezer).
Please note: The lane heating system is to be coordinated with Construction
works.
For an optional extension of the warehouse area for freezers, the floor slab
in the cold hall is to be provided as analog to the floor slab for freezer
rooms (Refer to floor slab, Freezer rooms). Hence, the frost protection
heating system is to be prepared accordingly (Refer to floor slab, Freezer
rooms).
The lane heating systems, which are required in this case, will only be
installed after positioning of the door during the course of restructuring
measures.
Lane heating system as follows:

Page 128 of 215

6.11

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Lane heating system as an electric heat mat

Installation of heating mats, sub-divided for the heating surfaces on the warm
and cold sides of the door as well as over the whole area within the upper
floor slabs, with the following dimensions:
-

Width: wider than the door width of 3.00 m (plus corner areas)
Length (cold side of door): approx. 2.50 m
Length (warm side of door): approx. 1.50 m
Installation depth: approx. 4 cm, but no deeper than 5 cm below the top of
the upper floor slab

2 heating circuits (100% redundance), for each heating surface on the warm
and cold sides of the door
Please note: Heat output in accordance with a special calculation, however,
minimum of approx. 350 W/m per heating circuit (convective heat output is in
particular influenced by the temperature difference between the lane surface
and/or floor slab and circulating air, as well as the air speed of the circulating
air flow from the air cooler). The surface temperature of the lane and/or floor
slab must be a minimum of +5 to +8 C over the whole surface area.

Independent control/regulating with:


-

Switch cabinet outside the freezer rooms, for each heating surface on the
warm and cold sides of the door; if this position is not possible, then the
switch cabinet must be heated
2 temperature sensors (100% redundance), for each heating surface on
the warm and cold sides of the door
Please note: Install the temperature sensor in level, heat mats and
centrally arranged between heating cables

Regulating settings as follows:

Automatic ON/OFF switch for the heat mats at +12 to +15C switching
hysteresis (e.g. 1 K), however dependent on installation depth of the heat
mats
Please note: Take into account the temperature profile between lane
surface and/or floor slab and the level, temperature sensor for heat mats
(in general, an addition of approx. 1.5 Kelvin per cm of installation depth of
the heat mats).
Please note: Prior to concreting the upper floor slab, a function test of the lane
heating system must be be carried out.
-

Lighting (installation)
The following general requirements apply for the lighting:

Lights in form of LED lights

Dimmable ballasts (driver) for lights in relevant areas

Please note: The signal interface of the dimmable ballasts (1-10 V or DALI) is
to be provided in consultation with ICA works and must be suitable for the
lighting control system.

Colour temperature: 4000 K (neutral white)

Colour rendering index (CRI): >80

Service life: L80/B10, at least 50,000 hours (at 25C)

Light output (efficiency):


- at least 100 lm/W for general-diffuse luminaires
-at least 80 lm/W for recessed ceiling luminaires (e.g. offices)

Warehouse areas (refrigerated)

Page 129 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Damp proof, LED diffuser luminaires or compact LED spotlights with


polycarbonate cover (shatterproof cover)

Install the lights directly on panelled ceiling


(maybe with separate mounting rail)

Wiring via panelled ceiling (in separate mounting rail, if applicable)


Please note: If the wiring is to be carried out by using a mounting rail, then a
control cable for the dimmable ballasts must be installed through the mounting
rail at the same time. For open wiring, the installation of the control cable is to
be agreed with ICA works.
Lights should be oriented lengthways to any racking and/or aisles which are
present
Please note: Windows and/or spotlights are to be centrally arranged in
shelving aisles in accordance with (SHA), sprinkler and heating system
installations if required.
The orientation of the lights (longitudinal side) should preferably be
lengthways to the discharge direction of the air coolers.

Please note: Lights for freezer rooms must be suitable to -35 C.


Lights in chain conveyors levels supplied and installed by chain conveyor supplier.
Electrical works will only supply lighting above the last level of the chain
conveyors (underneath the panelled ceiling).
Container ramp / container storage space, cold hall
Damp proof, LED diffuser luminaires or compact LED spotlights
Install the lights directly on the trapezoidal sheet or indirectly and/or
suspended on a separate, continuous mounting rail
Please note: If the cabling is to be carried out using a mounting rail, a control
cable for the dimmable ballasts must be fed through the mounting rail at the
same time. For open wiring, the installation of the control cable is to be agreed
with ICA works.
Lights should be oriented lengthways to any racking and/or aisles which are
present
Please note: The light strips and/or compact spotlights are to be fitted in the
centre of the racking aisles in coordination with the smoke and heat vent,
sprinker, and, if applicable, heating installations.
Warehouse areas
RS/Chocolate

(non-refrigerated)

including

RS/Chocolate

and

GI/GO

Light strip system with LED lights


Please note: The distance between the lights in the light strip system
(spaces) must be selected in such a way that the required luminosity, and its
evenness in the user level, is optimal.
For die optional restructuring of the block stacking area to high rack, the light
strip system in the block stacking area has to be analog to the lighting for the
high rack (e.g. taking into account the reflection degree as analog to the high
rack; lights centrally arranged for the optional, high rack aisles).
Install the lights on a separate, continuous mounting rail, indirectly and/or
suspended on the trapezoidal sheet
Please note: The mounting rail is preferably to be provided with an integrated
power supply and control cable for the dimmable ballasts.
Orientation of the lights is to be as follows:
Page 130 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Lengthways to the racking and/or aisle in racking and block stacking area
Preferably lengthways to the faade and/or parallel to the main driveways
(Axes B and E) in the GI/GO areas, Non-Food returns, recycling
(simplified control and cabling in lighting areas)
Please note: The light strips and/or compact spotlights are to be arranged
centrally in the racking aisles in coordination with the smoke and heat vent,
sprinker, and, if applicable, heating installations.
In case of alternative, longitudinal orientation of lighting in the GI/GO zones,
the axes have to be installed analog to the lighting in the high rack and block
stacking area. In this case, the spacing of the lights in the light strip system
may be adjusted in accordance with the lighting calculation.
-

Office, common, and sanitary areas (administration offices, GI/GO Counter areas,
Gatehouse)

LED grid lamps for built-in, ceiling installation (suitable for computer
workstations) in offices, common rooms, and corridors

LED downlights for built-in, ceiling installation in sanitary areas

Installation of lights in the suspended ceiling (grid: e.g. 600/600 mm)

IT server room, Administration

Damp proof LED diffuser luminaires

Installation of the lights directly into ceiling (superstructure ceiling slab)

Orientation of lights: lengthways to maintenance aisles

Please note: For necessary work in the IT server room, in particular in case of a
faulty emergency power supply, the power supply for the entire lighting in IT
server rooms, Administration, is to be guaranteed via an uninterruptible power
supply (UPS).
This should preferably be carried out via a server USB, alternatively via USB
(battery installation) from the emergency lighting for the warehouse (coordination
with client (IT Dept.).
In addition, the lighting of the IT server room, Administration, is to be controlled by
motion detector to guarantee video recording (recognition) on entering the room.
Other areas (e.g. plant rooms, M&E rooms, ceiling cavity, emergency exits)

Damp proof LED diffuser luminaires

Installation on ceiling or walls and/or faade

Please note: Single lights, including emergency escape route lights for the
refrigeration plant room, are to be explosion-proof, according to the coolant used
(e.g. ammonia) (refer to EU Directive 94/9/EC, DIN EN 378).
External areas (faade lights, mast lights)

Compact LED spotlights

Installation of the lights on the faade of the warehouse and as mast lights on
the site (in areas with passenger car and HGV parking spaces)

Light point height, approx. 9.00 m above upper edge of the site

Page 131 of 215

6.12

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Please note: For surveilling the outside area by security guards (Security
concept), automatically adjustable spotlights have to be fitted to the faade. If the
intruder alarm is activated, then video cameras and spotlights will target the
affected area.
Details to be agreed with the client (Logistics Department).
Lighting (control/regulation)
Lighting control of warehouse areas (refrigerated and non-refrigerated) as well as
external areas is always via ICA technology (Refer to ICA works).
ICA Technology works are responsible for ensuring the appropriate operating
controls (operating control panels and push buttons), sensors (brightness sensor)
and timers as well as the control cabling up to the relevant control zones (Refer to
ICA works).
Control of the lights (1-10 V or DALI) is to be agreed with ICA works. In order to
reduce the standby consumption of ballasts, the lights must be disconnected from
the grid when lighting is not required in the respective control zone. The
necessary switchgears and control contacts are part of the Electrics teams scope
of delivery.
Lighting control of Administration, GI/GI Counter areas, ceiling cavity, freezer cell
and other areas are to be supplied by Electrical works.
In order to enable a central activation of the lighting, dependent on activation of
the intruder alarm system (generally from IAS), control contacts are to be
provided for these areas for external activation by the ICA works.
To control lighting in the administration offices and GI/GO offices, a fully integrated
lighting control system (2-channel multisensor), with at least the following
sensors and functions, is to be provided:

Motion detector with 2 detection areas (window side and internally) for
presence control with adjustable lead-out time

Light sensor with 2 detection areas (window side and internally) for automatic,
constant light control

2 separate control channels (1-10 V or DALI)

Regulating functions: presence control with adjustable lead-out time and


constant light control with adjustable brightness set point for each of the 2
separate control zones

Additionally with:

Series switch at the entrance to each room (office) for manual switching off by
interrupting the power supply to the lights.

Page 132 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Goods out 1
Goods outt 2
High rack
RS/Chocolate
GI/GO RS/Chocolate
Block stacking and
Non-Food
Non-Food return

0-100
(Dimming)

0-100
(Dimming)

Battery charging station

0-100
(Dimming)

Cold hall
(Axis B/C-D)

0-100
(Dimming)

Cold hall
(Axis D-F)

0-100
(Dimming)

Cooling

0-100
(Dimming)

Meat

0-100
(Dimming)

Chiller Buffer

0-100
(Dimming)

Recycling area

Container ramp
Container space

Freezer

and

0-100
(Dimming)

General OFF IAS

Goods in 2

Timer

0-100 %
(Dimming)
0-100 %
(Dimming)
0-100 %
(Dimming)
0-100 %
(Dimming)
0-100 %
(Dimming)
0-100 %
(Dimming)
0-100 %
(Dimming)
0-100 %
(Dimming)
0-100 %
(Dimming)

Goods in 1

Constant light control/regulating (2-Channel, multiple-sensor)

Lighting zones

in case of natural Light)Brightness sensor

Switch levels

Motion detector (Presence detector)

The cabling and/or wiring up of lights and contactors is to be in accordance with


the allocation of lighting zones and switch levels as follows:

Operation

Control panels GI/SEL dounters


and Administration
Control panels GI/SEL desks
and Administration
Control panels GI/SEL desks
and Administration
Control panels GI/SEL desks
and Administration
Control panels GI/SEL desks
and Administration
Control panels GI/SEL desks
and Administration
Control panels GI/SEL desks
and Administration
Control panels GI/SEL desks
and Administration
Control panels GI/SEL desks
and Administration
Control panels GI/SEL desks
and Administration as well as
control panel with push button
by entry (faade) recycling area
Control panels GI/SEL desks
and Administration as well as
control panel with push button
by entry (faade) recycling area

Control panels GI/SEL desks


and Administration as well as
control panel with push button
by entry (faade) recycling area

Control panels GI/SEL desks


and Administration as well as
control panel with push button
by high desk Chiller Buffer
Control panels GI/SEL desks
and Administration as well as
control panel with push button
by high desk Chiller Buffer

Control panels GI/SEL desks


and Administration as well as
control panel with push button
by high desk Chiller Buffer

Control panels GI/SEL desks


and Administration as well as
control panel with push button
by high desk Chiller Buffer.
In addition: manual Switches
(illuminated) in Freezer
Please
note:
Function
superordinate
to
ICA
technology)

Page 133 of 215

General OFF IAS

Timer

28.02.2014

Constant light control/regulating (2-Channel, multiple-sensor)

Motion detector (Presence detector)

Switch levels

Lighting zones

in case of natural Light)Brightness sensor

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

Operation

Control panels GI/SEL desks


and Administration and control
panel with push button by high
desk Chiller Buffer.
SEL Freezer

0-100
(Dimming)

GI/GO Freezer

0-100
(Dimming)

Freezer cell

On/Off

Fruit+Veg

0-100
(Dimming)

GI/GO Fruit+Veg

0-100
(Dimming)

Externally, general

On/Off

Administration (office)

0-100
(Dimming)

Administration
(common rooms and
halls)

On/Off

GI/GO-office

0-100
(Dimming)

GI/GO-Common
rooms
IT server room
Administration
Other Areas
e.g. Machine rooms)
Ceiling cavity

Switches by room entrance for


manual OFF switching and/or
dimming
(Overriding
Automatic mode)

Switches by room entrance for


manual OFF switching and/or
dimming
(Overriding
Automatic mode)
-

X
%

In addition: manual switches


(illuminated) in SEL Freezer
Please
note:
Function
superordinate
to
ICA
technology)
Control panels GI/SEL desks
and Administration and control
panel with push button by high
desk Chiller Buffer
Switches by door Freezer cell
(door contact switches)
1x switch on the inspection
door,
freezer
cell
for
background lighting
Control panels GI/SEL desks
and Administration and control
panel with push button by high
desk Chiller Buffer
Control panels GI/SEL desks
and Administration and control
panel with push button by high
desk Chiller Buffer

On/Off

On/Off

On/Off

Switches by room entrance

On/Off

Toggle switches by entrance


ceiling cavity

Please note: Presence detectors are motion detectors with automatically


adjustable, time delay control.

Page 134 of 215

6.13

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

The following requirements apply for the design and dimensioning:

Dimensioning lighting system based on lighting calculation:


-

Luminosity and evenness in accordance with regulations


Please note: In the warehouse and picking areas, an average luminosity
of a minimum of 200 lx is to be ensured on the working plane (0.2 m).
Evenness (g1) of luminosity minimum 0.5.
At all levels of the chain conveyor, a medium luminosity of a minimum of
200 lx is to be ensured (refer to information on performance and supply
limits for lighting warehouse areas, refrigerated)
The uniformity (g1) of the lighting should be at least 0.5.
Reflection factors of ceiling/floor/wall(racking): 70/20/50(20)%
Maintenance factors: 0.7 for warehouse and external areas; 0.8 for office

and common areas


The lightning is to be planned in such a way that the required luminosities
and uniformities are achieved with the lowest possible number of lights!
Safety lighting
Safety lighting (emergency escape lighting and emergency lights) is to be
provided as follows:

Design and position of emergency escape lighting and emergency lights in


accordance with requirements and regulations
Please note: the arrangement of the emergency escape lighting is to be
coordinated with the fixtures and fittings (e.g. shelves) and warehouse spaces
(e.g. palettes), (to guarantee recognisability).
Lights as LED lights (separate individual lights)
Please note: Emergency lights in freezer rooms are to be protected against
freezing and icing-up (e.g. by heating or interation in standard LED lights, if
possible and permitted for the particular product)

Power supply via a central battery system with separate sub-distributors in the
respective warehouse areas

Individual monitoring for all lights


Please note: It is not permitted to have circuit monitoring for LED lights, due
to the low current

The design of the safety lighting and the product selection must be such
that the required illuminosities and uniformities are achieved with the
lowest possible number of lights!
To signal loading and unloading of the blast freezer (to avoid collisions between
forklift trucks and order pickers at the entrance to the freezer), a flashing light is
to be provided at the rapid rise door (SEL freezer side).
The flashing light is switched ON/OFF via the door contact switch on the blast
freezer (at the same time as the ON/OFF switch is activated for the lighting in the
blast freezer).

Page 135 of 215

6.14

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Blinds/Blind control
Administration
The windows in Administration are to be fitted with electric, external blinds.
Blinds to be supplied by Construction works as follows:

Blind (hanging) with motor (drive)


Please note: In case of a faade with a row of windows, a blind motor has to
be fitted every 2 windows.
Couplings for the power supply of motors (Hirschmann coupling), also
supplied by Construction works.

Independent control/regulating with:


- Motor control units
- Central unit
- Level (floor) distributor
- Wind and rain sensor
- Brightness sensors (direction-oriented)
- Outdoor temperature sensor
Please note: Recommended brand for control/regulating: Somfy

Regulating settings are to be provided as follows:


Automatic opening of the blinds in conjunction with a wind and rain sensor
(e.g. limit wind speeds >10 m/s), with blocked manual operation during
this period.
- Triggering the blinds at wind speeds below this after blocking time (e.g. 20
min)
- Automatic closure of blinds at simultaneous activation of external
temperature sensor (e.g. limit for external temperature >26C) and
direction-oriented outdoor brightness sensor for the respective compass
direction
Please note: All control settings must be changeable.
-

Electrical works are to supply the following services:

Control switches for blinds at entrance doors

Installation, cabling and wiring including connecting all components (e.g.


motors, motor control units, central unit with level distributors, sensors, control
switches for blinds, however without the external hangings/suspension
elements)
Please note: All services up to the external face of the faade

GI/GO Counter areas


Windows of GI/GO offices are to be fitted with electric, external blinds.
The specifications are to be analog with the blind system for Administration.
Warehouse
Windows oriented towards South, Southeast and Southwest are to be fitted with
electric, external sun blinds.
Blinds to be supplied by Construction works as follows:

Blind (hanging) with motor (drive)


Please note: Couplings for the power supply of motors (Hirschmann
coupling) are also to be supplied by Construction works.

Page 136 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Independent control/regulating with:


- Motor control units
- Central unit
- Level (floor) distributor
- Wind and rain sensor
- Brightness sensors (direction-oriented)
- Internal temperature sensor
Please note: Recommended brand for control/regulating: Somfy

Regulating settings are to be provided as follows:

Automatic opening of the blinds if wind and rain sensor is activated (e.g.
limit wind speeds >10 m/s))
- Triggering the blinds at wind speeds below this after blocking time (e.g. 20
min)
- Automatic closure of blinds at simultaneous activation of external
temperature sensor (e.g. limit for external temperature >26C) and
direction-oriented outdoor brightness sensor for the respective compass
direction
Please note: All control settings must be changeable.
-

Electrical works are to supply the following services:

Installation, cabling and wiring including connecting all components (e.g.


motors, motor control units, central unit with level distributors, sensors)
Please note: All services up to the external face of the faade

6.15

Fire alarm system (FAS)

6.16

If required, in accordance with regulations or fire protection concept, a fire alarm system
(FAS) for early fire detection has to be supplied.
If FAS is required (regulation), then the following applies as a general rule:

FAS in BUS structure

Point detector (single smoke detector) as an optical smoke detector in:


-

General Administration rooms, GI/GO Counter areas (e.g. offices, plant


rooms, machine rooms, hallways)
Please note: Hallway ceiling cavities are to be fitted with additional smoke
detectors with indicators below the suspended ceilings.
IT server room, Administration (1x in room, 1x in cavity floors)
Warehouse (refrigerated area)
Please note: Alternatively, the installation of a line detector is also
possible. Point and/or line detectors must be suitable for ambient
temperatures up to -2C and/or air humidity over 90%.
Due to possible fog formation from the air humidifiers (scope of delivery
Refrigeration system) in the cold room Fruit+Veg, using point detectors as
an optical smoke detector should be avoided.

Point detector (single smoke detector) as a heat detector in:


-

Container ramp/Container storage area


Please note: Alternatively, the installation of a line detector is also
possible.
Fruit+Veg
Please note: Alternatively, the installation of a line detector is also
possible.
Common rooms (e.g. kitchenettes, smoking room)
Page 137 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

Drivers WCs in GI/GO common areas

Line detector (e.g. smoke aspirating systems, thermo cable) in:


-

Freezer and SEL Freezer


Container ramp/Container storage space (alternatively use point detector)
Please note: Line detectors are to to be suitable for ambient temperatures
up to -30C and/or air humidity over 90%.
In case of smoke aspirating systems detectors, these have to be fitted with
trace heating to avoid ice forming in aspirating openings and pipes as well
as error alarms. Otherwise, a compressed air cleaning system is to be
supplied for manual cleaning and/or de-icing of aspirating pipes (with
membrane in aspirating openings).

Linear detector (e.g. infrared detector with sender and recipient) in:
-

28.02.2014

Warehouse (non-refrigerated area)


Please note: Installation of the linear detector above the maximum
possible upper edge of warehouse goods (avoiding error alarm).
Alternatively using point detectors as an optical smoke detector is also
possible. In this case, the detectors have to be fitted in a higher position in
the high rack and block stacking area. These areas have to be monitored
in dual detector dependency.

Sirens (Positioning in accordance with the acoustic requirement)


Please note: Sound level minimum 75 dB(A) and minimum 10 dB(A) above
the noise interference level (e.g. taking into account the sound level of the
ventilators for the air cooler refrigeration system).

If required (e.g. for noise interference level above 110 dB(A)): flashlights
Please note: Flashlights are to be supplied in cold rooms Freezer and SEL
Freezer.

Independent control/regulating with:


-

Switch cabinet in the secretariat of Administration (ground floor)


Control unit at the entrance door of Administration and/or in accordance
with the requirements of the fire services with fire services route plans
Connecting to the flow monitor, sprinkler system (alarm valve)
Connecting to all fire protection doors
Please note: Fire protection doors are to be fitted with a fire alarm control
panel. Fire protection doors have to be controlled in such a way that, in
case of fire, the respective fire protection doors close off the affected
areas.
Connecting the FAS to the control centre of the local fire services
If required: Coupling the FAS with an electric loudspeaker system (ELS)
for evacuation announcement
Connecting (signal) the FAS to the intruder alarm system
---> Coordination with client (Procurement Dept.)
Connecting (signal) the FAS to the conveyors (e.g. chain conveyor)
Please note: To prevent any shifting of fire loads, all conveyors have to be
deactivated in case of fire (refer to fire monitoring guidelines for sprinkler
system).
---> Coordination with client (Procurement Dept.)
Connecting the FAS to the ICA technology
Please note: To prevent air speeds of over 1.5 m/s near sprinklers, all
ventilation systems have to be deactivated in case of fire (refer to the
guidelines for the sprinkler system).
---> Coordination with ICA technology

Page 138 of 215

6.17

6.18

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Electric Loudspeaker System (ELS)


For announcements by warehouse and Administration, these areas are to be
fitted with a digital and/or electric loudspeaker system (ELS).
The ELS is to be provided as follows:

Central (amplifier) to be installed in special cabinet

Ceiling loudspeaker in common rooms (e.g. changing, showers, staircase,


ground floor hallway, smoking room, non-smoking room)
Please note: If required (e.g. evacuation announcement by FAS), all rooms
(incl. offices) might have to be fitted with ceiling loudspeakers.

Pressure chamber loudspeaker in all warehouse areas (including plant and


machine rooms)

Pressure chamber loudspeaker in external areas (longitudinal warehouse


faade)

Microphone units in GI/SEL desks and Administration, secretariat (ground


floor)
Please note: The volume of each individual circuit is to be separately
controllable; single circuits are to be combined for announcements.

Separating ELS in the following circuits:


-

Administration
Warehouse
External area (longitudinal elevation of the warehouse and drivers WCs
GI/GO common rooms)

Independent control/regulating with:

Option for connecting the fire alarm system for evacuation announcement
Option for connecting the external devices (e.g. playing recorded
announcements)
Bells and intercom systems
-

The bells and intercom systems are to be provided as follows:


General
Video intercom systems consisting of:

Camera module with integrated video camera

Bell button module with bell buttons for each terminal

Loudspeaker module

Field for access control module

Field for information module

Administration

Video intercom system and door opener at the entrance door to Administration
linked to:
-

Secretariat (ground floor, left)


Secretariat (1st floor, left)
Secretariat (1st floor, right)

Bell button and door opener at corridor door (ground floor, left) to secretariat
(ground floor)

Bell button and door opener at corridor door (1st floor) to secretariat (1st floor)

Bell button and door opener at corridor door (1 st floor right) to secretariat (1 st
first floor, right)

Page 139 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

Terminal with monitor and button (opener) in secretariat (ground floor) for:
-

Entrance door, Administration


Hallway door (ground floor)
Gatehouse, turnstile
Optional: Gatehouse barriers (entry and exit for passenger cars)

Terminal with monitor and button (opener) in secretariat (1st floor, left) for:
-

28.02.2014

Entrance door, Administration


Hallway door (1st floor, left)
Gatehouse turnstile
Optional: Gatehouse barriers (entry and exit for passenger cars)

Terminal with monitor and button (opener) in secretariat (1st first floor, left) for:
-

Entrance door, Administration


Hallway door (1st floor, right)

GI Counter

Bell and intercom system with hands free function and door opener at the
external window, GI Counter

Bell button and door opener at the external door GI Counter area

Terminal with button (opener) in GI Counter for the external door to GI


Counter

SEL Counter

Bell button and door opener at the external door, GO Counter area to SEL
Counter

Video intercom system with bell button and door opener to SEL Counter, each
for:
-

External door, Chiller Buffer


External door, Ramp Cold hall
External door Recycling area
External door GI/GO Freezer
Gatehouse turnstile (external)
Gatehouse barriers (entry and exit for passenger cars at the passenger
vehicle, window height)
Gatehouse barriers (entry and exit for passenger car at the HGV, window
height)
Gatehouse barriers (entry and exit for HGVs at the HGV, window height)

Terminal with monitor and button (opener) in SEL Counter, each for:
-

External door Chiller Buffer to SEL Counter


Please note: an additional keyless door opener is also to be supplied
External door, Recycling area to SEL Counter
External door, GI/GO Freezer to SEL Counter
Gatehouse turnstile
Gatehouse barriers (entry and exit for passenger cars)
Gatehouse barriers (entry and exit for HGVs)

Gatehouse

Video Intercom system with bell button and door opener to Gatehouse, each
for:
-

Optional: Gatehouse turnstile (external)


Gatehouse barriers (entry and exit passenger cars at passenger vehicle
height)
Gatehouse barriers (entry and exit passenger cars at HGV height)
Gatehouse barriers (entry and exit HGVs at HGV height)

Page 140 of 215

6.19

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Terminal with monitor and button (opener) in the Gatehouse for:


-

Optional: Gatehouse turnstile


Gatehouse barriers (entry and exit for passenger cars)
Gatehouse barriers (entry and exit for HGVs)

Please note: The video intercoms are to be integrated into the operating
terminals for the HGV Weighbridge and/or into a pillar construction. The operating
terminals for the HGV Weighbridge and/or the pillar construction are to be
supplied by the supplier of the HGV Weighbridge. The Electrical works will provide
the video intercoms to the supplier of the HGV Weighbridge for integration into the
operating terminals and/or pillar construction.
Additional requirements are to be agreed with the client (Logistics Dept.)
Please note: Electrical works are to provide the power supply (e.g. 24 V) for all
relevant warehouse doors (doors with door opener).
All doors with access control (ZUKO) are to be connected to this power supply. If
the doors are to be controlled by intercom systems and by ZUKO, then a signal
exchange (e.g. potential free contact to release doors) is to be fitted between both
systems.
All external warehouse doors are to be additionally monitored by day alarm, via
the intruder alarm system (IAS).
For suppressing the day alarm of relevant doors (external doors, warehouse
with door opener via ZUKO or intercom system), a signal exchange (e.g. potential
free contact for deactivation of the day alarm) has to be fitted between the
relevant systems and IAS.
Anti-flood monitoring, IT server room
The double floor in the IT server room of the Administration has to be monitored
for anti-flooding caused by leaks of the water carrying systems (precision air
conditioning systems and/or their supply pipes).
Anti-flood monitoring is to be provided as follows:

Wired, anti-flood monitoring consisting of:


-

Evaluation unit (control) for connecting water sensors and external devices
(e.g. magnetic valve, ICA technology, horn, light)
Water sensor
Signal light

Installation of the evaluation unit, preferably in the installations room,


Administration
Please note: In agreement with the client (IT Dept.), the unit may also be
installed in the IT server room.

Installation of a water sensor on the floor of the IT server room

Installation of a signal light above the IT server room door (externally)

Direct cabling between the evaluation unit and the magnetic valve in the
supply pipework for the cold water for the precision air conditioning system
(Refer to Sanitary works)
Please note: The magnetic valve for monitoring the conditions is to be
connected as a mains-free unit.

Control (function) for activation of the water sensor as follows:


-

Activation of the magnetic valve in the supply pipework for the cold water
precision air conditioning system
---> Closing magnetic valve
Activation of the signal light above the IT server room door
Message (activation) to ICA technology (refer to ICA technology)
Message (activation) to dialler IAS (refer to IAS)

Page 141 of 215

6.20

6.21

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Gas alarm system, hazardous substance room (if required)


If the building regulations and/or provisions for sprinkler systems require a
separate hazardous substance room for storing flammable liquids and aerosols
(e.g. lighters, spray cans), then a gas alarm system may be required to monitor
the hazardous substance concentration in the room air (Refer to Construction
works).
The following requirements apply, for example, if a gas alarm system is required:

Gas detector for connecting all gas warning sensors and evaluating the lowest
and/or upper limiting value
Please note: Gas detector and gas warning sensors must be suitable for
available and/or stored hazardous substances (e.g. Methane).

Position the gas detector in a separate switch cabinet by the hazardous


substance room

1 gas warning sensor per hazardous substance room


Please note: Installation height for the gas warning sensors, approx. 1 m
above UEFF
Gas warning sensors are to be fitted with impact protection.

1 combination horn and warning light per hazardous substance room by the
entrance area of the hazardous substance room (internally)

1 combination horn and warning light in front of the main doors of the
hazardous substance room

Independent control/regulating with:


-

Pre and main alarm for the gas concentration, automatically via gas
warning sensors in the hazardous substance room

Regulating settings (extract) with:


-

Pre-alarm if the lower gas concentration limit has been exceeded


Please note: Limit in accordance with regulation
Main alarm if the upper gas concentration limit has been exceeded
Please note: Limit in accordance with regulation
Activation signal to the ventilation system for the hazardous substance
room if the lower or upper gas concentration limit has been exceeded
Please note: Activation of the ventilation system directly via activation of
the relevant contactors and/or relay in the switch cabinet
Signal to regulate the fire protection doors for closing fire protection doors
if the upper gas concentration limit has been exceeded

Additional electric connections/sockets/switches


Electric connections/sockets/switches are to be supplied for following consumers/
areas:

Refrigeration system (industrial refrigeration system)


-

1x power supply, approx. 1100 kW (400 V/approx. 3x 1600 A) in the


refrigeration plant room
Please note: The project-specific output requirement is dependent on the
conception of the refrigeration system and must be coordinated with
Refrigeration works!

Chain conveyor and wash system for boxes


-

2x power supply, each with approx. 120 kW at the entrance to the chain
conveyor
(normally opposite the entrance to the chain conveyor in the wall of WC /
Recycling area)
2x socket (CEE 400 V/3x 40 A), at wash system for boxes including
blower and/or air dryer (1x left side, 1x right side)

Page 142 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

Intruder alarm system (IAS) - (refer to Point 3.3.6.21)


-

Empty conduits

Sub-distribution for EDP system - (refer to Point 3.3.6.27)


-

Empty conduits, blank sockets

Wireless LAN Access Points


-

Power supply, approx. 0.40 kW


Wiring components

Telephone system - (refer to Point 3.3.6.26)


-

Power supply
Empty conduits, blank sockets

HGV display and control panels - (refer to Point 3.3.6.25)


-

Empty conduits, blank sockets

Work time monitor (WTM) - (refer to Point 3.3.6.24)


-

Optional: Power supply components

Access controls (ZUKO) - (refer to Point 3.3.6.23)


-

Power supply components


Wiring components

Video cameras - (refer to Point 3.3.6.22)


-

28.02.2014

Power supply

IT server room, Administration


1x socket next to the service data socket
2x power supply, each approx. 20 kW for electric sub-distributor in the IT
server room
Please note: The power supply for the USB server (approx. 10 kW) and the
precision air conditioning for the IT server room (approx. 10 kW) are to be
exclusively executed from this electric sub distribution.
The power supply for the lighting in the IT server room is also via the USB
system of the IT server room.
The supply of the electrical sub-distribution in the IT server room is to be
executed by the client (IT Dept.)
-

Chargers handcart Ameise [ant]


- 1x socket (CEE 230 V/16 A) per charger at each loading bridge
Please note: If a Schuko plug socket is required for a particular project
(depending on the type of charger), then an adapter can be provided on the
fixed CEE plug socket. In this case, the adapter should be installed with cable
and fastening clip (to avoid theft).
Release/block of sockets on the goods entry side via ICA technology (see ICA
works).
Wiring of sockets and contactor in accordance with the allocation of sockets.

Chargers, stock pickers non-refrigerated warehouse areas


-

Chargers, stock pickers refrigerated warehouse areas


-

1x socket (CEE 400 V/3x 16 A) per charger (in accordance with track plan)

Chargers, external lift truck


-

1x socket (CEE 230 V/16 A) per charger (in accordance with track plan)

1x socket (CEE 400 V/3x 32 A) per charger (in accordance with track plan)

Chargers, reach truck


-

1x socket (CEE 400 V/3x 32 A) per charger (in accordance with track plan)
Page 143 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

Chargers, High speed


-

1x socket, (CEE 400 V/3x 16 A) in recycling area (washing station)

High-pressure cleaner
-

1x socket (CEE 400 V/3x 32 A) per charger (in accordance with track plan)

Steam jet cleaner


-

28.02.2014

1x socke,t (CEE 400 V/3x 16 A) in recycling area (washing station)

Refrigerion, HGV
1x external socket, (CEE 400 V/3x 32 A) with protective stainless steel or
aluminium cover per sectional door in the area of cold rooms
- 2x external sockets, switch off (CEE 400 V/3x 32 A) with stainless steel
(V2A) cover in 1 HGV space (parking island)
Please note: Switch for ON/OFF switching of sockets freely accessible; to
be appropriately marked in the warehouse (goods entry) (e.g. UV
Electrical system).
Please note: Sockets have to be monitored for decreasing power.
-

Press container
-

Baling press
-

1x socket, (CEE 400 V/3x 32 A) per container at the container ramp


Please note: Connection via empty conduits in the floor slab of the
container ramp
Sockets to be positioned next to and/or between containers to ensure that
operation with stationary containers is possible
2x socket, (CEE 400 V/3x 100 A) at the container ramp
(e.g. 1x at 5th and 1x at 7th container starting from Axis 1 in accordance
with the standard)
Please note: Connection via empty conduits in the floor slab of the
container ramp
Sockets to be positioned next to and/or between containers to ensure that
operation with stationary containers is possible

Roll packer (Roller press)


1x plug socket, (CEE 400 V/3x 32 A) in the container ramp / container
storage space area
Please note: Clarify exact position in consultation with client (Logistics and
Purchasing)

Paper/foil compactors (DIXI compactors)


-

Paper/foil compactors (HSM compactors)


-

1x socket, (230 V) in refrigeration machine room

Printer
-

1x power supply, (400 V/3x 32 A) at workshop entry and/or in agreement


with client (Logistics + Procurement Dept.)

Modem for remote access to refrigeration system


-

1x socket, (CEE 400 V/3x 16 A) in recycling area (washing station)


1x socket, (CEE 230 V/16 A) at SEL desk

Lifting platform, industrial trucks


-

2x socket, (CEE 400 V/3x 32 A) in recycling area


Optional: 1x socket, (CEE 400 V/3x 32 A) in the area of high rack and
Non-Food (each at gable ends high rack every 2 axes)

Cleaning machines
-

2x socket, (CEE 400 V/3x 32 A) in recycling area

Each with 1x socket, (230 V) at high desk Chiller Buffer and in accordance
with operations

Drinks and snacks vending machines


-

Sockets (230 V) in smoking and non-smoking room, Administration


Please note: Installation height approx. 2 m above upper edge floor
Page 144 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

Drying chambers male and female changing rooms, Administration


-

1x light switch in door area (for separate lighting, Workshop)


2x double sockets and 3x double data sockets (only blank socket) in desk
area (wall faade)
1x socket, (CEE 230 V/16 A), each by workbench and workshop entry
1x socket (CEE 400 V/3x 16 A), each by workbench and workshop entry
1x Socket (CEE 400 V/3x 32 A) each by workbench and workshop entry

Workplace, Non-Food returns


-

1x light switch in door area


1x socket in door area

Workshop (warehouse)
-

Presence detector with brightness sensor for anteroom and WCs


Please note: Number in accordance with capture radius
1x socket in door area (base area)
1x control switch for external blinds (if applicable)
1x key switch for power supply, automatic (opto-electronic and/or Infrared),
flush fittings for urinals per Mens WC
Please note: Key switch for manual blocking of the urinal flush whilst
cleaning
1x power supply per wash area for hand dryer

Plant rooms
-

Presence detector with brightness sensor


Please note: Number in accordance with capture radius

WCs/Sanitary rooms/Changing rooms


-

Presence detector with brightness sensor


Please note: Number in accordance with capture radius

Staircase
-

1x socket, refrigerator (separate permanent connection)


1x socket, dishwasher
1x socket, microwave
2x double sockets for other appliances (kitchenette office/kitchenette nonsmokers) above the worktop
1x presence detector with brightness sensor
1x socket in door area (plinth area)
1x control switch for external blinds (if applicable)

Hallways (office areas)


-

2x double sockets and 3x double Data sockets (only Blank socket) in wall
duct, centrally arranged below the windows (every 2 windows)
Please note: Requirements to be agreed with client (Construction Dept.,
IT Dept.)
Presence detector with brightness sensor
Please note: Number in accordance with capture radius
1x socket in door area (plinth area)
1x control switch for external blinds

Kitchenettes
-

Power supply for each, approx. 1,50 kW

Offices
-

28.02.2014

2x double sockets and 3x double data sockets (only blank socket) at


workplace

Workplace GI/GO Fruit+Veg


-

1x double socket and 1x double data socket (only blank socket) at


workplace
Page 145 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

Container storage area/Container ramp


-

28.02.2014

1x socket (230 V), each next to cold water tap (Axis C1 and C3)
1x socket (CEE 400 V/3x 32 A), each next to cold water tap (Axis C1 + C3)

Cold storage cell for write-offs (perished goods)


-

Optional: 1x power supply (400 V/3x 16 A) in the area of recycling and/or


in agreement with client (Logistics + Procurement Dept.)

Further sockets and connections for vending machines, cleaning devices, etc. and
switches and/or operating units for e.g. SHA system to be supplied in accordance
with necessity.
Please note: Electric components and/or independent controls of
Construction works + M&E and consumers supplied by client are to be
supplied with electric connections, sockets and switches in accordance
with the specification for the chosen brand. This has to be coordinated with
Construction works + M&E and the client e.g. Logistics Dept., IT Dept.,
Construction Dept. for refrigeration system).
Alternatively, a Bus bar system may be installed for chargers in the battery
charging station.
All sockets for electric kitchen appliances, except for refrigerators (without freezer
compartment), are to be switched automatically if IAS is activated (see ICA
works).
If a USB system is planned for PC sockets, then 1 double socket per socket
combination is to be connected to the separate circuit installed in the office and
marked accordingly (e.g. red cover).
The following general requirements apply for the installation of electrical devices:

Automatic circuit breakers with respective (user-dependent) triggering


characteristic (e.g. triggering characteristic C or D)

Switches and buttons in passages and hallways are to be fitted with a guide
light (provided no motion detectors/presence detectors exist)

Switches and sockets are always arranged separately; telephone and data
sockets are always installed separately.

Switch combinations to be installed vertically, socket combinations horizontally

All sockets are to be supplied with an integrated marking label (for marking)
with a transparent cover. Distribution cabinets are to be supplied with the
respective circuit diagrams, wiring diagrams and legends.

All switches are to be installed in such a way that position OFF is at the top.

Page 146 of 215

6.22

6.23

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Unless stated otherwise, the following measurements are to be maintained


supplied between the top edge of the finished floor and/or site area and the
middle of the appliances/devices:

Switches, button general


110 cm
Control switches, blinds
105 cm
Sockets and data sockets (wall duct)
approx.80-90 cm
Sockets above worktops (kitchen)
115 cm
Sockets (plinth area)
30 cm
Sockets, surface-mounted
110 cm
Blank socket for access control
110 cm
Blank socket for work time monitor
140 cm
Blank socket for cable remote control, split-air cond.
150 cm
Sockets, compactors (picking area)
250 cm
Sockets Press container (container space)
approx. 90 cm
Sockets, HGV with refrigerated boxes
180 cm
Sockets chargers
(coordination with Procurement Dept.)
Please note: In general, all sockets in the picking area are to be installed at
250 cm above floor

Sockets and light switches, telephone and access controls, etc. are to be
installed, if possible, in one row. If possible, vertical cables are to be installed
approx. 15 cm next to doors.

Door installations
Door installations are to be provided by Construction works as follows:

Positioning rapid roll doors in passages to cold rooms and container ramp
(external faade), as well as the cold hall

Positioning stationary, fully hydraulic loading bridges (loading ramps) with


electric drive at sectional doors (external faade)

Please note: The door by the loading bridges is to be operated manually (no
electric drive).
Independent control/regulating with:
- Switch cabinet (control panel) rapid roll door at wall next to rapid roll door
- Switch cabinet (control panel) for the loading bridge on the right, next to
the door reveal (viewed from the inside)
- Induction loop and pull switches (inside and outside)

The following services are to be provided Electrical works:


Power supply for each switch cabinet, door installations
Intruder alarm system (IAS)
Warehouse, Administration and Gatehouse are to be secured via an intruder
alarm system with magnetic contacts, bolt contacts and acoustic glass break
detectors.
IAS Concept to be agreed with the client (Procurement Dept.).
Magnetic and bolt contacts supplied by Construction works as follows:

All external doors and external door, Warehouse

All external doors and external windows, Administration (ground floor, 1st floor)

All external doors and external windows, Gatehouse

All external windows, GI/GO offices

All doors (including turnstile) and door to the external area (fence)

Please note: All external doors of the warehouse are to be additionally monitored
by a day alarm via the intruder alarm system (IAS).

Page 147 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

For suppressing the day alarm of relevant doors (external doors warehouse with
door opener via ZUKO or Intercom system), a signal exchange (e.g. potential free
contact for deactivation of the day alarm) has to be fitted between the relevant
systems and IAS.
Components for the IAS (switch cabinet, activation unit, acoustic glass break
detectors, socket distributors) are to be supplied by the client (Procurement Dept.)
as follows:

Switch cabinet with dialler in Administration, secretariat (ground floor) or


Gatehouse

Activation unit in Gatehouse or at the Gatehouse fence door

Optional: activation unit in addition at access door, Administration

Acoustic glass break detectors in all rooms (every 2 windows) of


Administration (ground floor, 1st floor) and GI/GO offices and Gatehouse

Activation areas (IAS areas) are to be supplied as follows:

Optional: site (fenced) including access door and turnstile

Gatehouse

Refrigerated warehouse areas

Non-refrigerated warehouse areas (except recycling area, cold hall)

Recycling area

Cold hall

Administration, Common rooms and main entrance

Administration, Office area ground floor

Administration, Office area 1st floor

Electrical works are to supply the following services:


Power supply for all components

Wiring (without clamping) for all components in accordance with cable route
plan
Please note: Wiring for the of following consumers/sockets in accordance
with allocation to IAS areas:
- External lighting (with follow-up time)
Except lighting at access to Administration
- Internal lighting
- External sockets (except at sectional doors, refrigerated areas)
- If required, electric radiator GI/GO counter areas and Administration

Page 148 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Please note: To ensure the direct and secure transmission of important


messages (e.g. Priority1) via the intruder alarm system (IAS), Electrical works is
to supply the following technical systems for error and operational messages
(potential free contacts), connected directly with the intruder alarm system (IAS)
and to be transmitted via its dialler:

Error, air conditioning system 1, IT server room, Administration - (Priority 1)

Error, air conditioning system 2, IT server room, Administration - (Priority 1)

Activation for ant-flood monitoring, IT server room, Administration - (Priority 1)

Error, Emergency Power Assist System - (Priority 1)

Error, fire alarm system - (Priority 1)

Activation for the fire alarm system - (Priority 1)

Error, sprinkler system - (Priority 1)

Activation sprinkler system - (Priority 1)

Error, sprinkler pump - (Priority 1)


(If using only one sprinkler pump (e.g. in accordance with FM or NFPA)

Activation, Sprinkler pump - (Priority 1)


(If using only one sprinkler pump (e.g. in accordance with FM or NFPA)

Automatic OFF, sprinkler pump - (Priority 1)


(If using only one sprinkler pump (e.g. in accordance with FM or NFPA)

If applicable, alarm for ammonia leaks from the refrigeration system - (Priority
1)

Error, refrigeration system - (Priority 1) - Determination by refrigeration system


supplier

Activation, emergency call facility, freezer rooms (Freezer and SEL Freezer) (Priority 1)

Activation, emergency call facility and/or error message, Lift in Administration (Priority 1)
(If no separate message via control lift is guaranteed)

Alarm escalation Priority 2 to Priority 1 from ICA technology - (Priority 1)

Gas alarm, gas alarm system (lower limit) for hazardous substance room (if
required) - (Priority 1)

Gas alarm, gas alarm system (upper limit) for hazardous substance room (if
required) - (Priority 1)

Please note: The entries at the IAS (switch cabinet) for external messages, as
well as their supply, are to be agreed with the client (Procurement Dept.) and/or
IAS supplier. If maximum cable lengths between IAS entries and potential free
contacts of the relevant technical systems are exceeded, then the digital/analog
converters with BUS wiring may be supplied over large distances (taking into
account voltage drop, as output voltage, IAS normally 12 V).

Page 149 of 215

6.24

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Video system
The video system concept is to be agreed with the client (Procurement Dept.).
The concept is to be approved in agreement with the data protection officer
Country and the respective GLV. The competent GLI is to be informed of the use
of video systems.
The components of the video system (central unit, video dome, fixed cameras)
are to be supplied by the client (Procurement Dept.).
Internal areas
If required, a video system is to be supplied for surveilling inside areas.
Provided no other specification exists, the design is initially to be planned as
follows:
1x central unit with screen and recording unit in the IT server room or copying
room

1x control panel in office of the Operations manager (GO office)

1x control panel in SEL Counter

2x video dome under the roof, GI1 (high rack)

1x video dome under the roof, GI 2 (Block stacking area)

2x video dome under the roof, GO 1 (high rack)

1x video dome under the roof, GO 2 (Block stacking area)

1x video dome under the panelled ceiling, Warehouse Fruit+Veg GI/GO

1x video dome under the panelled ceiling, Chiller Buffer

1x video dome under the roof, Recycling area

2x video dome under the roof, Non-Food

1x video dome under the roof, Container ramp (externally)

1x video dome under the roof, Cold hall

1x video dome above the external door, GI Counter area

1x video dome above the external door, GO Counter area

1x fixed camera at the access to Administration/Warehouse

1x fixed camera at IT server room

1x video dome (reserve), centrally arranged under the roof in each aisle of the
high racks

1x video dome (planned and/or reserve), under the roof, Non-Food

1x video dome (planned and/or reserve), centrally arranged under the roof in
each Refrigeration aisle

1x video dome (planned and/or reserve), under the panelled ceiling, Fruit+Veg

Page 150 of 215

6.25

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

External areas
A video system is to be installed for the surveillance of outside areas by security
guards (Security concept).
Provided no other specification exists, the design is initially to be planned as
follows:

1x central unit with screen and recording unit, Gatehouse

1x control panel in common room, Gatehouse

1x video dome on the faade, GI Counter area

1x video dome on the faade, Non-Food returns

1x video dome on the faade, GO Counter area

1x video dome on the faade, Refrigeration/Meat

1x video dome on the faade, Container storage area

1x video dome on the faade, Non-Food

Video cameras in the entrance and exit area

Video cameras on the fence (areas to the rear of the Gatehouse)

Electrical works are to supply the following services:


Power supply of all components
Please note: All cameras should operate at the same voltage (image quality).
Optional: wiring (without clamping) of all components
Please note: 1x Coax (image and data transfer), 1x power, 1x Cat. 7 (control
video dome) are to be supplied for the fixed video domes.
Dome cameras with variable positions (e.g. centrally arranged, high rack),
each connected with 1x power, 4x Cat. 7 (1 for controlling the video dome and
3 for image and data transfer). Cables will be looped through.
The fittings are to be as bayonet fittings or similar.
Optional wiring to be offered as a unit price.
The video system is to be linked to the intruder alarm system so that ,when
warehouse areas are activated, the video domes move to a positioned starting
position.
Access control (ZUKO)
The ZUKO concept is to be agreed with the client (IT Dept.).
ZUKO components (e.g. central unit, card readers, mains) are to be supplied by
the client (IT Dept.) as follows:
Card reader at the external door to Administration

Card reader on the door between Administration (ground floor) and


Warehouse (inside and outside)

Card reader on the doors between administration offices (first floor) and
warehouse (outside)

Card reader on the doors between staircase and hallways, Administration,


-

Common room, Operations (ground floor)


Administration area (ground floor), but with free access for trusted
individuals
Sales (first floor)
Facilty Management/Building (first floor)

Card reader on the door to Office Personnel Administration (Ground floor)

Page 151 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Card reader on the door to IT server room

Card reader, weatherproof, on external door to GI Counter area

Card reader, weatherproof, on external door to GO Counter area

Card reader on door(s) to GI offices (Dispatching Manager and open-plan


office)
Card reader on door(s) to GO offices (anteroom/conference room)

Card reader, weatherproof, on external door to Recycling area

Card reader, weatherproof, on external door to GI/GO Freezer

Card reader, weatherproof, on external door to GI/GO Refrigeration

Card reader, weatherproof, on Gatehouse turnstile (externally)

Card reader, weatherproof, on door fence by Gatehouse (externally)

Card reader, weatherproof, on external door of the Gatehouse

Card reader on Gatehouse barriers (refer to note)

(Entry and exit for passenger cars at passenger car height)


Card reader on Gatehouse barriers (refer to note)

(Entry and exit for HGVs at HGV height)


Please note: Doors to be fitted with an E-opener.
E-openers are to be supplied as 24 V direct current devices
The card readers for access control are to be integrated in the operating terminals
for the HGV Weighbridge and/or in a pillar construction. The operating terminals
for the HGV Weighbridge and/or the pillar construction are to be delivered by the
supplier of the HGV Weighbridge. Electrics works are to provide the card readers
(blank sockets) for access control to the supplier of the HGV Weighbridge for
integration in the operating terminals and/or pillar construction.
The requirement for, as well as the exact position of, optional card readers is to be
project-specifically agreed with the client (Logistics Dept., IT Dept.).
Electrical works are to supply the following services:
Supply of cable routes and/or empty conduits and blank sockets
Please note: Electrical works are to provide a power supply (e.g. 24 V) for all
relevant doors of the warehouse (doors with door opener).
All doors with access control (ZUKO) are to be supplied by this power supply. In
cases where doors are controlled by Intercom systems and by ZUKO, a signal
exchange (e.g. potential free contact for release of doors) is to be fitted between
both systems.
All external doors of the warehouse are to be additionally monitored by a day
alarm via the intruder alarm system (IAS).
For suppressing the day alarm of relevant doors (external doors warehouse with
door opener via ZUKO or Intercom system), a signal exchange (e.g. potential free
contact for deactivation of the day alarm) has to be fitted between the relevant
systems and IAS.

Page 152 of 215

6.26

6.27

6.28

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Work time monitor (WTM)


WTM concept to be agreed with the client (Logistics and IT Dept.).
WTM components (e.g. terminals, mains) are to be supplied by the client (IT
Dept.) as follows:
Terminal at GI Counter

Terminal at SEL Counter

Terminal in staircase (hallway), Administration (ground floor)

Terminal in staircase (hallway), Administration (1st floor)

Optional: terminal in GI/GO Fruit+Veg (at workplace)

Optional: terminal in GI/GO Refrigeration (next to entrance, SEL Freezer)

Optional (if applicable): terminal at separate entrance for employees (e.g.


goods entry side between Administration and GI Counter area)

The requirement for, as well as the exact position of, optional card readers is to be
project-specifically agreed with the client (Logistics Dept., IT Dept.).
The Work Time Monitor is to be combined with the Access Control.
Electrical works is to supply the following services:
Power supply (230 V) for the terminals

Supply of cable routes and/or empty conduits and blank sockets


(2x empty conduits and 1x blank socket per WTM)

HGV display
The HGV display and control panels are to be supplied by client (Procurement
Dept.) as follows:
HGV display on the faade in the area of goods entry

Control panel in GI Counter

Control panel at the high desk in the area of Chiller Buffer

Electrical works is to supply the following services:


Power supply for all components

Wiring (without clamping) of all components

Telephone system
Telecommunication concept (e.g. connecting cabling/wiring) is to be agreed with
client (IT).
Telephone system components (e.g. central unit, mains) are to be supplied by the
client (IT).
Electrical works is to supply the following services:
Supply of empty conduits (with pull wires) from site periphery to central handover point in building
Supply of cable routes and/or empty conduits and blank sockets

Page 153 of 215

6.29

7.1

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

EDP system
EDP system concept (e.g. IT and/or data wiring) is to be agreed with the client
(IT).
Components of the EDP system (e.g. EDP sub-distribution, mains) are to be
supplied by the client (IT Dept.) as follows:
Approx. 4x EDP sub-distribution on longitudinal side (internally) of the faade,
warehouse
1x EDP sub-distribution in the Gatehouse
3x double data sockets in the wall duct, centrally arranged under windows
(every 2 windows) in the offices, Administration
3x double data sockets in the wall duct, centrally arranged under windows, GI
offices
3x double data sockets in the wall duct, centrally arranged under windows,
GO offices
Electrical works is to supply the following services:
Power supply sub-distribution for the IT server room, Administration and subdistribution EDP system in warehouse
Supply of cable routes and/or empty conduits and blank sockets
Please note: The requirements in accordance with low voltage distribution
apply
All wall ducts are only to be closed after installation of low voltage cables for
IT.
3.3.7

ICA

General
The Distribution Centre has to be supplied with a uniform and cross-trade (works)
measuring, control and regulatory system (ICA) and/or automation system for
measuring, control, regulation and optimisation of technical systems.
The main tasks are:

Recording and transmitting of operational and error messages

Recording and transmitting of measured and metered values

Digital control and regulation (DDC)

Automatic or manual operational management

Process-oriented optimisation (e.g. set point shift)

Operating control

Information exchange with central building control system (BCS)

Operating statistics and analysis (via central BCS)

The automation system consists of field, automation and control level. The
automation system is to be supplied with a control level based on a PC with a
specific system and/or evaluation software or web browser.
To reduce cable paths, the communication between control and field level will take
place via several automation stations (DDC substations) of the automation level.
The automation stations (DDC substations) are to be linked via a dedicated
network (Ethernet) or via a native BUS. The automation stations are to be
integrated in separate areas of the general electric sub-distribution, otherwise in
separate switch cabinets (e.g. technology sector).
Please note: It is not permitted to use the Lidl network (Ethernet) for
independently operating the automation system (in case of network maintenance).
The automation system will be connected at a central point via the Lidl network
(Ethernet) to a building control system (BCS) as supplied by the client. This

Page 154 of 215

7.2

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

building control system serves primarily to visualise high priority information, in


particular messages such as consumption and temperature values.
Technical systems and operating parameters (e.g. setpoints) are to be agreed
project-specifically with the client and/or in coordination with all trades.
Performance limits and wiring specifications are to be coordinated with all trades.
ICA technology must be tendered in a product-neutral way. If however a
brand is recommended, an alternative brand has still to be included.

Automation level
The automation level is to be provided as follows:

Page 155 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Positioning the automation stations (DDC substations), preferably, in separate


areas of the general electric sub-distribution, otherwise in separate switch
cabinets (e.g. technology sector) with:
Operating elements (e.g. manual operation of input/output module,
controller) inside the switch cabinets
- LEDs for operation and error display with acknowledgement at the front of
switch cabinets
Please note: The display is to be executed as logically correct, i.e. LED in
case of imminent error or operation
Please note: In case of switch cabinets with joint ICA and power units (high
voltage), the power assemblies and automation devices are to be clearly
separated. Joint use of wiring ducts/trays is not permitted.
-

Automation stations are to be modular structured, consisting of:


-

Automation stations with the following functions and/or characteristics:


-

Base module (with microprocessor, free programmable)


Input/output module (universal and multifunctional)
Control unit (only for central automation station, if applicable)
Web server (at least in one central location)
System-related process optimisation (e.g. heat recovery, enthalpy control,
flexible on/off switching in heating or cooling mode, cyclical switching)
Freely configurable characteristic curves for physical inputs/outputs to
connect any field equipment (e.g. for calibration)
Freely definable measuring ranges, measuring units and clear texts for all
system information
System clock with automatic summer/winter time changeover
Please note: Each automation station must be able to control time switch
channels via an internal clock. In cases of several linked automation
stations, the clocks must automatically synchronise. It must also be
possible to use timers on superordinate hierarchy levels (time server).
Watchdog function for internal system check
Manual and/or emergency operating level (manual switches for digital
output and potentiometer for analog output) in case of complete or partial
failure of the automation stations
Please note: The automatic functions of the respective system are not
activated during manual operation. Manual operation is either carried out
via DDC modules or coupling components. All safety functions, which
prevent damage to connected systems, must also work during emergency
operations.
Data memory (e.g. settings, messages, consumption and temperature
values, operating hours) for a minimum of 7 days with back-up battery
(buffer battery)
Uninterruptible power supply (UPS) for the relevant automation stations
(e.g. central Network Manager) for maintaining important functions (e.g.
receiving messages and forwarding by email) during a power failure

Automation stations with the following interfaces (communication options):


-

Serial Interface (e.g. RS232, RS485) or Ethernet interface with systemspecific, data protocol for system-internal communication between the
automation stations of the automation system
Ethernet interface with data protocol (TCP/IP) for connection to Lidl
network (e.g. sending emails, web server)
Page 156 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Please note: The Ethernet interface must correspond to the Lidl


network requirements (Refer to Appendix)!
- Ethernet interface with data protocol BACnet (BACnet/IP) for connection to
L-Box
Please note: The Ethernet interface must correspond to the Lidl
specification for BACnet/IP (Refer to Appendix)!
- Serial interface (RS485) or Ethernet interface with data protocol BACnet
(BACnet/MS/TP or BACnet/IP) for manufacturer-independent
communication with other automation systems from other manufacturers
- Project-specific interfaces and data protocols (e.g. M-BUS, Modbus,
BACnet, EIB, DALI, LON, or brand-specific such as Grandfos, Danfos) for
communication possibilities with other Bus systems
- Optional: analog modem for network-independent messages (e.g. error
message) or remote access
- Digital and analog inputs and outputs for signal exchange with other
controls/regulations or relay (e.g. error and operational messages)
Please note: Interfaces are to be supplied, at a minimum, at one central point
and/or automation station (e.g. Network Manager).
Remote access to the automation system in agreement with the client (IT
Dept.) via the Lidl network (Ethernet)
Requirements in accordance with Information Security Guideline Use of
External Service Providers apply to remote access to the automation
system. This requires a Remote Access Agreement and an application
for Remote Access to the Lidl System.
Remote access is exclusively via the standardised dial-in points of the Lidl
Stiftung. Any deviations are only possible in justified exceptional cases and
have to be approved by the Chief Information Security Officer (CISO).
Remote access is exclusively via application virtualisation as provided by Lidl.
Clear authentication of the external service provider occurs in several stages.
If up to 5 people of the external service provider have access, Lidl will provide
each user, for the time of the agreement, with an OPT token with Pin and a
personal user name with password. Remote access takes place via an SSLVPN portal. If more than 5 people of the external service provider have
access, then a dedicated VPN tunnel is created between Lidl and the external
service provider and downstream access takes place analog via the
application virtualisation provided by Lidl. Authorisation of external users via
Lidl Identity Management. If the external service provider provides a special
application, it has to support operation on a 64-bit Windows terminal server
with standard user rights.
If remote access to the automation system is not possible and/or approved via
the Lidl network (Ethernet) and the automation system operates independently
from a network, then temporary remote access via a modem is possible in
exceptional cases.

Page 157 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

To connect the automation system to the Lidl network (e.g. for sending emails,
web server), the following points have to be agreed/organised and/or requested
with the client (Construction Dept., IT Dept.).
Remote Access Agreement and application to Remote Access to Lidl Systems
via the client (Orga IT Dept.)
Please note: Forms, in the current version, have to be punctually obtained
and/or requested from the Information Security Officer (Orga IT Dept.), prior to
completion of the Distribution Centre.

Network socket for connecting the automation system to the Lidl network
(Positioning e.g. in the heating system room, in workshop)

Network socket for connecting the L-Box to the Lidl network


(Positioning e.g. in the heating system room, in workshop)

If using a PC with specific systems and/or evaluation software:


Network socket for connecting the PC to the Lidl network
(Positioning in the workshop)

IP addresses (e.g. for Lidl network, L-Box, PC), subnet mask and Gateway
addresses

IP address, time server

SMTP server (IP address of the server) for sending emails

Collective email address as a recipient for emails


Please note: Sending SMS is possible by converting email to SMS via the
service provider.

Activation communication automation system and SMTP in firewall by client


(IT Dept.)

Activation for email sending via the automation system to mail server by client
(IT Dept.)
Please note: Sending emails to addresses outside the Lidl network must be
explicitly applied for

Setting Network configuration (IP addresses, subnet mask, Gateway


addresses) by the Contractor for ICA technology

Setting time server (IP addresses) by the Contractor for ICA technology

Setting email configuration (SMTP address, email recipient) by the Contractor


for ICA technology

Provision possibility of Test Emails by Contractor ICA technology

In respect of network-independent message sending or remote access via a


modem, the following points have to be agreed/organised and/or applied for with
the client (Construction Dept., IT Dept.).

Telephone socket (analog) (positioning e.g. in the heating system room)


Please note: Telephone socket, if required, with analog/digital converter

Page 158 of 215

7.3

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Control level (on-site)


The operation of the entire automation system, and the display of the relevant
operating data (e.g. operational and error messages, TARGET/ACTUAL values),
takes place via the control level (on-site).
Control level (on-site) is to be as follows:

Control level based on a PC with a specific system and/or evaluation software


or web browser with direct access to a web server integrated in an automation
station:
- password protected, configuration menu
- bilingual user interface (national language and English)
A PC is to be supplied and set up in the workshop. Lidl network (Ethernet) is
to be supplied by the client.
If required, the access to the web browser or system and/or evaluation
software must be possible at a later stage via the clients own PCs (setting up
PCs).
The relevant system and/or evaluation software has to be made available to
the client (Construction Dept.).

Optional (in addition to web browser function or System and/or evaluation


software):
Central operator unit, as a compact structure, for front assembly at automation
devices, in switch cabinet doors or surface-mounted or plastered-in housing

Alarm panel (Touchscreen) in secretariat, Administration (ground floor)

Control panel (Touchscreen) for simple operation and control of lighting in the
refrigerated- and non-refrigerated warehouse areas, as well as for displaying
messages (Priority 1 and Priority 2) and the current temperatures and relative
humidity of cold rooms in accordance with Lidl temperature and humidity
monitoring in the following areas:
-

GI Counter
SEL Counter
Access to the Warehouse/Administration

Control panel with illuminated pressure switches for separate operation of the
lighting in refrigerated areas at the high desk of Chiller Buffer

Control panel with illuminated pressure switches for separate operation of the
lighting in recycling area, container ramp/container storage area, cold hall by
access (faade) to recycling area

Control panels (touchscreens) must be freely programmable so that optionally,


e.g. the warehouse layout, can be integrated for the areas to be controlled.
Displays on the status for lighting, messages as well as current temperature and
relative humidity of the cold rooms have to be listed on a separate screen page.
A Priority 1 message must provide both an acoustic and an optical signal.

Page 159 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Messages can be acknowledge in 2 stages.


1. Recognition via components of the automation system (operating and/or
alarm panels and central control point).
The acoustic signal can be suppressed, once the error message has been
acknowledged.
Please note: The message (optical signal) remains active until the fault has
been remedied at source.
2. Written acknowledgement (e.g. on switch cabinet) following remedying the
cause at source.
After the written acknowledgement, the message on the components of the
automation system is deleted.
Please note: To protect the systems, the components affected have to be
switched off until the written acknowledgement.
All other user interventions (e.g. change of switching times and setpoints) are to
be exclusively executed via the web browser or the system and/or evaluation
software as well as, if applicable, via the central operator unit in the area of the
workshop. User interventions must be password-protected.
3.3.7.3.1 Lidl communication protocol
All values existing in the automation system have to be made available via Lidlprotocol L-XML-RPC via implementation on an L-Box.
The L-Box is an embedded computer, which serves as a translator between
the automation system and the Lidl communication protocol L-XML-RPC.
Lidl has concluded a Condition Agreement with the manufacturers of the L-Box
(Yellowstone Soft: Condition: 08-04-002). To order the L-Box, please use the
order form (Refer to Appendix).
The relevant values are to be transmitted from the automation system via a
separate interface to the L-Box. The L-Box is to be connected to the
automation system via an Ethernet interface with data protocol BACnet.
The requirements for the communication between L-Box and automation system
have to be clarified with the Contractor for ICA technology and the manufacturers
of the L-Box. The responsibility lies with the Contractor.
In agreement with the client (Project Organisation Dept. Int., Construction Dept.
Int.), it is possible to use the support provided by the manufacturer of the
communication protocol.
The daily rate for the support has to be agreed project-specifically.
3.3.7.3.2 Data point designation
Data points for Lidl temperature monitoring, Lidl humidity monitoring and remote
meter reading are to be transferred to the superordinate building control system
(BCS) and have to be named in accordance with a uniform concept provided by
the client (Refer to).
Further data points, which also have to be transferred to the superordinate
building control system (BCS), have to be requested via the client
(Construction Land) from the departments Project Organisation Int. and
Construction Int.

Page 160 of 215

7.4

7.5

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Control level (central BCS)


The building control system (BCS) is to be supplied by the client and serves
primarily to visualise high priority information, in particular separate temperature
monitoring, separate humidity monitoring and meter readings with load profiles.
Data exchange with the control level (on-site) takes place via Lidl communication
protocol via the Lidl network, for which, in the time prior to completion and
acceptance of the Distribution Centre, the connection of the Distribution Centre to
the building control system has to be registered (Refer to Appendix - Form
Registration Connection Distribution Centre to BCS).
Field level

3.3.7.5.1 General
The following general requirements apply for the installation and components of
the field level:

Positioning the sensors in such a way that control and/or regulation-optimised


operation, without interference (e.g. by direct sunlight or dust), is guaranteed.

Sensors (except contact or immersion sensor) with plastic casing for wall
mounting
Please note: sensors on driving lanes (e.g. floor temperature sensor) have to
be fitted with an additional overrun protection.

Wiring external sensors and actuators on separate cable conduits or cable


conduits with a barrier strip (Refer to Electrical works)
Please note: Outgoing connecting cables are to be routed via plastic
channels and/or pipes and in the plinth areas in the warehouse (up to 2.20 m
above the floor) via steel pipes as well as, preferably, in the column shadows
of the blind tracks.

Wiring sensors as fully-shielded installations

Measuring ranges and accuracy classes of the sensors in accordance with


requirements

3.3.7.5.2 Lidl humidity monitoring


Areas selected for uniform humidity monitoring have to be supplied with a
separate humidity sensor and/or with those independent of the regulatory system.
Sensors for Lidl humidity monitoring are to be provided as follows:

Positioning sensors as follows:

Fruit+Veg:

Optional: GI/GO Fruit+Veg:

3.50 m above UEFF on side wall


in the centre of the room
3.50 m above UEFF on side wall
towards loading bridges

Please note: If, as a deviation from the specification and the standard layout
of the Distribution Centre International, another layout or room positioning is
required, then the sensors have to be correctly adjusted in accordance with
the concept (e.g. additional sensors for additional cold rooms). Any required
deviations must be agreed in advance with the client (Construction Dept.).
The relevant adjustment of the BCS and/or visualisation software
(Warehouse-BCS) is to be executed in accordance with a defined internal
process (Refer to Appendix).

Page 161 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

3.3.7.5.3

28.02.2014

Lidl temperature monitoring

Areas selected for uniform temperature monitoring have to be supplied with a


separate temperature sensor and/or with those independent of the regulatory
system.
All components for the automation system utilised for separate temperature
recording (Lidl temperature monitoring) must conform to the Standards DIN EN
12830, DIN EN 13485 and DIN EN 13486.
The measurement accuracy of the recording system for Lidl temperature
monitoring (automation station, temperature sensor, wiring) must be less/equal to
+/- 1 K.
Sensors for Lidl temperature monitoring are to be provided as follows:

Preferably a PT100-Temperature sensor with 4-wire circuit,


alternatively, a PT1000-Temperature sensor with 2-wire circuit

Positioning the sensors as follows:


-

Fruit+Veg:

GI/GO Fruit+Veg:

Refrigeration 1:

Refrigeration 2:

Chain conveyor

Meat:

Chiller Buffer 1:

Chiller Buffer 2:

GI/GO Freezer:

Freezer 1:

Freezer 2:

SEL Freezer:

Chocolate:

Goods entry (GI):

Goods exit (GO):

High rack:

IT server room, Administration:

Externally:

3.50 m above UEFF on side wall


in the centre of the room
3.50 m above UEFF on side wall
towards loading bridges
3.50 m above UEFF between
shelves in room depth
3.50 m above UEFF between
shelves and/or aisles
3.50 m above UEFF on side wall
in the centre of the room
3.50 m above UEFF on side wall
in the centre of the room
3.50 m above UEFF in the centre
of the room and/or wall depth
1.75 m above UEFF on faade
wall
1.75 m above UEFF on faade
wall
3.50 m above UEFF between
shelves in room depth
3.50 m above UEFF between
shelves towards door
3.50 m above UEFF on side wall
in the centre of the room
3.50 m above UEFF in shelf in the
centre of the room
1.75 m above UEFF on faade
wall in the centre of the area
1.75 m above UEFF on faade
wall in the centre of the area
3.50 m above UEFF between
shelves in the centre of the room
1.75 m above UEFF on side wall
in the centre of the room
approx. 3.50 m above UEFF on
faade wall, direction north (sun
protected)

Page 162 of 215

7.6

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Please note: If, as a deviation from the specification and the standard layout
of the Distribution Centre International, another layout or room positioning is
required, then the sensors have to be correctly adjusted in accordance with
the concept (e.g. additional sensors for additional cold rooms). Any required
deviations must be agreed in advance with the client (Construction Dept.).
The relevant adjustment of the BCS and/or visualisation software
(Warehouse-BCS) is to be executed in accordance with a defined internal
process (Refer to Appendix).
Recording values

3.3.7.6.1 General
The following metered and measured values have to be recorded automatically
for the documentation and evaluation of consumption data (meter readings) and
selected operating conditions (e.g. separately recorded room temperatures and
circulating air humidity).
All regulation-relevant values (e.g. room temperatures for controlling heating
and/or ventilation system) are to be listed under Point 3.3.7.14 (Controlling and
Regulating) and must not be archived separately.
The main meter and existing sub-meters for the respective trades/works are to be
fitted with an M-BUS and/or pulse output. Interface requirements are to be agreed
with the respective trades/works.
If meters with pulse output are to be utilised, then the error-free recording of meter
values without interference has to be implemented (e.g. length restriction of the
impulse cables, separate installation of the high voltage cables). Otherwise,
appropriate impulse converters with M-BUS output have to be fitted directly on to
the meters.
Recording modules have to be operated via a secure power supply (USB, internal
battery).
If gaseous energy sources are to be utilised, then the measured volume
consumption (e.g. m) has to be adjusted to real consumption conditions
(atmospheric air pressure, air temperature). It is recommended to supply an
evaluation unit matching the gas meter. Otherwise, the relevant conversion
factors (e.g. pressure stages between measurement and consumption) have
to be taken into account when evaluating in ICA Technology.
Temperatures and meter readings are to be recorded in 15-minute intervals and
archived to be retrieved at any time.
Please note: Time related meter readings have to be transmitted for remote
meter reading. The evaluation of the difference is to be carried out by the
superordinate building control system (BCS).
Any data loss because of failur or disruption in the power supply must be
excluded (battery or USB).
Setting the limiting values, recipient alarms etc. are to be provided in accordance
with the requirements from the client (Construction Dept.).
In case of project-specific deviating set point requirements for temperature
specifications, the Construction Dept. Int. and Logistik Int. must also be
informed.
Automatic, periodic data transfer for central archiving on a superordinate BCS is
to be made possible by the communication options described under Point
3.3.7.3.1 (Lidl communication protocol).

Page 163 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

3.3.7.6.2 Heating system

Consumption meter, total gas consumption (in Standard cubic metres)

Heat quantity meter heat for the recovery from the refrigeration system

3.3.7.6.3 Ventilation system


No recorded values planned for Ventilation System works.

3.3.7.6.4 Sanitary system

Consumption meter for total water consumption

3.3.7.6.5 Electricity

Consumption meter for total electricity consumption


Please note: The meter and/or consumption value for the total electricity shall
include the Emergency Power Assist System (introduction into the internal
grid).
---> Selection of a suitable position for a separate main meter, total electricity,
alternatively a separate meter for Emergency Power Assist System and
summarisation of both meter and consumption values via ICA technology

Page 164 of 215

7.7

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Consumption meter for electricity for the refrigeration system

Optional: Output Emergency Power Assist System (for load shedding)

3.3.7.6.6

Lidl humidity monitoring

Humidity Fruit+Veg

Optional: GI/GO Fruit+Veg

3.3.7.6.7

Lidl-Temperature monitoring

Temperature Fruit+Veg

Temperature GI/GO Fruit+Veg

Temperature Meat

Temperature Refrigeration 1

Temperature Refrigeration 2

Temperature Chain conveyor

Temperature Chiller Buffer 1

Temperature Chiller Buffer 2

Temperature GI/GO Freezer

Temperature Freezer 1

Temperature Freezer 2

Temperature SEL Freezer

Temperature RS/Chocolate

Temperature Goods entry (GI)

Temperature Goods exit (GO)

Temperature High rack

Temperature IT server room, Administration

Temperature, External

Recording messages

3.3.7.7.1 General
Error and operational messages from the technical systems listed under Point
3.3.7.7.2-3.3.7.7.10 (Recording messages) are to be recorded via the automation
system.
Please note: The recording of messages must be fail-safe (e.g. potential free
contact open = error).
Please note: To ensure direct and secure transmission of important messages
(e.g. Priority1) via an intruder alarm system (IAS), Electrical works is to supply the
following technical systems for error and operational messages (potential free
contacts), connected directly with the intruder alarm system (IAS) and is to be
transmitted via its dialler:

Page 165 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Error, Air conditioning system 1, IT server room, Administration - (Priority 1)

Error, Air conditioning system 2, IT server room, Administration - (Priority 1)

Activation, Anti-flood monitoring, IT server room, Administration - (Priority 1)

Error, Emergency Power Assist System - (Priority 1)

Error, Fire alarm system - (Priority 1)

Activation, Fire alarm system - (Priority 1)

Error, Sprinkler system - (Priority 1)

Activation, Sprinkler system - (Priority 1)

Error, Sprinkler pump - (Priority 1), if applicable


(If using only one sprinkler pump e.g. in accordance with FM or NFPA)

Activation, Sprinkler pump - (Priority 1), if applicable


(If using only one sprinkler pump (e.g. in accordance with FM or NFPA)

Automatic OFF sprinkler pump - (Priority 1), if applicable


(If using only one sprinkler pump (e.g. in accordance with FM or NFPA)

Error, Refrigeration system - (Priority 1) - determined by refrigeration system


supplier

If applicable, alarm ammonia leaks in the refrigeration system - (Priority 1), if


applicable

Activation, Emergency call facility, freezer rooms (Freezer and SEL Freezer) (Priority 1)

Activation, Emergency call facility and/or error message, Lift in Administration


- (Priority 1)
(If no separate message via the lift control is guaranteed)

Alarm escalation from Priority 2 to Priority 1 from ICA technology - (Priority 1)

Gas alarm system (lower limiting value), hazardous substance room


(If required) - (Priority 1)

Gas alarm system (upper limiting value), hazardous substance room


(If required) - (Priority 1)

Emergency call facility, Gatehouse (panic button) - (Priority 1)


Please note: The panic button in the Gatehouse is to be supplied in
agreement with the client (Logistics Dept.).

These messages are to be additionally (informative) added to the automation


system, so that all messages are archived (history).
Messages received by the automation stations and/or switch cabinets are to be
combined and transferred to the operator units and/or control panels as collective
messages in the form of Activation/Error / [System/Component].
Please note: Selection and/or details of collective message is to take place at the
independent control (control panel) of the affected system.
All messages are to be visualised and forwarded with the respective time delay
(e.g. emergency call facility, freezer rooms without time delay).
If case of a total power failure in the Distribution Centre, incoming error messages
from all technical systems have to be suppressed (avoiding message showers).

Page 166 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Only error message Power failure, Low voltage main distribution (LVMD) will be
issued and forwarded
Error messages are divided in messages Priority 1 and Priority 2:
Priority 1:
Imminent danger for people, goods, units and systems

Priority 2:

Requires immediate need for action


Important error
Need for action within the next 24 hours

All messages are to be triggered automatically. The DDC analyses the error
message and decides whether a Priority 1 or Priority 2 message will be sent out.
A Priority-List with recipient (collective Email address) and type of transmission
(e.g. email) requires prior agreement with the client. An email server (provided
and centrally administered by the client) will decide about forwarding information.
The following error indication methods will apply:
Priority 1:
1. Display on operator unit of the automation station and
optical and acoustic messages on touchscreens in
Administration, GI and SEL Counter and alarm panel in
secretariat of Administration (ground floor) for information
Cooperation between in-house maintenance engineer and
system installer and/or service partner for error remedying
In-house maintenance engineer acknowledges the
message and takes appropriate measures.
2. Email and/or SMS to operations manager and manager for
information on ICA technology
3. Additional via the intruder alarm system:
Automatic call to permanently engaged contact (e.g.
security guard/firm) via dialler of the intruder alarm system
(IAS)
The maintenance engineer and/or the service partner is to
be informed about the permanently engaged contact. If
required, the security guard/firm has to deactivate the
building.
Priority 2:
1. Display on operator unit of the automation station and
optical and acoustic messages on touchscreens in
Administration, GI and SEL Counter and alarm panel in
secretariat of Administration (ground floor) for information
Cooperation between in-house maintenance engineer and
system installer and/or service partner for error remedying
In-house maintenance engineer acknowledges the
message and takes appropriate measures.
2. Optional: Email and/or SMS to operations manager and
manager for information on ICA technology
Please note: if the Priority 2 message is not acknowledged
within 24 hours, then the message automatically becomes
a Priority 1 message (escalation).

Page 167 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

3.3.7.7.2

28.02.2014

Heating system

Error, respective boiler, heating system, warehouse - (Priority 2)

Error, respective pump, heating system, warehouse - (Priority 2)


(Controlled separately by automation system (not by boiler control)

Error with system for automatic pressure maintenance, gas release and air
release as well as automatic water re-filling/topping up - (Priority 2)

Error with pumps for frost protection heating in freezer rooms (preferred
option) (Priority 2)

Alarm for when temperature falls below the limiting value for each floor slab,
frost protection heating in the freezer rooms (preferred option) (Priority 1)
Please note: The lower limit values for the temperatures of the lower floor
slabs must be smaller/equal to 3C

Page 168 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Error (respective), split-air conditioning system(s) GI Counter area - (Priority 2)

Error (respective), split-air conditioning system(s) GO Counter area - (Priority


2)

Error with split air-conditioning system of workshop office - (Priority 2)

Error with split air-conditioning system of administration offices - (Priority 2)

Error with split air-conditioning system of gatehouse - (Priority 2)

Alternative: If cooling for the Administration offices and GI/GO Counter areas is
not required, then split-air conditioners are not required.
In this case, a hot water heating system (condensing boiler) and/or electric
radiator in the relevant rooms in Administration and/or GI/GO Counter areas will
replace the split-air conditioners (Refer to Heating System works).
The following error messages have to be recorded:

Error heating system (boiler, pumps), Administration - (Priority 2)

3.3.7.7.3 Ventilation system

Error for the respective ventilation systems - (Priority 2)


For example:
Ventilation system, ceiling cavity, Warehouse (general)
Ventilation system, ceiling cavity, Warehouse (Freezer rooms), if applicable
Ventilation system, WCs/showers/adjacent rooms, Administration (ground
floor)
Ventilation system, WCs/kitchenettes, Administration (ground and 1st floor)
Ventilation system, GI Counter and GI offices
Ventilation system, SEL Counter and GO offices
Ventilation system of the workshop office
Ventilation system, Common room and WC Gatehouse
Ventilation system, WCs/showers, GI Common rooms
Ventilation system, WCs/showers, GO Common rooms
Ventilation system, WCs, Recycling area
Ventilation system of the battery recharge area
Ventilation system of the battery recharge area in Chiller Buffer area
Ventilation system, Container ramp/Container storage area (ventilator 1)
Ventilation system, Container ramp/Container storage area (ventilator 2)
Ventilation system, Installations room, HVMD
Ventilation system, Installations room, LVMD
Ventilation system, Iinstallations room, Transformer (Transformer 1)
Ventilation system, Iinstallations room, Transformer (Transformer 2)
Ventilation system, Installations room, Safety lighting/Battery
Ventilation system, Installations room, Emergency Power Assist System (if
required)
Ventilation system, Hazardous substance room (if required)
Air curtain system, SEL Freezer
Please note: Error message for the ventilation system in the refrigeration
plant room is to be indirectly recorded via the refrigeration system error.
In cases where fire protection dampers exist, these have to be fitted with end
position switches for position CLOSED; the ventilation system has to be
switched off, if the fire protection flap is closed. An error message is to be
triggered.

Page 169 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Error 2, air conditioning systems in the IT server room, Administration (Priority 1)

Gas alarm, gas alarm system (lower limit), Hazardous substance room (if
required) - (Priority 1)

Gas alarm, gas alarm system (upper limit), Hazardous substance room (if
required) - (Priority 1)

Alt.: If no partial air conditioning system (multisplit air conditioning system with
heating and cooling function) has been planned for the entire Administration
(Reger to Heating System works), then the conference room of Administration will
be cooled by a partial air conditioning system.
In this case, the following error messages have to be recorded:
Error split-air conditioning system, conference room, Administration - (Priority
2)

3.3.7.7.4

Sanitary system

Error, respective pump stations - (Priority 1), if applicable

Error, circulation pump (water heating, Administration), if required


If connection possible (e.g. potential-free contact) - (Priority 2)

Error, respective pressure boosters - (Priority 2), if applicable

Error, respective softening system - (Priority 2), if applicable


Please note: Error also applies to low level of operating materials (generating
salts).
---> Recording the fill level of operating materials

Fill level (error), respective separators (oil and/or fuel separator) - (Priority 2),
if applicable

If applicable, electric trace heating (frost protection) (Priority 1)

3.3.7.7.5

Sprinkler

Error, sprinkler system - (Priority 1)

Activation of the sprinkler system - (Priority 1)

Error, sprinkler pump - (Priority 1), if applicable


(If using only one sprinkler pump e.g. in accordance with FM or NFPA)

Activation of the sprinkler pump - (Priority 1), if applicable


(If using only one sprinkler pump e.g. in accordance with FM or NFPA)

Automatic OFF, sprinkler pump - (Priority 1), if applicable

(If using only one sprinkler pump e.g. in accordance with FM or NFPA)

Low level water tank, sprinkler - (Priority 1)


Please note: The message, low level water tank, is to be recorded and
forwarded by control of the sprinkler system.

Page 170 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Electric trace heating system (Frost protection) - (Priority 1), if applicable

3.3.7.7.6 Electrical system

Activation, overload protection, main distribution (LVMD) - (Priority 1)

Activation, voltage monitoring, main distribution (LVMD) - (Priority 1)

Activation of surge protection for respective sub-distributions - (Priority 1)

Activation, voltage monitoring, respective sub-distribution - (Priority 1)

Activation, voltage monitoring, sockets for refrigerated HGV - (Priority 1)

Error, Emergency Power Assist System - (Priority 1)

Activation, Emergency Power Assist System - (Priority 1)

Low level diesel tank, Emergency Power Assist System - (Priority 1)


Please note: Message for the low level of the dDiesel tank is to be recorded
and forwarded via control of Emergency Power Assist System.

Automatic OFF function for emergency power system - (Priority 1)

Test mode for emergency power system

Warning for respective transformer(s) - (Priority 2)

Error, respective transformer(s) - (Priority 1)

Warning, maximum monitoring - (Priority 2)

Load shedding signals, stages 1-3 - (Priority 2 with message)

Error with safety lighting - (Priority 2)

Error, fire alarm system - (Priority 1)

Activation, fire alarm system - (Priority 1)

Error, SHVS system - (Priority 1), if applicable

If applicable, error with respective electric frost protection heating in freezer


rooms (alternative option) - (Priority 2)

Error, respective electrical lane heating system, freezer rooms - (Priority 1)

Error, USB system, PC sockets - (Priority 2), if applicable

3.3.7.7.7

Refrigeration

If applicable, alarm for ammonia leaks in the refrigeration system - (Priority 1),
if applicable

If applicable, message from the refrigeration system to notify of pH value


being exceeded on the secondary side of the heat exchanger (ammonia leak)
- (Priority 1)

Error, Refrigeration system - (Priority 1) - determined by refrigeration system


supplier

Error, Refrigeration system - (Priority 2) - ) - determined by refrigeration


system supplier
Please note: Errors for refrigeration system including separate systems e.g.
ventilation system in the refrigeration plant room, air humidifiers, gas alarm
system)

Page 171 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

3.3.7.7.8

28.02.2014

Other

Activation, Emergency call facility, freezer rooms - (Priority 1)

Error, chain conveyor - (Priority 2)

Error, USB- system, IT server room, Administration - (Priority 1)

Error, respective electrical blinds (warehouse, Administration, GI/GO offices)

Activation, emergency call facility and/or error message, Lift in Administration (Priority 1)
(If no separate message for or control, lift, is guaranteed)

Activation, anti-flood monitoring, IT server room, Administration - (Priority 1)

Alarm escalation Priority 2 to Priority 1 of ICA technology - (Priority 1)

Error, cold storage cell (air conditioning system) for write-offs (perished
goods), if applicable

If applicable, electric trace heating (frost protection), miscellaneous - (Priority


1)

Emergency call, Gatehouse (panic button) - (Priority 1), if applicable


Please note: Emergency call facility for the Gatehouse (panic button) is to be
agreed and supplied in agreement with the client (Logistics Dept.).

3.3.7.7.9 Lidl temperature monitoring

Alarm, Temperature too high and/or too low Fruit+Veg

Alarm Temperature too high and/or too low GI/GO Fruit+Veg

Alarm Temperature too high and/or too low Refrigeration 1

Alarm Temperature too high and/or too low Refrigeration 2

Alarm Temperature too high and/or too low Chain conveyor

Alarm Temperature too high and/or too low Meat

Alarm Temperature too high and/or too low Chiller Buffer 1

Alarm Temperature too high and/or too low Chiller Buffer 2

Alarm Temperature too high and/or too low GI/GO Freezer

Alarm Temperature too high and/or too low Freezer 1

Alarm Temperature too high and/or too low Freezer 2

Alarm Temperature too high and/or too low SEL Freezer

Alarm Temperature too high and/or too low RS/Chocolate

Alarm Temperature too high and/or too low Goods entry (GI)

Alarm Temperature too high and/or too low Goods exit (GO)

Alarm Temperature too high and/or too low High rack

Alarm Temperature too high and/or too low IT server room, Administration

Limits for room temperatures of the respective areas are to be set as follows:

Page 172 of 215

7.8

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

Area

Freezer cell

Room
temperature

Hysteresis
(maximal)

Target

Operation

Maximum value
(Too high)

Minimum value
(Too low)

Time delay

[C]

[K]

[C]

[C]

[Min]

-28

-18

60

-24
alt. -28
-24
alt. -28

Freezer
SEL Freezer

28.02.2014

Alarm values

-18

60

Cooler

+2

+6

60

Chain conveyor

+2

+6

60

Chiller Buffer

+2

+6

60

GI/GO Freezer

+2

+6

60

Meat

+1

+4

-1

30

Fruit+Veg

+4

+9

60

GI/GO Fruit+Veg

+14

+19

+6

60

RS/Chocolate, if applicable

+18

+24

+10

60

GI/GO RS/Chocolate, if app.

+18

+24

+10

60

Goods entry (GI)

N/A

N/A

+24

+10

60

Goods exit (GO)

N/A

N/A

+24

+10

60

High rack

N/A

N/A

+24

+10

60

IT server room Administration

+21

+25

60

Please note: Alarm temperature too high and/or too low, Priority 1

3.3.7.7.10

Lidl humidity monitoring

Alarm, humidity too high and/or -too low Fruit+Veg

Optional: Alarm, humidity too high and/or too low GI/GO Fruit+Veg

Limits for circulating air humidity of cold rooms for the respective areas are to be
set as follows:
Cold room

Fruit+Veg
GI/GO Fruit+Veg

Room
air humidity

Hysteresis
(maximal)

Target

Operation

Alarm values
Maximum value
(Too high)

Minimum value
(Too low)

Time delay

[%]

[%]

[%]

[%]

[Min]

90-95

approx. 5 (+/2.5)

---

80

60

---

---

---

---

---

Please note: Alarm humidity too high and/or too low, generally as Priority 2
Controlling and regulating

3.3.7.8.1 General
The following technical systems have to be controlled and/or regulated fully, or
partly, via ICA technology.
Systems which are not explicitly listed are to be independently controlled
(Refer to M&E works).
All control and regulation-relevant components (e.g. motors, sensors, actuators)
are to be controlled by (room) allocated automation stations.
Performance limit for supply of actuators, especially actuators, is to be set
depending on the system licence (e.g. fire protection dampers), among other
requirements.
Page 173 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

The following general requirements apply for the controlling and regulating of the
technical systems:

Automatic and time-delayed activation (approx. 1-2 Sec.) for all consumers
(especially on voltage recovery via Emergency Power Assist System)

Automatic activation of pumps (e.g. 1 min/day) in standstill periods (e.g.


summer) to avoid blockages

Automatic and operating, hour-dependent, automatically controlled running


sequence for redundant systems (and/or components e.g. pumps)

Please note: This also applies to warehouse lights connected in series

Automatic switch-over for redundant systems and/or components (e.g.


pumps) if a system and/or component is defect

Automatic deactivation of hazardous and/or oxidizing consumers (e.g.


ventilation systems, chain conveyor), when the fire alarm system is activated

Please note: Consumers with independent control are to be


supplied with a signal for deactivation.

3.3.7.8.2

Heating system

Heating system, warehouse


The control/regulating for the complete heating system in connection with the heat
recovery from the refrigeration system is to be controlled via the automation
system, which determines heat and pump output (speed control) in accordance
with:

External temperature (e.g. for triggering the heating mode)

Room and floor temperature

Heating water flow and return temperature

Capacity of surplus heat from refrigeration

Here, the automation system acts as superordinate control.


Each heat generator is supplied with a separate and independent
control/regulator with complete safety chain, hardware lock and its own collective
error message.
This applies in particular to the following regulating areas:

Recycling area

Non-Food returns (incl. Battery charging station)

GI 1

GI 2

GO 1

GI/GO RS/Chocolate, if applicable

GO 2

Racking

RS/Chocolate, if applicable

Respective rooms for hazardous substances, if applicable

Block stacking area (including Non-Food)

Page 174 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

The following field equipment is to be supplied for this purpose:

Temperature sensor for each regulating zone for recording room temperature

Temperature sensor in floor at 3 reference points (warehouse areas) for


recording load condition in the floor slab

Control valve (OPEN/CLOSED) for each underfloor heating distributor system


Please note: several control valves for each regulating zone can be
connected in parallel.

External temperature sensor for external, temperature-led flow temperature


control (heating curve)

Please note: If RS/Chocolate and GI/GO RS/Chocolate areas exist, then


these must be provided as separate regulating zones in case there is a
product-specific set point requirement for the room temperature when in
heating mode.
In the heating mode, the set point requirement for the room temperature for
the RS/Chocolate and GI/GO RS/Chocolate areas is normally the same as
that of other non-refrigerated and heated warehouse areas. In this case, the
rapid roll doors to the non-refrigerated and heated warehouse areas are to be
permanently open and the cooling function of the refrigeration plant for the
RS/Chocolate and GI/GO RS/Chocolate areas is to be locked.
In particular, for heating the relevant floor slabs in the heat recovery mode, there
is an alternative set point value requirement for the room temperature of up to
21C for the non-refrigerated and heated warehouse areas. To avoid a critical
room temperature for the RS/Chocolate and GI/GO RS/Chocolate areas, the
alternative set point value requirement for the room temperature of these areas
should not be provided (separate control zone).
The following information interfaces are to be supplied between the regulator for
the heating system and/or superordinate control (ICA works) and the regulator for
the refrigeration system:

Message for the heat supply from the regulator for the refrigeration system to
the regulator for the heating system and/or superordinate control
Indication of the current liquefaction capacity (0-100 %) via a constant signal
(0-10 V or 4-20 mA),
Value for the liquefaction capacity e.g. from the ratio from the installed total
compressor liquefaction capacity to the compressor in operation,
Optional: Indication for the defrosting mode in the refrigeration system is ON
(if no hot gas quantity is available for heat recovery) e.g. via potential-free
contact

Message for emergency refrigeration from the regulator for the refrigeration
system to the regulator for the heating system and/or superordinate control
Requirement for heat recovery mode ON to heating system e.g. via
potential-free contact

Heat requirement from the regulator for the heating system and/or
superordinate control to the regulator for the refrigeration system
Requirement for heat and/or liquefaction capacity (0-100 %) via constant
signal (0-10 V or 4-20 mA).
If applicable, message from the refrigeration system
to notify of pH value being exceeded (ammonia leak)

Page 175 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Request for pumps in heat distribution network to switch off, e.g. via potentialfree contact
Please note: Alternatively, an information exchange between ICA technology and
autonomous refrigeration plant control is possible via BUS.
The following functions have to be provided for in detail (Refer to Appendix:
flowchart and pictorial schematic). The required functions of the superordinate
control (MSR works) have been depicted in standard format (green) and the
functions of the refrigeration system control (Refrigeration works) in cursive (red).
At the start of the heating period (in general, at average external temperature
<15 C), the heating system goes into stand-by mode. The circulation pump of the
heating system is activated.
If, in spite of the heating period, room temperatures in all regulating zones exceed
the standard set point (in general approx. 16 C), then the room temperature (of
all regulating zones) is adjusted to a temporary set point (e.g. 20 C).
If the actual room temperature is lower than the temporary set point, then the
control valves for the heating areas are opened. Thus, the heating water flow rate
for charging the buffer storage (floor slab) is released.
If, in spite of the temporary set point, no heat requirement for at least one
regulating zone exists (all control valves for heating surfaces, "CLOSED"), the
circulation pump of the heating system is switched off to save energy (to avoid
unnecessary heat recovery) and the heat requirement on the refrigeration system
is set to 0 %.
The regulator of the refrigeration system informs the superordinate control of the
heat supply (see aforementioned information interfaces).
If the heat supply of the refrigeration system is 0 %, then the circulation pump in
the heating system is also switched off to save energy (to avoid unnecessary heat
recover), the heat requirement on the refrigeration system is set to 0%.
If due to the higher temporary set point values for room temperature, a heat
requirement for at least one regulating zone exists (appropriate control valves for
the areas, "OFF") and the heat supply of the refrigeration system is > 0%, then
the superordinate control will demand condensation heat as required (see
aforementioned information interfaces). Preferably, the demand and/or heat
requirement should be determined from the difference between the heating flow
and return temperature (large differences correspond to major heat withdrawal
and/or requirement and vice versa).
In case of heat requirement from superordinate control, then a 3-way valve in the
hot gas line will be switched and the hot gas fully led via heat recovery unit HRU,
(this only applies in case of a system-related necessity for a hot gas bypass to
HRU, provided that hot gas temperatures > 100C may occur and that, in case of
stationary circulation pump of the heating system, there is the risk that heating
water evaporates on the contact surfaces of the HRU)
The set point for condensation pressure and/or condensing temperature is set
(linear changeable) in accordance to the heat requirement of the superordinate
control.
This condensation pressure is implemented by switching off the ventilators and
spray pump of the regular condenser and, in addition, via a permanent regulating
valve in front of the regular condenser.
The additional permanent regulating valve prevents the reduction of condensation
pressures in HRU operation through a static liquefaction capacity (stack effect) of
the regular condenser (in spite of ventilator and spray pump being switched off).
The set point requirement for condensation pressure via the regular condenser
corresponds to the requirement for condensation pressure before the permanent
regulator valve.

Page 176 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

At the start, the heat requirement, through superordinate control, is 0% and


condensation pressure and/or condensing temperature are set to a minimum
level.
To guarantee a stable operating pressure in the refrigeration system, a set point
regulator before the HRU is required (e.g. opening only at condensation pressure
> 20C).
The heating mode and/or the demand volume flow pump of the circulation pump
heating system (in general 25-100%) results independently in accordance to the
characteristic curve (proportional pressure control).
Alternatively, the demand volume flow pump of the circulation pump heating
system can be implemented linear, in accordance to the energy performance of
the refrigeration system (e.g. by implanting message of current liquefaction
capacity refrigeration system, or indirectly via resulting heating water temperature
difference between input and output HRU) and the floor slab may be heated as
buffer storage".
Hence, the so-called self-regulatory effect of the underfloor heating system largely
prevents any overheating of the areas.
If the heat recovery unit supllies the heating water flow temperatures lower than
the existing floor temperatures of (for example) the control area, then the
circulation pump of the heating system is to be switched off to prevent a
discharging process of the floor slab and/or any superfluous hot water convection.
If the thermal heat requirement falls below the existing liquefaction capacity
and/or, if no heat consumption of the heating surface (floor heating) has been
recorded (e.g. heating flow and approx. return temperature), then the heat
requirement to the regulator of the refrigeration system is to be
reduced.
The set point for the condensation pressure and/or the condensing temperature is
to be reduced accordingly.
Once the continuously regulated control valve before the condenser is fully open,
the ventilators and spray pump of the condenser will be connected.
If, in spite of the heat recovery unit from the refrigeration system, the room
temperature of a regulating zone falls below the actual standard set point (i.e. the
heat supply from the refrigeration system cannot satisfy the heat requirement),
then the heat requirement to the refrigeration system is set at 100 % and the
boiler is connected via the superordinate regulator.
The boiler output (burner with variable speed) is to be set depending on the
external temperature (external temperature-regulated flow temperature control in
accordance to heating curve) via the superordinate regulator.
Please note: if 2 boilers exist, then the 2nd boiler is only to be connected via the
superordinate regulator, if the set point of the flow temperature is in accordance to
the heating curve (otherwise the set point for the room temperature), in spite of
the maximum boiler output of the 1st boiler, has not been achieved.
In this case, the boiler output (two-speed burner) of the 2 nd boiler is to be also set
dependent on the external temperature (external temperature-regulated flow
temperature control) via the superordinate regulator.
The set point shift of the room temperature is to be changed back to the standard
set point, and any heating of the floor slab via the boiler is avoided.
The demand volume of the flow pump of the circulation pump heating system
results independently in accordance with the characteristic curve (proportional
pressure control)
When the heating period ends, the heat requirement to the refrigeration system is
set to 0%.
The 3-way valve in the hot gas line is switched to bypass to HRU and the hot gas
is introduced directly to the regular condenser (this only applies in case of
system-related necessity of a hot gas bypass to HRU, provided hot gas
temperatures might exceed 100C and, that in case of stationary circulation pump

Page 177 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

of the heating system, there is the risk of heating water evaporating on the
contact surfaces of the HRU).
The set point for condensation pressure and/or condensing temperature is to be
set to a minimum level in accordance with the system conception.
If, without heat requirement by the heating system and/or superordinate regulator
(no HRU operation), the condensation pressure and/or condensing temperature
exceeds the maximum level in accordance with the system conception (e.g. by
defect in regular condenser), then HRU operation may be requested by the
refrigeration system.
The 3-way valve in the hot gas line is switched to bypass to HRU and the hot gas
is introduced directly to the regular condenser (this only applies in case of
system-related necessity of an hot gas bypass to HRU, provided hot gas
temperatures might exceed 100C and, that in case of stationary circulation pump
of the heating system, there is the risk of heating water evaporating on the
contact surfaces of the HRU).
The set point for condensation pressure and/or condensing temperature is set to
a minimum level in accordance with the system conception.
The permanent regulating valve is 100 % opened and the ventilators and spray
pump are connected to the regular condenser.
The control valves for the heating areas (except cooled areas e.g. RS/Chocolate)
are opened. As a result the heating water flow rate for discharging heat is
released via the floor slab.
The circulation pump of the heating system is released and the demand volume
flow pump results independently in accordance with the characteristic curve
(proportional pressure control).
Please note: The liquefaction capacity and/or the heat supply of the refrigeration
system can be changed quickly in phases with the compressor ON and OFF
switch (in accordance with system conception). Hence, the relevant regulating
circuits and/or the activation of the control valves for the positioning slides are to
be reduced.
The reduction has to take place in such a way that a vibration (e.g. caused by
introducing too fast) or a reduced energy yield (e.g. by introducing too slowly) is
avoided.
Please note: In agreement with Lidl Int. (Construction Dept.), and in coordination
with the industrial refrigeration system, 100% heat generation for the warehouse
via the industrial refrigeration system is to be possible. In this case, the
regulation/control of the entire heating system, Warehouse, in connection with the
heat generation via the industrial refrigeration system, has to be adjusted projectspecifically.
Frost protection heating for freezer rooms (preferred option)
Control/regulating of the frost protection heating is to be provided as follows:

Automatic
ON/OFF
switching
and/or
release/blocking of the pump via a temperature sensor in at least one control
zone (OR switching)

OPEN/CLOSE switching of the control valve of the


distributor in floor heating via a temperature sensor of the assigned regulating
zone

Control/regulating with:
- 2 temperature sensors for each freezer room (100% redundancy)
Installation of a temperature sensor in the floor heating layer and centrally
between the heating cables

Regulating settings as follows:

Page 178 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Automatic ON/OFF switching and/or release/blocking of the pump at a


ground temperature of +5C switching hysteresis (e.g. 1 K) of at least
one regulating zone (OR switching)
Please note: Take into consideration the temperature profile between the soil
and the layer containing the temperature sensor for the floor heating.
- OPEN/CLOSE switching of the control valve of the distributor in floor
heating at a ground temperature of +5C switching hysteresis (e.g. 1 K)
of the assigned regulating zone
-

Heating system, Administration


The split-air conditioning system is to be controlled independently.
Optional ICA technology has to provide the following functions:

Signal to central control point (control system) split-air conditioning system for
switching from heating/cooling mode as follows:
-

Heating mode up to an external temperature of e.g. 18C


Cooling mode from the external temperature of e.g. 20C

Page 179 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

3.3.7.8.3 Ventilation system


General
All ventilation systems are to be controlled as follows:

Automatic deactivation of the ventilation systems (ventilators) on


activation of the fire alarm (avoiding interference with the activation of
the sprinkler)

Ventilation system, ceiling cavity, Warehouse


The respective air circulating systems are to be controlled as follows:

Automatic ON/OFF switching of the respective air circulating systems


(ventilators) via a temperature and humidity sensor in the ceiling cavity of the
warehouse and wall recesses (for 2-skinned cold room walls)

Automatic OPEN/CLOSE switching and/or changeover of the shutters for


circulating air in heating mode or dehumidification mode via a temperature
and humidity sensor in the ceiling cavity of the warehouse and wall recesses
(for 2-skinned cold room walls)

Automatic OPEN/CLOSE switching of the regulating valve in the cooling coil


via temperature and humidity sensor in the ceiling cavity of the warehouse
and wall recesses (for 2-skinned cold room walls)
Please note: It is not necessary to regulate the supply air temperature (only
the dehumidification)

Control/regulation with:
Surface temperature sensor for each regulating zone in the ceiling cavity
of the warehouse on panelled ceilings and on panelled walls in wall
recesses (for 2-skinned cold room walls)
- Temperature sensor for each regulating zone in the ceiling cavity of the
warehouse and wall recesses (for 2-skinned cold room walls)
- Humidity sensor for each regulating zone in the ceiling cavity of the
warehouse and wall recesses (for 2-skinned cold room walls)
Please note: The humidity sensor is to be positioned in the immediate vicinity
of the associated temperature sensor (to calculate the dew point temperature)
-

Regulating settings (extract) with:


-

ON/OFF switching of the air circulating system (ventilator), if the


respective temperature of the ceiling cavity in the warehouse falls below
the limiting value (5C) and/or if the respective surface temperature of the
panelled ceilings and/or panelled walls in the ceiling cavity of the
warehouse falls below the limiting value (depending on current dew point
temperature) respective switching hysteresis (e.g. 1 K)
OPEN/CLOSE switching or changeover of the multileaf dampers for
circulating air in heating mode, if the respective temperature of the ceiling
cavity of the warehouse falls below the limiting value (5C) switching
hysteresis (e.g. 1 K)
OPEN/CLOSE switching or changover of the multileaf dampers for
circulating air in dehumidification mode, if the respective surface
temperature of the panelled ceilings and/or panelled walls in the ceiling
cavity of the warehouse falls below the limiting value (depending on
current dew point temperature) respective switching hysteresis (e.g. 1 K)
OPEN/CLOSE switching of the control valve of the cooling coil, if the
respective surface temperature of the panelled ceilings and/or panelled
walls in the ceiling cavity of the warehouse falls below the limiting value
(depending on current dew point temperature) respective switching
hysteresis (e.g. 1 K)
Page 180 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Please note: The dew point temperature is to be calculated for each regulating
zone using the temperature and relative humidity recorded in these regulating
zones.
Ventilation system, WCs/showers/adjacent rooms, Administration (ground floor)
The exhaust air system is to be controlled/regulated as follows:

ON/OFF switch for the exhaust air system (ventilator), automatically via a
timer

Control/regulating with:

Timer with timer programme

Regulating settings (extract) with:


-

Operating time for the exhaust air system (ventilator) in agreement with
operations (e.g. 6-22 h)
Please note: The central exhaust air system operating time should be a
minimum of 12 h/day

Possible existing single room ventilators are only to be activated via light
switches. The fan run-on is to be guaranteed via an integrated time-delay relay.
Ventilation system, WCs/kitchenettes, Administration (ground and 1st floor)
The requirements are to be analog with the ventilation system
WCs/showers/adjacent rooms, Administration (ground floor).

for

Ventilation system, GI offices


The supply and exhaust air system is to be controlled/regulated as follows as
follows:

ON/OFF switch supply and exhaust air system (ventilators) and shut-off valve
and/or multi-leaf dampers, automatically via a timer

The supply air temperature is to be constantly controlled/regulated (divided in


heating or cooling mode)

Filter monitor (monitoring difference pressure)

Control/regulating with:
-

Timer with timer programme


Temperature sensor in supply air
Flow monitor in supply air
Optional: pressure sensor for difference pressure filter (external and
exhaust air)

Regulating settings (extract) with:


-

Operating time supply and exhaust air system (ventilators) in agreement


with operations (e.g. 6-22 h)
Constant supply air temperature, heating mode (winter) as a minimum,
admissible room temperature (e.g. 20 C)
Constant supply air temperature, cooling mode (summer) as a maximum,
admissible room temperature (e.g. 26 C)
Please note: The room temperature is to be regulated by a separate
heating and cooling system (e.g. radiator or split-air conditioners).
Optional: Difference pressure filter in accordance with filter class (e.g. 200
Pa)

Ventilation system, GO offices


The requirements are to be analog with the ventilation system for the Offices GI.
Ventilation system for workshop office
The same requirements apply as for those for the ventilation system of the GI
offices.
Ventilation system for the administration offices (where regulations are in place)
Page 181 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

The same requirements apply as for those for the ventilation system of the GI
offices.
Ventilation system, Common room and WC Gatehouse
The requirements are to be analog with the ventilation system for the Offices GI.
Ventilation system, WCs/showers, GI Common rooms
The requirements are to be analog with the ventilation system for the
WCs/Showers/adjacent rooms, Administration (ground floor).
Ventilation system, WCs/showers, GO Common rooms
The requirements are to be analog with the ventilation system for the
WCs/Showers/adjacent rooms, Administration (ground floor).
Ventilation system, WCs, Recycling area
The requirements are to be analog with the ventilation system for the
WCs/Showers/adjacent rooms, Administration (ground floor).
Ventilation system, Battery recharge station
Exhaust air systems are to be controlled as follows:

ON/OFF switch for exhaust air system (ventilator), automatically via a timer

Control/regulating with:
-

Timer with a timer programme

Regulating settings (extract) with:


-

Operating time of the exhaust air system (ventilator) in accordance with


regulation and/or with connection of charging sockets or conductor rail
system

Ventilation system of the battery recharge station in Chiller Buffer area


The same requirements apply as those for the ventilation system of the battery
recharge station.
Ventilation system, Container ramp/Container storage area
Exhaust air systems are to be controlled as follows:
ON/OFF switch for the exhaust air system (ventilators), manually according to
requirement via switches (parallel connection)
Release for the exhaust air system (ventilators), automatically via a timer
Regulating with:
- ON/OFF switches by the rapid roll door between the container ramp and
recycling area
- Timer with a timer programme
Regulating settings (extract) with:
- Release for the exhaust air system (ventilators) in agreement with
operations (e.g. 8-20 h)
Ventilation system, Installations room, main overload distribution (MOLD)
Exhaust air systems are to be controlled as follows:
ON/OFF switch for the exhaust air system (ventilator), automatically via a
temperature sensor in the installations room MOLD
Opening/Closing the multi-leaf damper automatically with an ON/OFF switch
for the exhaust air system (ventilator)
Regulating with:
- Temperature sensor in installations room MOLD
- Actuator for multi-leaf damper, if applicable
Regulating settings (extract) with:
- ON/OFF switch for the exhaust air system (ventilator), if temperature limit
in the installations room MOVL is exceeded (in general. 35 C) switching
hysteresis e.g. 1-2 K)
Page 182 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Ventilation system, Installations room, transformer


The requirements are to be analog with the ventilation system for the installations
room, main overvoltage distribution (MOLD).
Ventilation system, Installations room, Low voltage main distribution (LVMD)
The requirements are to be analog with the ventilation system for the installations
room, main overvoltage distribution (MOLD).
Ventilation system, Installations room, Safety lighting/battery
The requirements are to be analog with the ventilation system for the installations
room, main overvoltage distribution (MOLD).
Control of the exhaust air system as follows:
Automatic ON/OFF switching of the exhaust air system (ventilator) via charge
batteries, safety lighting signal from the safety lighting control/regulation
Ventilation system, Installations room, Emergency Power Assist System (if
required)
Control of the exhaust air system as follows:

ON/OFF switch for the exhaust air system (ventilator), automatically via a
timer

Regulating with:
-

Timer with a timer programme

Regulating settings (extract) with:


-

Operating time for the exhaust air system (ventilator) in accordance with
regulation

Air curtain system, SEL Freezer


The air curtain system is to be controlled independently.
The following functions are to be supplied by ICA technology:

Triggering the air curtain system, if the respective lighting zone is switched on

Page 183 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

3.3.7.8.4 Electrical system


Lighting
The lighting of the warehouse areas (refrigerated and non-refrigerated), as well as
the external areas, is principally controlled using ICA technology.
The ICA Technology works are responsible for ensuring the appropriate operating
controls (operating control panels and push buttons), sensors (brightness sensor)
and timers as well as the control wiring through to the relevant control zones.
Control of the lights (1-10 V or DALI) is to be agreed with Electric works. In order
to reduce the standby consumption of ballasts, the lights must be disconnected
from the grid if no lighting is required in the respective control zone. The
necessary switchgears and control contacts are part of the Electric works scope
of delivery.
Control/regulating of the lighting system as follows:
Automatic ON/OFF switching and brightness control (dimming) for the
respective lighting zone of the warehouse areas via timer and brightness
sensors (automatic mode)
Manual ON/OFF switching and/or selection of automatic mode for the
respective lighting zone of the warehouse areas via operating control panels
The following modes can be selected manually for lighting zones with
dimmable lights:
- Manual OFF switching
- Manual ON switching of basic lighting (30%)
- Automatic mode (automatic timer and brightness control)
Please note: After the lighting has been switched OFF automatically via
the timer, it is still possible to override the timer switch by manually
switching the lighting back on with the ON switch in automatic mode up to
a time delay of 30 minutes.
Please note: In the event of a malfunction, it is still possible to override the
timer switch and brightness regulator by manually switch ON full lighting
(100%) at the manual control panel on the switch cabinet.
Operation (manual ON/OFF switch and/or selection of automatic mode) for
lighting of warehouse areas (refrigerated and non-refrigerated) at GI and SEL
desk and access to Administration/Warehouse are each via a control panel
(touch screen).
Operation (manual ON/OFF switching and/or selection of automatic mode) of
the lighting in the warehouse areas (refrigerated) is also carried out using an
operating control panel with push-buttons on the high desk in the Chiller Buffer
area.
Operation (manual ON/OFF switching and/or selection of automatic mode) of
the lighting in the recycling, container ramp, container storage space, and cold
hall warehouse areas is also carried out using an operating control panel with
push-buttons at the entrance (faade) to the recycling area.
Release for the respective lighting zone is automatic via a timer
Please note: After automatic OFF switching of the lighting via the timer
programme, the lighting can be manually requested for the requested areas
for a limited time (e.g. 30 minutes).
General OFF switching of the respective lighting zone with activation of
respective IAS areas

Page 184 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Control/regulating with:
Control panels (refer to control level on site)
Timer with a timer programme for the respective lighting zone
Brightness control in the form of daylight or constant light control
(control according to incoming external light and/or daylight, or according
to actual brightness in the lighting zone)
- Internal brightness sensors per lighting zone for the internal lighting
Please note: constant light control (direct measurement):
The internal brightness sensors, in each lighting zone, are to be fitted with
a separate measurement plane above the possible pallet height (approx.
2.40 m). Due to possible shadowing by various stored goods, the
brightness sensors should not be directed towards the floor of the
warehouse areas.
Please note: daylight control (indirect measurement):
As an alternative to constant light control, at least 3 representative
external brightness sensors can be provided to control the internal lighting
of areas with natural light (rear rooflights at the faade of Goods In and
Goods Out, as well as under the light dome of the roof).
External brightness sensors for indoor lighting should be fitted on the
internal side and/or behind transparent parts to take the position of blinds
as well as dirt and snow into account.
- External brightness sensor for external lighting
Regulating settings (extract) with:
- Release for the respective lighting zones in agreement with operations
(e.g. 6-12 h for goods entry, 10-20 h for goods exit)
- Time delay (30 minutes) after automatic OFF switching of the lighting
(timer programme) for the respective lighting zone when switched on
manually
- Switching and/or threshold values for the automatic lighting control of the
respective lighting zones in accordance with recorded internal or external
brightness
Please note: TARGET luminosity at respective reference level (e.g. 0.20
or 0.70 m above floor) in accordance with regulations (e.g. Workplace
Directive)
-

Page 185 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Goods exit 1
Goods exit 2
High rack
RS/Chocolate
GI/GO RS/Chocolate
Block stacking and
Non-Food
Non-Food return

Constant light control/regulating (2-Channel, multiple-sensor)

in case of natural Light)Brightness sensor

General OFF IAS

Goods entry 2

0-100 %
(Dimming)
0-100 %
(Dimming)
0-100 %
(Dimming)
0-100 %
(Dimming)
0-100 %
(Dimming)
0-100 %
(Dimming)
0-100 %
(Dimming)
0-100 %
(Dimming)
0-100 %
(Dimming)

Timer

Goods entry 1

Motion detector (Presence detector)

Lighting zones

Switch levels

Lighting control of Administration, GI/GO counter areas, ceiling cavity, freezer cell
and other areas via Electrical works (Refer to Electrical works).
Relevant switches and sensors (presence detector with integrated brightness
sensor and light control system) are to be supplied by Electrical works. ICA
technology overrides these areas only by activating/deactivating the intruder
alarm system (general OFF, IAS).

Recycling area

0-100 %
(Dimming)

Container ramp and


Container storage area

0-100 %
(Dimming)

Battery charging station

0-100 %
(Dimming)

Cold hall
(Axis B/C-D)

0-100 %
(Dimming)

Cold hall
(Axis D-F)

0-100 %
(Dimming)

Cooling

0-100 %
(Dimming)

Meat

0-100 %
(Dimming)

Chiller Buffer

0-100 %
(Dimming)

Operation

Control panels GI/SEL


desks and Administration
Control panels GI/SEL
desks and Administration
Control panels GI/SEL
desks and Administration
Control panels GI/SEL
desks and Administration
Control panels GI/SEL
desks and Administration
Control panels GI/SEL
desks and Administration
Control panels GI/SEL
desks and Administration
Control panels GI/SEL
desks and Administration
Control panels GI/SEL
desks and Administration
Control panels GI/SEL
desks and Administration
and control panel with push
button at access (faade)
recycling area
Control panels GI/SEL
desks and Administration
and control panel with push
button at access (faade)
recycling area

Control panels GI/SEL


desks and Administration
and control panel with push
button at access (faade)
recycling area

Control panels GI/SEL


desks and Administration
and control panel with push
button at high desk Chiller
Buffer
Control panels GI/SEL
desks and Administration
and control panel with push
button at high desk Chiller
Buffer
Control panels GI/SEL
desks and Administration
and control panel with push
button at high desk Chiller

Page 186 of 215

General OFF IAS

Timer

28.02.2014

Constant light control/regulating (2-Channel, multiple-sensor)

in case of natural Light)Brightness sensor

Motion detector (Presence detector)

Lighting zones

Switch levels

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

Operation

Buffer

In addition: manual
switches (illuminated) in
Freezer
Please note: Function
superordinate to ICA
technology)
Control panels GI/SEL
desks and Administration
and control panel with
push button at high desk
Chiller Buffer

SEL Freezer

0-100 %
(Dimming)

GI/GO Freezer

0-100 %
(Dimming)

Freezer cell

On/Off

Operation

General OFF IAS

Timer

Constant light control/regulating (2-Channel, multiple-sensor)

in case of natural Light)Brightness sensor

Motion detector (Presence detector)

Lighting zones

0-100 %
(Dimming)

Switch levels

Freezer

Control panels GI/SEL


desks and Administration
and control panel with push
button at high desk Chiller
Buffer

In addition: manual
switches (illuminated) in
Freezer
Please note: Function
superordinate to ICA
technology)
Control panels GI/SEL
desks and Administration
and control panel with
push button at high desk
Chiller Buffer
Switches on door freezer
cell
(Door contact switches)
1x switch on the

Page 187 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

inspection door, freezer


cell for background
lighting
Control panels GI/SEL
desks and Administration
and control panel with
push button at high desk
Chiller Buffer
Control panels GI/SEL
desks and Administration
and control panel with
push button at high desk
Chiller Buffer

Fruit+Veg

0-100 %
(Dimming)

GI/GO Fruit+Veg

0-100 %
(Dimming)

External, general

On/Off

Switches by doors for


manual OFF switch
and/or dimming
(overriding automatic
mode)

Switches by doors for


manual OFF switch
and/or dimming
(overriding automatic
mode)
-

Administration (office)

0-100 %
(Dimming)

Administration
(common rooms and
halls)

On/Off

GI/GO office

GI/GO common rooms


IT server room
Administration
Other Areas
(e.g. machine/plant
rooms)
Ceiling cavity

0-100 %
(Dimming)

On/Off

On/Off

On/Off

Switches by doors

On/Off

Toggle switches by
access to ceiling cavity

Maximum monitoring
Maximum monitoring (control and regulation of electric power input) is to be
guaranteed by ICA technology.
The output maximum is to be complied with and the measuring interval (e.g. 15minimum values as power usage) is to be determined in agreement with the client
and PUC.
Consumers are to be connected decentralised via the automation stations of ICA
technology. Load shedding stages are to be divided in accordance with the
following priority stage:
Stage 1: Press container (e.g. 50 %)

Stage 2: Charging devices in stages (e.g. 50%)

Stage 3: Lighting, warehouse and external areas (e.g. 50%)


(if permitted in accordance with regulations, especially workplace regulations)

In addition, a load shedding signal is to be supplied for the refrigeration system.


The regulating of the refrigeration system guarantees an adjustable load shedding
and/or power limitation of the refrigeration system (e.g. 50 or 100%).
If an electric sprinkler pump with a supply via the central low voltage main
distribution exists, for emergency generator and activation sprinkler
systems, then the joint load shedding for the following consumers has to be
implemented for safety reasons (capacity):
Stage 1: Press container (e.g. 50%)

Stage 2: Charging devices in stages (e.g. 50%)

Stage 3: Lighting, warehouse and external areas (e.g. 50%)


(if permitted in accordance with regulations, especially workplace
regulations)

Page 188 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Stage 4: Ratio refrigeration system (load shedding signal to control


refrigeration system)

Wiring including the required power switches, contactor and relay are to be
supplied by Electrical works in accordance with the function and allocation.
Emergency Power Assist System (EPAS)
The Emergency Power Assist System is to be controlled/regulated independently.
ICA technology has to provide the following functions:

Activation of the main consumers, time-delayed (approx. 1-2 sec.), on voltage


recovery via the Emergency Power Assist System (signal activation,
Emergency Power Assist System)
Please note: Important users (e.g. lighting) to be activated first.

Load shedding, if the maximum output limit for the Emergency Power Assist
System has been exceeded
Recording the output from the Emergency Power Assist System (refer to
recording of values)
Please note: Alternative load shedding in EPAS operation may be
implemented by receiving load shedding signals from EPAS control.
Load shedding is to be carried out in accordance with the set limit (refer to
maximum monitoring)

Last connection, if too low minimum output limit in the Emergency Power
Assist System (ensuring minimum load and/or minimum utilisation EPAS)
Recording the output from the Emergency Power Assist System (refer to
recording of values)
Please note: Alternative load shedding in EPAS operation may be
implemented by receiving load shedding signals from EPAS control.
Last connection may be carried out by connecting lighting in the warehouse
and external areas as well as ventilators.

Electricity consumers/Sockets
By activating and/or deactivating the intruder alarm system (IAS), the following
consumers and/or sockets have to be switched off and/or activated again:

External lighting (OFF with follow-up time e.g. 5 minutes)


Except lighting at access, Administration
Please note: Permanent video monitoring of the external areas is not to be
provided with an automatic OFF switch for external lighting with activating IAS.
---> Coordination with the client (Construction Dept., IT Dept.)

Internal lighting

External sockets (except on sectional doors refrigerated areas)

Rapid roll doors, external area (e.g. recycling area, cold hall)

Rapid switching areas (IAS areas) are to be provided as follows:

Page 189 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

Optional: Plot (fenced) including access door and turnstile

Gatehouse

Refrigerated warehouse areas

Non-refrigerated warehouse areas

28.02.2014

(Except recycling area, cold hall)

Recycling area

Cold hall

Administration common rooms and main entrance

Administration office area, ground floor

Administration office area, 1st floor

Please note: Intruder alarm systems remain activated with rapid switching in IAS.
Here, the alarm system is manually deactivated and lighting released by security
guards.
If, when the intruder alarm has been set off, the lights should be automatically
switched on, then this has to be taken into account (e.g. by automatic deactivation
and thereby release of lighting).
---> Coordination with the client (Procurement Dept.) and supplier IAS
The sockets for the chargers on every loading bridge on the goods entry side
have to be released or blocked by a timer.
4

MANUFACTURERS/SUPPLIERS/PRODUCTS
The following products and/or manufacturers/suppliers exclusively represent a
quality standard. In general, it is possible to supply equivalent products from other
manufacturers/suppliers. However, those products and/or manufacturers/
suppliers have to be selected, where service on site and the future supply of
spare components is guaranteed.
If required, certificates of quality and suitability of the products have to be
submitted (e.g. CE Declaration of Conformity).
The general requirements for the selected products include:

Quality 1st choice (2nd choice only upon written approval by the client)

Use of same brand throughout a system

Use of certified and approved brands as well as building materials and other
materials

All products (incl. those depicted in catalogues) to be used, have to be submitted


to the client for inspection. They have to be approved by the client in writing
(Sampling protocol).
With regard to planning and implementing technical objectives in accordance with
the building specification, both Europe-wide technical and commercial support is
available to individual manufacturers/products. All contacts listed, are familiar with
the structural and technical concept of the system and have object-specific
experience.

Page 190 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

4.1

28.02.2014

Construction
4.1.1

Faade
Name
Insulated Wall systems
(Iso-panel faades)

Manufacturers/Suppliers/Products
- Quality example Kingspan
Kingspan GmbH
Contact: Hr. Reidenbach (Managing Director)
Tel.: +49(0)281/95250 - 0
Fax: +49(0)281/95250 - 50
Mobile: +49(0)170/235 85 66
Email: ulrich.reidenbach@kingspan.de
Internet: www.kingspan.de
Paroc
Paroc GmbH
Contact: Hr. Bsch (Area sales manager)
Tel.: +49(0)2602/1061 07
Fax: +49(0)2602/1061 08
Mobile: +49(0)173/208 81 22
Email: arminboesch@paroc-panels.de
ThyssenKrupp
ThyssenKrupp Construction systems GmbH
Contact: Hr. Krause
Tel.: +49(0)451/407778-50
Fax: +49(0)451/407778-40
Email: andre.krause@thyssenkrupp.com
Internet: www.thyssenkrupp-steel-europe.com
Please note: Isopanels with fire protection characteristics and FM
approval (FM approved)
Hsch

4.1.2

Roof
Name
FPO Roof foil (PVC-free)

Manufacturers/Suppliers/Products
- Quality example Construction der
Paul Construction der GmbH
Contact: Hr. Steppe
Tel.: +49(0)721/9 45 87 61
Fax: +49(0)721/45 32 16
Mobile: +49(0)174/344 45 46
Email: Siegfried.steppe@Construction der.de
Internet: www.Construction der.de
Reference product:
- Construction der/Thermoplan
Sika
Sika Deutschland GmbH
Internet: www.sika.de
Reference product:
- Sika/Sarnafil
Polyfin
Polyfin AG
Internet: www.polyfin.de/

4.1.3

Light domes/Smoke and heat vent transom lights

Page 191 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

Name
Light domes/Smoke and heat vent
transom lights

28.02.2014

Manufacturers/Suppliers/Products
- Quality example Jet
Jet Tageslicht and RWA GmbH
Internet: www.jet-gruppe.de
Esser
Esser GmbH
Internet: www.esser.at
Essmann
Essmann GmbH
Internet: www.essmann.de

4.1.4

Industrial floor
Name
Steel fibre floor

Manufacturers/Suppliers/Products
- Quality example CBL ChemoConstruction Industrial floor GmbH
CBL ChemoConstruction Industrial floor GmbH
Contact: Hr. Schuldt
Tel.: +49(0)7131/9050-200
Fax: +49(0)7131/9050-444
Internet: www.cbl-chemoConstruction .de
BTH

Joint profiles

Bodentechnik Hehl GmbH


Contact: Hr. Hehl
Tel.: +49(0)8624/891 030
Fax: +49(0)8624/891 031
Email: www.franz.hehl@bth-boden.de
Internet: www.bth-boden.de
Condulith
Condulith Deutsche Industrial Bodentechnik GmbH
Internet: www.condulith.de
Reference product Sinusprofil (for main roads):
- Con/TDS KS 170+
Reference product Joint profile (for other areas):
- Con/KS 170+

Page 192 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

Name

28.02.2014

Manufacturers/Suppliers/Products
- Quality example HSD
HSD Industriebelge GmbH
Internet: www.hsd-profile.de

Steel fibres

Reference product Sinusprofil (for main roads):


- KS TDS 170+
Reference product Joint profile (for Freezer area + Lane heating
system):
- KS KW 170+
Reference product Joint profile (for other areas):
- KS 170+
Bekaert
Internet: www.bekaert.com
Reference products:
- Dramix RC 80/60 BN

Insulation (pressure-proof) fllor slab


Freezer rooms

Dramix ZL 60/105
BASF
Reference products:
- BASF/Styrodur 5000 CS
DOW

Hard aggregate dry shake application

Reference products:
- DOW/Floormate 700
Chemotechnik
Chemotechnik Abstatt GmbH
Internet: www.chemotechnik.de
Reference product:
- Silatex HZ 1
Korodur

Membrane below floor slab, if


hazardous substance /extinguishing
water retention is required

Korodur GmbH & Co.KG


Internet: www.korodur.de
Naue
Naue Sealing GmbH & Co.KG
Internet: www.nauesealing.com
Reference product:
- Carbofol PEHD 509

4.1.5

Loading bridges/Sectional doors/Dock shelter


Name
Loading bridges
Sectional doors
Dock shelters

Manufacturers/Suppliers/Products
- Quality example Hrmann
Hrmann KG Verkaufsgesellschaft
Contact: Hr. Fritz
Tel.: +49(0)5204/915-421
Fax: +49(0)5204/915-136
Mobile: +49(0)172 428 0097
Email: j.fritz.ibd@hoermann.de
Internet: www.hoermann.de
Reference product Dock shelter (for GI/GO cooling areas):
- Padded dock shelter DFCW

Page 193 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

Name

28.02.2014

Manufacturers/Suppliers/Products
- Quality example Albany
Albany Door Systems GmbH
Contact: Hr. Euchner
Tel.: +49(0)7042/817-566
Fax: +49(0)2941/766-136
Mobile: +49(0)160/9738 30 51
Email: hartmut.euchner@albint.com
Internet: www.albint.com
Crawford
Crawford Group AB
Contact: Hr. Bertelsen (Key Account)
Tel.: +49(0)40 547 006 341
Fax: +49(0)40 547 006 399
Email: mads.bertelsen@crawfordsolutions.com
Internet:www.crawfordsolutions.com
Caema Rite Hite
Caema Verladesystem GmbH
Contact: Hr. Bettendorf (Managing Director)
Tel.: +49(0)5693/9870-0
Fax: +49(0)5693/9870-20
Mobile: +49(0)151/2926 54 44
Email: abettendorf@caema-ritehite.com
Internet: ,www.caema-ritehite.com
Reference product Dock shelter (for GI/GO cooling areas):
- Padded dock shelter TP-903
Stertil
Stertil B.V.
Contact: Hr. Wijbenga (Business Unit Manager)
Tel.: +31(0)51 233-4444
Fax: +31(0)51 233-2099
Mobile: +31(0)651 582 320
Email: info@stertil.nl
Internet: www.stertil.nl
Novoferm
Novoferm GmbH
Contact: Hr. Ebeling
Mobile: +49(0)170 203 00 32
Email: daniel.ebeling@novoferm.com
Internet: www.novoferm.de
ASSA ABLOY (Sales Crawford, Albany)
ASSA ABLOY Entrance Systems
Contact: Hr. Struckmann
Tel.: +49(0)6071 208 0
Mobile: +49(0)170 76 36 641
Email: karsten.struckmann@assaabloy.com
Internet: www.assaabloyentrance.com

4.1.6

Rapid roll doors

Page 194 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

Name
Rapid roll doors for normal cold rooms
and non-refrigerated areas

28.02.2014

Manufacturers/Suppliers/Products
- Quality example Efaflex
Efaflex GmbH & Co. KG
Contact: Hr. Bhm, Hr. Hirth (Key Account Manager)
Tel.: +49(0)8765/82-131
Tel.: +49(0)8765/82-116 (Hr. Hirth)
Fax: +49(0)8765/82-100
Mobile: +49(0)160/703 83 10
Email: wolfgang.boehm@efaflex.com
Email: edgar.hirth@efaflex.com
Internet: www.efaflex.com
Reference products rapid roll doors (uninsulated):
- Efaflex/EFA-STR-L ACS (BBS Type E)

Efaflex/EFA-SST-L (BBS Type E)

Reference products, rapid roll doors (insulated):


- Efaflex/EFA-SST-L Premium (BBS Type D)

Efaflex/EFA-SST ISO 60 (BBS Type D)


Hrmann
Hrmann KG Verkaufsgesellschaft
Contact: Hr. Fritz
Tel.: +49(0)5204/915-421
Fax: +49(0)5204/915-136
Mobile: +49(0)172 428 0097
Email: j.fritz.ibd@hoermann.de
Internet: www.hoermann.de
Reference products, rapid roll doors (uninsulated):
- Hrmann/V 5030 SEL (BBS Type D)
Reference products, rapid roll doors (insulated):
- Hrmann/HS 7030 PU (BBS Type E)
Albany
Albany Door Systems GmbH
Contact: Hr. Kemmerling
Tel.: +49(0)2941/766740
Fax: +49(0)2941/766-136
Mobile: +49(0)170/33 00 450
Email: wolfgang.kemmerling@albint.com
Internet: www.albint.com
Reference products, rapid roll doors (uninsulated):
- Albany/RR 355 (BBS Type D)

Albany/RR 300 PLUS (BBS Type D)

Albany/RR 3000 (BBS Type D)


ASSA ABLOY (Sales Crawford, Albany)
ASSA ABLOY Entrance Systems
Contact: Hr. Struckmann
Tel.: +49(0)6071 208 0
Mobile: +49(0)170 76 36 641
Email: karsten.struckmann@assaabloy.com
Internet: www.assaabloyentrance.com

Page 195 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

Name
Rapid roll doors for freezer rooms

28.02.2014

Manufacturers/Suppliers/Products
- Quality example Cool- It with special construction by Plattenhardt + Wirth
Plattenhardt + Wirth GmbH Industrie- und KhlraumConstruction
Contact: Hr. Wirth
Tel.: +49(0)7542/9429-13
Fax: +49(0)7542/9429-36
Mobile: +49(0)171/3690 999
Email: info@plawi.de
Internet: www.plawi.de
Internet: www.coolit.com
Reference products, rapid roll doors (insulated for freezer room):
- Cool It/ZCE 12H FLEX-COMPLETE
Caema Rite Hite
Caema Verladesystem GmbH
Contact: Hr. Bettendorf (international Sales Manager)
Tel.: +49(0)5693/9870 - 0
Fax: +49(0)5693/9870 - 20
Mobile: +49(0)151/2926 54 44
Email: abettendorf@caema-ritehite.com
Internet: www.caema-ritehite.com
Reference products, rapid roll doors (insulated for Freezer room):

4.1.7

Rite Hite/ISO-TEK

Fire protection doors, Fire protection doors, Steel doors


Name
Fire protection doors, Fire protection
doors and Steel doors

Manufacturers/Suppliers/Products
- Quality example Hrmann
Hrmann KG Verkaufsgesellschaft
Internet: www.hoermann.de
Novoferm
Novoferm GmbH
Contact: Hr. Ebeling
Mobile: +49(0)170 203 00 32
Email: daniel.ebeling@novoferm.com
Internet: www.novoferm.de
Teckentrup
C. Teckentrup GmbH
Internet: www.c-teckentrup.de

4.1.8

External doors/External windows made from aluminium


Name
External doors and external windows
made from aluminium

Manufacturers/Suppliers/Products
- Quality example Schco
Schco International KG
Internet: www.schueco.com
Alumil

Telescopic sliding door system

Alumil Deutschland GmbH


Internet: www.alumil.de
Dorma

Transfer tray (GI Counter)

Reference products:
- Dorma/FTST-R/ES 200
Diewitz
Reference products:
- Diewitz/CD 741 SP with Counter window SF 22.741

Page 196 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

4.1.9

28.02.2014

Door fittings
Name
Door fittings

Manufacturers/Suppliers/Products
- Quality example Dorma
DORMA Holding GmbH + Co. KGaA
Internet: www.dorma.com
Reference products, internal doors (Accessories):
- Lever handles:
Dorma/Premium 8906 ER

4.1.10

Knob:

Dorma/Premium 3020 N

WC fittings:

Dorma/Premium 7122 WC

Rosette:

Dorma/6501

Handle bar:

Dorma TG 9391

Overhead door closer:

Dorma/T 93 with slide bar

Door stopper:

Dorma TZ/5000

Cold room construction


Name
Isopanel walls

Manufacturers/Suppliers/Products
- Quality example Kramer
Kramer GmbH KhlraumConstruction
Contact: Hr. Dufner (Sales Manager)
Tel.: +49(0)7665/93 59-0
Fax: +49(0) 7665/93 59-299
Mobile: +49(0)170/564 02 08
Email: m.dufner@kramer-kuehlraumConstruction .com
Internet: www.kramer-kuehlraumConstruction .com
Plattenhardt + Wirth
Plattenhardt + Wirth GmbH Industrie- und KhlraumConstruction
Contact: Hr. Wirth
Tel.: +49(0)7542/9429-13
Fax: +49(0)7542/9429-36
Mobile: +49(0)171/3690 999
Email: info@plawi.de
Internet: www.plawi.de
Isocab
Isocab
Contact: Hr. Benoit (Sales Manager)
Tel.: +32(0)56 73 43 32
Fax: +32(0)56 73 43 22
Mobile: +32(0)475 43 60 00
Email: piet.benoit@isocab.de
Internet: www.isocab.be
ThyssenKrupp
ThyssenKrupp Construction systeme GmbH
Contact: Hr. Krause
Tel.: +49(0)451/407778-50
Fax: +49(0)451/407778-40
Email: andre.krause@thyssenkrupp.com
Internet: www.thyssenkrupp-steel-europe.com
Please note: Isopanels with fire protection characteristics and FM
approval (FM approved)
Kingspan
Kingspan GmbH
Contact: Hr. Reidenbach (Managing Director)
Tel.: +49(0)281/95250 - 0
Fax: +49(0)281/95250 - 50
Mobile: +49(0)170/235 85 66
Email: ulrich.reidenbach@kingspan.de
Internet: www.kingspan.de

Page 197 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

Name
Cold room doors

28.02.2014

Manufacturers/Suppliers/Products
- Quality example Cool It
Coolit Isoliersysteme GmbH
Contact: Hr. Ziesak
Tel.: +49(0)5422/609-15
Fax: +49(0)5422/609-35
Mobile: +49(0)171/744 84 97
Email: h.ziesak@coolit.de
Internet: www.coolit.de
Ems
Ems Isoliertren GmbH
Internet : www.ems-isoliertueren.de

4.1.11

Walls/Ceilings (Lightweight construction)


Name
Wall/Ceiling systems

Manufacturers/Suppliers/Products
- Quality example Knauf
Knauf Gips KG
Internet: www.knauf.de
Lafarge

Mineral fibre and metal ceiling panels

Lafarge Gips GmbH


Internet : www.lafarge.com
OWA
Odenwald Faserplattenwerk GmbH
Internet : www.owa.de
Armstrong
Armstrong DLW GmbH
Tel.: +49(0)7142/71 - 185
Fax: +49(0)7142/71 - 248
Email: service_germany@armstrong.com
Internet: www.armstrong.de

4.1.12

Floor coverings
Name
Carpet and PVC

Manufacturers/Suppliers/Products
- Quality example Dunloplan
Dunloplan Object GmbH
Contact: Hr. Schuster (Key Account Manager)
Tel.: +49(0)6051/88 77 8 - 11
Fax: +49(0)6051/88 77 8 - 21
Mobile: +49(0)171/671 25 75
Email: info@dunloplan.de
Internet: www.dunloplan.de
Reference products, carpet:
- Dunloplan/Toro T 785 (dark grey)
Reference products PVC:
- Dunloplan/Derby AL 975 B
Armstrong
Armstrong DLW GmbH
Tel.: +49(0)7142/71 - 185
Fax: +49(0)7142/71 - 248
Email: service_germany@armstrong.com
Internet: www.armstrong.de

Page 198 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

4.1.13

28.02.2014

Markings/Signage
Name
Marking work

Manufacturers/Suppliers/Products
- Quality example Triflex
Follmann & Co.
Contact: Fr. Tietz (Product manager)
Tel.: +49(0)571/38 780 723
Email: marit.tietz@triflex.de
Internet: www.triflex.de
Reference products:
- Triflex/Type Preco Line EP 2K
(Surface Type Triflex Than Finish 511 shiny)
Awag
Awag Markings GmbH & Co. KG
Contact: Hr. Wagner
Tel.: +49(0)63 31/145 59 00
Fax: +49(0)63 31/145 59 10
Mobile: +49(0)176/61 54 42 69
Benkert R.M. Dekoration Marking
Contact: Fr. Benkert
Tel.: +49(0)931/2800 69

4.1.14

Lift
Name
Lift system

4.1.15

Manufacturers/Suppliers/Products
- Quality example ThyssenKrupp
Kone
Otis
Schindler

Locking system
Name
Locking system

Manufacturers/Suppliers/Products
- Quality example ASSA ABLOY
Internet: www.assaabloy.de

4.1.16

Equipment, Building
Name

Manufacturers/Suppliers/Products
- Quality example -

Kitchen (units)

Alno/Alnojet

Kitchen (appliances)

Surface of fronts and work surface in accordance with the client


(sampling)
Neff (energy efficient Class A+)
Appliances in accordance with the client (sampling)
Bosch (energy efficient Class A+)
Appliances in accordance with the client (sampling)
Siemens (energy efficient Class A+)
Appliances in accordance with the client (sampling)

Page 199 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

4.1.17

28.02.2014

Other
Name
Measuring airtightness
Blower door test

Manufacturers/Suppliers/Products
- Quality example Ian Jack - Construction technische Messungen
(Specialist for large-scale measurements)
Contact: Hr. Jack
Tel.: +49(0)5261/667979
Mobile: +49(0)151/1219 0000
Email: info@Construction technische-messungen.de
Internet: www.blower-door-xxl.com

Measuring floor evenness

Please note: measurement airtightness for rooms up to 600,000


m volume is to be possible.
BS Bodensysteme GmbH
Contact: Hr. Munz
Tel.: +49(0)7335/92 15 21
Fax: +49(0)7335/92 15 23
Mobile: +49(0)171/77 82 140
Email: info@bs-bodensystems.de
Internet: www.bs-bodensystems.de

Page 200 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

4.2

28.02.2014

Building technology
4.2.1

Heating system
Name
Boiler

Underfloor heating system


(Pipe system)

Manufacturers/Suppliers/Products
- Quality example Buderus
Bosch Thermotechnik GmbH
Contact: Hr. Christen
Tel.: +49(0)6441/418-1317
Fax: +49(0)6441/418-1319
Mobile: +49(0)173/653 0464
Email: andreas.christen@buderus.de
Internet: www.heiztechnik.buderus.de
Vissmann
Hoval
Rehau
Rehau AG + Co
Contact: Hr. Beck
Tel.: +49(0)9131/92-5639
Fax: +49(0)9131/92-515639
Email: thomas.beck@rehau.com
Internet: www.rehau.de
Lowatec
Lowatec
Contact: Wahl
Tel.: +49(0)6402/512993-1
Fax: +49(0)6402/512993-9
Mobile: +49(0)175/4350309
Email: detlef.wahl@lowatec-online.de
Internet: www.lowatec-online.de
Uponor

Heating water pump

Pressure maintenance
Fittings, heat distribution network (e.g.
valves)
Heat insulation

Cold insulation
Electric radiators
Split-air conditioning system

Uponor
Contact: Hr. Kromminga
Tel.: +49(0)40/30986-211
Fax: +49(0)40/30986-49-211
Mobile: +49(0)172/859 90 98
Email: kay.kromminga@uponor.com
Internet: www.uponor.de
Grandfos
Wilo
KSB
Reflex
Pneumatex
Oventrop
Danfoss
Kemper
Isover
Rockwool
Missel
Armacell
Kaiflex
Stiebel-Eltron
Daikin
Daikin
Hr. Krings
Tel.: +49(0)2161/40749-95
Fax: +49(0)2161/40749-96
Mobile: +49(0)172/8594883
Email: krings.v@daikin.de
Internet: www.daikin.com
Sanyo

Page 201 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

4.2.2

28.02.2014

Ventilation system
Name

Manufacturers/Suppliers/Products
- Quality example -

Split-air conditioning system

Daikin

Air curtain system

Daikin
Hr. Krings
Tel.: +49(0)2161/40749-95
Fax: +49(0)2161/40749-96
Mobile: +49(0)172/8594883
Email: krings.v@daikin.de
Internet: www.daikin.com
Sanyo
Biddle
Biddle BV (Export Dept.)
Contact: Hr. Postma
Tel.: +31(0)512/33 55 44
Fax: +31(0)512/33 55 54
Mobile: +31(0)651/883 332
Email: postma@biddle.nl
Internet: www.biddle.de

Ventilators

Fittings, air distribution network


(e.g. dampers, silencers, air vents)

Heat insulation

Cold insulation

4.2.3

Reference products:
- Biddle/IndAC M-150-A-0
Helios
Gebhardt
TLT
Trox
Schako
Wildeboer
Lindab
Isover
Rockwool
Missel
Armacell
Kaiflex

Sanitary system
Name
Sanitary fittings, ceramics
Sanitary fittings, stainless steel
Assembly elements

Separators
Pump station

Pressure booster
Water treatment system,
physical (e.g. filter)
Water treatment system,
chemical
(e.g. softening system, UV system)
Fittings, water distribution network
(e.g. valves)
Fittings, withdrawal points (e.g. mixer
tap, wash table)
Drain (e.g. roof, floor)
Heat insulation

Manufacturers/Suppliers/Products
- Quality example Keramag
Aqua Rotter
Kuhfu
Duofix
Geberit
Mepa
Passavant
Grandfos
Wilo
KSB
Grandfos
Wilo
Judo
Grnebeck
Judo
Grnebeck
Oventrop
Danfoss
Kemper
Hansa
Grohe
Dallmer
Passavant
Isover
Rockwool
Missel

Page 202 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

Name
Cold insulation
Electric hot water tank
Electric water heater
Fittings, plastic
Fittings, stainless steel

4.2.4

Manufacturers/Suppliers/Products
- Quality example Armacell
Kaiflex
Stiebel Eltron
Hewi
CWS
Aqua Rotter
Kuhfu

Sprinkler
Name
Sprinkler pump, diesel
Sprinkler pump, electric
Sprinkler
Wall hydrants

Alarm valve station


Hydrant pump, diesel
Hydrant pump, electric
External hydrants
Antifreeze
Hand-held fire extinguisher

4.2.5

28.02.2014

Manufacturers/Suppliers/Products
- Quality example All manufacturers/supplier approved in accordance with regulations
All manufacturers/supplier approved in accordance with regulations
All manufacturers/supplier approved in accordance with regulations
Minimax
Gloria
Neuhaus
All manufacturers/supplier approved in accordance with regulations

All manufacturers/supplier approved in accordance with regulations


Neuhaus
Minimax
Gloria

Electrical system
Name
Main overload distribution (MOVDL
Transformer
(e.g. cast-resin transformer)
Switchgear
(type tested components)
Switchgear
(complete type tested)
Emergency Power Assist System

Manufacturers/Suppliers/Products
- Quality example Siemens
TCM
Siemens
TCM
ABB
Stribel-John
Siemens
Deutz (motor)
Mc Alte (generator)
---> e.g. Caterpillar
---> e.g. Stiegele
Reschke Notstromanlagen
Reschke GmbH
Contact: Hr. Auer
Tel.: +49(0)7152/9014 15-0
Fax.: +49(0)7152/9014 15-18
Mobile: +49(0)172/722 82 91
Email: auer@reschke-notstrom.de
Internet: www.notstromaggregat-ww.de

Page 203 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

Name
Lights, general

28.02.2014

Manufacturers/Suppliers/Products
- Quality example Philips
Philips GmbH
Contact: Hr. Matthias Burczyk
Tel.: +49(0)30/789 12 78
Fax.: +49(0)30/789 898384
Mobile: +49(0)171/221 87 79
Email: matthias.burczyk@philips.com
Internet: www.philips.de
Reference product:
- LED-Strip light: Maxos LED

LED-Damp-proof room-diffuser luminaire: Pacific LED


LED-Grid light: PowerBalance RC462B

LED-Downlights: Luxspace LED


LED- External light: Clearway LED
Trilux
Trilux Vertrieb GmbH
Contact: Hr. Benjamin Halemeier
Mobile: +49(0)151/17 11 03 17
Email: b.halemeier@trilux.de
Internet: www.trilux.com
Reference product:
- LED-Strip light: Maxos LED

LED-Damp-proof room-diffuser luminaire: Pacific LED


LED-Grid light: PowerBalance RC462B

LED-Downlights: Luxspace LED


LED- External light: Clearway LED Reference product
Zumtobel
Zumtobel Licht GmbH
Contact: Hr. Carsten Eull
Tel.: +49(0)5261/212 7800
Fax.: +49(0)5261/212 7899
Mobile: +49(0)170/338 5260
Email: carsten.eull@zumtobel.com
Internet: www.zumtobel.de
Reference product:
- LED-Strip light: Maxos LED

LED-Damp-proof room-diffuser luminaire: Pacific LED


LED-Grid light: PowerBalance RC462B

LED-Downlights: Luxspace LED


LED- External light: Clearway LED Reference product:
- LED-Grid light: Mirel 2

Spotlights LED
(Freezer rooms)

LED-Downlights: FD1000 LED


LED-External light: Bega 9599
Norka
Norddeutsche Kunststoff- und Elektrogesellschaft Stcker mbH & Co.
KG Contact: Hr. Naggert
Tel.: +49(0)40/513009-18
Fax: +49(0)40/513009-8018
Email: harro.naggert@norka.de
Reference products:
- Norka/Polaris (for Freezer with e.g. 4x 42 W/4400 lm)

Norka/Talon LED (for SEL Freezer with e.g. 2x 42 W/4260 lm)

Page 204 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

Name

28.02.2014

Manufacturers/Suppliers/Products
- Quality example Zumtobel
Zumtobel Licht GmbH
Contact: Hr. Carsten Eull
Tel.: +49(0)5261/212 7800
Fax.: +49(0)5261/212 7899
Mobile: +49(0)170/338 5260
Email: carsten.eull@zumtobel.com
Internet: www.zumtobel.de
Reference product:
- LED-compact spotlight: Graft LED

Grid, recessed luminaires

External lights
Ballast Lights
Safety lighting
(e.g. single battery, central battery)
vollintegriertes Lichtregelsystem
(2-Kanal Multisensor)

Siteco
Ridi
Philips
Siteco
Philips
Osram
Philips
Przisa/Beghelli
Brck Electronic GmbH
Reference product:
B.E.G./PD4-M DIM Duo
Elpla
Reference product
Elpla/LuxWchter LW4-Duo-DIM
Esylux

Cable tray
Busbar loading station
Wall duct

Reference product:
Esylux/PD-C360i/24 DUODIM
Niedax
PUK
Schneider
Siemens
Ackermann/Obo-Bettermann
Reference product
- Obo Bettermann/Rapid 80 GS-D 9010RW (white unit)
These will have to be provided as samples, and be approved by
the client (Construction Dept, IT Dept.) when implementing an
alternative ducting, including sockets for high and low voltage.
Niedax
Alternative product (with Obo-Bettermann/Rapid 80 GS)
- Niedax/GKU 213A78T100

Sampling and approval via the client (Construction Dept. IT


Dept.).
Electric frost protection heating system System Oheim
(heating rods)
Fa. Oheim Cold room construction GmbH
Contact: Hr. Dr. Oheim
Tel.: +49(0)391/289 49-0
Fax: +49(0)391/289 49-11
Email: info@oheim.de
Internet: www.oheim.de
Electric lane heating system (heat
Hemstedt
mat)
Switches and sockets
Jung (standard programme)
DALI-Light control system
Philips
(Sensor and control unit on DALIbasis)
Philips/Occuschalter DALI
Fire alarm system
Esser
Notifire
Intercom
Siedle
Ritto
ELA
Bose (central)
Penton (Loudspeaker)

Page 205 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

4.2.6

28.02.2014

ICA
Name
Automation system

Manufacturers/Suppliers/Products
- Quality example Priva (represented among other by Fa. Cofely NL Dresden)

L-Box

Fa. Cofely (NL Dresden)


Tel.: +49(0)351/2533-656
Fax: +49(0)351/2533-681
Mobile: 49(0)172/7903971
Email: norbert.schumann@cofely.de
Internet: www.cofely.de
Sauter
Kieback & Peter
Johnson Controls
Saia Burgess
Honeywell
Siemens
Yellowstone Soft
(Yellowstone Soft)
Contact: Hr. Betz
Tel.: +49(0)7393/91320
Fax: +49(0)7393/91322
Email: betz@yellostone-soft.de
Internet: www.yellowstone-soft.de

COMMISSIONING
Commissioning of the technical systems has to be coordinated and carried out
with the relevant external firms, taking into account the follow up charts and/or
construction schedules (in particular in respect of the necessary preliminary
work).
This also applies to Construction works (e.g. fire protection doors, sectional doors,
rapid roll doors, loading bridges, sun protection).
The M&E and/or Facility Management responsible for future operating of the
facility has to be instructed, in consultation with the client (Distribution Dept.), and
provided with in-depth training on the technical systems during their
commissioning.
If the utilities (e.g. power, water) required for commissioning are not available on
the agreed date, then these utilities have to be provided separately (e.g. mobile
emergency power system, water tank).
All components of the technical installations have to be coordinated (e.g.
hydraulic comparison of the pipe system) and all regulating settings have to be
determined within the scope of commissioning.

Page 206 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Any later amendments and/or adjustments to regulating settings, special relevant


set point values (e.g. room and alarm temperatures, time checks) may only be
carried out with the written approval of the client and/or operations.
All technical installations have to undergo, at a minimum, the following
performance tests, which have to be recorded:

Functionality testing for all components


These include, for example:
- Activation/Deactivation (automatic and/or manually) of the systems
- Target/Performance comparison of the technical parameters
(e.g. temperatures, volume flows, pressures, sound levels)
- Calibrating and/or adjusting sensors (e.g. temperature)
- Regulating and control devices

Operational and error messages for all relevant components (1:1 tests)

Alarm transmission (e.g. via ICA technology)

A condition for the acceptance by the client is, subsequent to


commissioning, the evidencing of an error-free test operation of the
technical installations over a period of at least 48h (e.g. extract history error
messages).
In general, following commissioning all the utilised operational and/or
consumable materials (e.g. Diesel for Emergency Power Assist System,
regenerating salt for the softening system) have to be replenished.
Construction works (additionally)
All cold rooms have to be tested for cold bridges with a thermography camera and
be recorded.
Please note: The test is to be executed after the set room temperatures have
been achieved.
Freezer rooms have to be additionally measured (Blower door test) for
airtightness and recorded.
The following requirements apply:

Measurements must be carried out according to the


Technical Standard L2 (Measuring Air Permeability of Building Envelopes)
of the Air Tightness Testing & Measurement Association (ATTMA)

Measurements must be carried out before starting


refrigeration, after the cold room construction - including all doors and doors has been completed and after all constructional openings (e.g. cables,
pipelines) have been sealed
Please note: Due to the limited temperature suitability of the ventilators, once
the set point room temperatures of the freezer rooms have been achieved,
measurements cannot be carried out at low pressure, rather only at high
pressure using warmer air from the non-freezer rooms
The air volume flow should preferably be measured at low pressure with a 50
Pa differential pressure between the freezer room and surrounding areas
Air permeability of the room/building (q50) of a maximum of 0.35m3/(h * m2)
based on the inner, envelope surface of the freezer room
Please note: The air permeability of the room/building (q50) is to be
calculated using the air volume flow due to infiltration measured at 50 Pa
differential pressure, based on the inner envelope surface of the
room/building.

Page 207 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

According to the Technical Standard L2 (ATTMA), the following reference


values apply for air permeability (q50):
Normal:
q50 0.35 m/(h * m)
Best practice:
q50 0,.20 m/(h * m)
If the maximum air permeability is exceeded, then the leaks and leakage
points are to be located and remedied.
An airtightness test can be utilised for measuring when locating the leaks and
leakage points, usually by utilising high pressure using smoke or at low
pressure at a lower temperature of the freezer room, for example. In this case,
the use of a thermographic camera may help to locate the warmer infiltration
air.
Please note: The measurement is to be executed by a specialist company for
large-scale measurements (Refer to Manufacturers/Suppliers/Products). All
documentation (e.g. layouts, elevations, overviews, sections) required for
measuring, as well as any preparation required (e.g. closure of openings,
accessibility), have to be implemented and/or executed in direct coordination with
the specialist company.
Heating System works (additional)
In particular, the pressure maintenance of the industrial underfloor heating system
during the installing of the concrete floor, has to be provided with compressed air
(for detecting leaks).
The first heating of the floor slab may only be commenced 28 days after
completion of the slab and must be recorded.
It has to be heated gradually in agreement with the concrete floor manufacturer
(building contractor). As a rule, the flow temperature at 5 K above the output
temperature of the floor slab has to be increased by 2 K gradually in 12 hourintervals up to the maximum flow temperature.
This flow temperature has to be maintained for approx. 1 day and then gradually
reduced, using the same method.
The heat distribution network must be flushed completely before commissioning.
Treated or softened water must be used for the initial filling - normally with a total
hardness of a maximum of 0.11dH (alkaline earth ions: 0.02 mmol/l) for a heating
capacity greater than 500kW).
Sanitary works (additional)
After commissioning of the sanitary system installation, a test for the potable
water quality (potable water analysis) has to be carried out and a certificate
submitted.
6

ACCEPTANCE
The safety-related acceptances and/or inspection of the building and technical
systems in accordance with regulations (e.g. technical inspection regulations) are
to be carried out by the authorising bodies and/or by an expert appointed by the
client. The safety-relevant acceptances and/or inspections have to be arranged by
the respective system installer at his own expense.
All documents required (e.g. evidencing and certificates, licenses) have to be
made available for the commissioning of the Distribution Centre and/or for
obtaining the operating license from the authorising bodies.
Please note: For the load-bearing structure and roof structure, as well as for the
electrical installation, a separate inspection and/or acceptance by an independent
structural engineer and electrical expert is to take place (refer to Lidl Building
Code).
Acceptances are to be agreed with the client and/or authorising bodies.
In respect of the acceptance by the client or by the expert appointed by the client,
a minimum of the following points have to be guaranteed and/or made available:

Page 208 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Documentation (as described hereinafter)

Lifting platform and/or forklift truck with man basket

Measuring devices (e.g. for temperature, humidity, volume flow, rotating field,
impedance)

Thermography camera (possibly provided by Lidl)

Testing gas (e.g. fire alarm, gas alarm)

Mobile communication device (Walkie-Talkie)

Presence of in-house maintenance engineer, Lidl

Presence of the technical contact person, Company

The complete functionality of the refrigeration system (compliance with design


parameters such as room temperatures, suction and condensing pressures) has
to be proven during the test operation and - at the request of the client - within
the first operating year under full-load conditions (e.g. midsummer).
In addition, the documentation for the structural and technical installations is to be
submitted at the time of acceptance by the client at the latest.
Please note: The documentation is a prerequisite for acceptance by the
client.
At least the following general requirements apply, when it comes to duplicating
documentation (copies):
Creation of at least 3 hard copies and 1 in data file format
(*dxf or *dwg for plans, *pdf and/or *Word for documents)
Copies in the national language and, if required, in English
A uniform structure/layout for all subsections and installations according to the
specification from the client
(Refer to Appendix sample documents index)
Please note: The structure/layout of documents in data file format is to be the
same as that for documents in hard copy.
The index for the complete set of documentation is to be attached to every,
separate file and the relevant file chapter is to be highlighted (e.g. in bold,
colour marking).
Hard copies are to be compiled in ring folders (DIN A4) and documents in data
file format are to be saved to a CD-ROM
Please note: The ring folders are to be labelled as follows:
- Number of file or folder (e.g. file X or Y)
- Chapter (Trade/Works group / Separate trade/works and/or
installation/unit/facility/category index)
Technical drawings are to be labelled as "revision plans" (hard copy revision
plans with date, stamp and signature)
Plans and documents in file format are to be named according to plan and
document code (Refer to Appendix sample plan and document code)
A minimum of the following general requirements apply for the contents/index of
documentation (depending on trade or installation):
General
- Address and telephone lists of contractors (and sub-contactors, if
applicable), suppliers, maintenance and service companies
- Descriptions of installations and services (short descriptions)
- Access data for access to control/regulation equipment (e.g. passwords)
Please note: If using a freely programmable controller (FPC), it is
imperative to provide the complete programme in data file format
(editable)!
Technical drawings (revision plans)
Page 209 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Plan lists (overview of revision plans with plan code)


Plans of external facilities (site plans, contour maps, excavation plans,
conduit plans, detailed plan of traffic areas, surfaces of external areas/
facilities)
- Construction plans (foundation plans, formwork plans, reinforcement
plans, assembly plans, position plans, details)
- Architectural plans (site plans, layouts, profiles, elevations overviews,
details)
- Installation plans (layouts, profiles, details, conduit plans)
- Schematic/function and block diagrams
- Electrical switching and control/regulating plans (circuit diagrams)
- Cable lists
- Locking plan (locking system)
Calculations (evidencing)
(e.g. area calculations, structural calculations)
-

Descriptions and data sheets


Parts and quantities lists (overview of components with details of
installation location)
(e.g. sample lists, standard door lists, other door lists)
- Product descriptions and data sheets
- Operating and/or instruction manuals
The following particularly applies for refrigeration plants, air-conditioning
systems, heat pumps:
* Operating manuals for refrigeration plants in accordance with
DIN EN 378-2
(safety instructions and/or data sheets for refrigeration plant)
* Plant recording for refrigeration plants in accordance with
DIN EN 378-2
(documentation on the servicing/maintenance of refrigeration plants)
- Safety instructions
- Maintenance, servicing and care instructions
- (maintenance catalogs, lists of recurring inspections, inspection logs)
- Spare parts lists for components subject to wear and tear
- Material safety data sheets for consumables
Statements/certificates
-

Copy of the acceptance certificates from authorities, experts, test


engineers, and utility companies, including confirmation that any defects
have been remedied
Copy of the acceptance report from the client, including confirmation that
any defects have been remedied
Copy of the buildings energy certificates
(certificate detailing the overall energy efficiency of the building)
Copy of the acceptance report for the load-bearing structure and roof
structure from separate structural engineers (according to Lidl Building
Code)
Copy of the acceptance report for the electrical installations from separate
electrical experts (according to Lidl Building Code)
Copy of the acceptance report from the sprinkler system expert
Declaration of conformity for the complete system/plant
(specialised company declaration)
Declarations of conformity for components
(e.g. CE declarations, certificates, test and manufacturer, certificates of
quality, material certificates)
Technical qualification certificates for the employees from the contractor
Page 210 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

(e.g. certificates, employee references)


Expert opinions
Handover certificates (e.g. for accessories, spare parts)
Briefing protocol for the user
Copy of the maintenance and service contracts

Quality assurance protocols (measurement and test protocols)


-

Protocols for 48-hour, trouble-free test operation of installations after


commissioning
Protocols for testing the error message thread
Protocol for escalating error from Priority 2 to Priority 1 using ICA
technology
Protocol for exchange of information from ICA technology to the
refrigeration plant for heat recovery mode
Protocols for final settings for systems and components
(e.g. setting values for operational, safety and monitoring devices as well
as control/regulating)
Commissioning protocols, including functionality tests
Protocols for adjusting sensors (comparative measurement and/or
calibration)
Potable water quality certificate (potable water analysis)
Protocols for flushing (cleaning) pipes
Protocols for camera inspection of main services/pipework
Protocols for leak tests
Protocols for pressure tests (compressive strength tests)
Protocols for welding joints tests
Protocols for thermography in cold rooms
Protocols for measuring air tightness (blower door test), freezer rooms
Protocols for load plate tests planum
Protocols (evidencing) for the suitability for heavy load capacity of driving
areas
Protocols for levelness tolerances, floor slb in the warehouse
Protocols for abrading wear, floor slabs in the warehouse
Protocols for heating up the floor slab, underfloor heating (temperature
curve)
Protocols for cooling freezer rooms (temperature curve)
Protocols for exhaust gas measurement (e.g. by chimney sweep)
Protocols for measurement of the layer thickness of corrosion protective
coatings
Protocols for measuring air volume
Protocols for hydraulic compensation in piping network
Protocols for measuring earthing (lightning protection, potential
equalisation)
Protocols for measuring impedance and resistance
Protocols for electrical thermography in switch cabinets, if applicable

Page 211 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

MAINTENANCE/INSPECTION/SERVICE
With regard to the technical systems, a separate quotation has to be submitted for
maintenance/inspection/services, including costs and/or expenses for
consumables, cleaning materials and personnel as well as travelling expenses. All
replacement materials will be compensated against submission of receipt.
This also applies to Construction works (e.g. fire protection doors, sectional doors,
rapid roll doors, loading bridges, lift).
The scope of services for maintenance/inspection/care/service has to be
determined in accordance with the regulations as well as in agreement with the
client.
Please note: The maintenance engineer and/or Facility Manager from the
Distribution Centre is to participate in repeat annual training for the technical
systems.
The following services have to be provided to obtain an unrestricted, 5-year
warranty period and/or 10/20-year warranty period for the roof.
The following services (minimum) have to be provided for implementing and
complying with the obligations catalogue of the insurer (safety regulations of the
insurer) as of 01.03.2011:
Fire alarm system

Annual service with protocol by specialist firm

Quarterly functionality test with protocol by specialist

Extinguishing systems (water)

Annual inspection with protocol by specialist

Monthly fire drill and visual inspection with protocol by specialist

Monthly pump test for the emergency power supply and fill level control of the
water tank with protocol by specialist

Extinguishing systems (gas systems)

Annual inspection with protocol by specialist

Monthly inspection of the fill level with protocol by specialist

Fire extinguisher

Service in 2-year intervals with protocol by specialist firm

Internal and external hydrants (on company grounds)

Page 212 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Service in 2-year intervals with protocol by specialist firm

Intruder alarm system (IAS)

Annual service protocol by specialist firm or approved installer

Emergency Power Assist System (Emergency power supply)

Monthly test run and subsequent fill level control of the diesel retention tank
with protocol by instructed person

For diesel motors: annual service with protocol by specialist firm

Smoke and heat exhaust systems ( SHVS) and mechanical smoke extraction
systems (MSS)

Annual inspection with protocol by specialist firm or approved installer

Electrical systems (electric installation)

Inspection in 3-year intervals with protocol by expert

Lightning protection system

Inspection in 5-year intervals with protocol by expert

Fire barriers (fire protection doors and fire protection dampers)

Annual functionality test with protocol by specialist

Fire barriers (fire protection doors in respect of track-bound conveyors)

Annual inspection with protocol by specialist firm

Other technical systems (e.g. cooling systems, compressors, ventilation systems


and hydraulic systems)

Service in accordance with manufacturer specification or state of the art

Page 213 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

Page 214 of 215

Specification Distribution Centre International 2014

28.02.2014

APPENDICES

Master details Distribution Centre Int. 2014

Sample project Heating Services works for Distribution Centre Int. 2014

Sample project Heating Services works for Distribution Centre Int. 2014

Sample project Sanitary works for Distribution Centre Int. 2014

Sample project Sprinkler works for Distribution Centre Int. 2014

Sample project Electrical works for Distribution Centre Int. 2014

Sample project ICA works for Distribution Centre Int. 2014

Sample project Refrigeration works for Distribution Centre Int. 2014


(Only informative for interface explanation)

Standard load, table, high racks for Distribution Centre Int. 2014

Specification data point designation for Distribution Centre Int. 2014

Network requirements building control (DDC) for Distribution Centre Int. 2014

Lidl-Specifications BACnet/IP for Distribution Centre Int. 2014 (as of


19.12.2013)

Order form L-Box 2014 (as of 13.03.2014)

Return form L-Box 2014 (as of 24.10.2012)

Form for Registration of the Connection for Distribution Centre to BCS 2014

Process adjustment central BCS (Warehouse BCS) for Distribution Centre


Int. 2014

Principle Error message thread for Distribution Centre Int. 2014

Sample List of standard doors for Distribution Centre Int. 2014

Sample List of special doors for Distribution Centre Int. 2014

Sample Locking plan for Distribution Centre Int. 2014

Sample Plan code for Distribution Centre Int. 2014

Sample Document code for Distribution Centre Int. 2014

Sample List of plans for Distribution Centre Int. 2014

Sample Protocol for technical clarification for Distribution Centre Int. 2014

Sample Price index for Distribution Centre Int. 2014

Sample Cost control for Distribution Centre Int. 2014

Sample Construction schedule for Distribution Centre Int. 2014

Sample Sampling list for Distribution Centre Int. 2014

Sample Interface list Building - Building technology - client for Distribution


Centre Int. 2014

Sample Checklists of functions and control settings for Distribution Centre Int.
2014 Construction works + Mechanical & Electrical (M&E)

Sample Index of documentation for Distribution Centre Int. 2014

Questionnaire for LOG, BES, IT, VW for Distribution Centre Int. 2014

Questionnaire for Sprinkler system, New Construction for Distribution Centre


Int. 2014

Questionnaire for Design outputs for Distribution Centre Int. 2014

Template Storage requirements (as at 24.03.2011)

Monthly project report for Distribution Centre Int. 2014

Page 215 of 215